Home

6200E - Teledyne Analytical Instruments

1. SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP VIEW KEYPAD FUNCTIONS Y KEY FUNCTION SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 PRM Moves to the next Parameter 8 1 8 ENTR PRM gt Moves to the previous Parameter NX10 Moves the view forward 10 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU data points channels CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT NEXT Moves to the next data point channel PREV Moves to the previous data SETUP X X DATA poinyenannel PV10 Moves the view back 10 data VIEW EDIT EXIT points channels Keys only appear as needed SETUP X X CONC DATA AVAILABLE NEXT VIEW EXIT SETUP X X 00 00 00 S2SCN1 0 0 PPM PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 PRM gt EXIT SETUP X X PNUMTC DATA AVAILABLE PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT SETUP X X 00 00 00 SMPFLW 000 0 cc m PRM EXIT SETUP X X CALDAT DATA AVAILABLE PREV VIEW EXIT SETUP X X 00 00 00 S2SLP1 0 000 PV10 PREV PRM PRM EXIT M6200E Rev A1 125 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 11 2 2 Editing iDAS Data Channels IDAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program The following list of key strokes shows how to edit using the front panel SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 EXIT will return to the previous SAMPLE 8 1 8 ENTR disp
2. DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION EXIT to Return PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT main Sample Display DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO s SET CAL Press SET to select the Analog Output channel to be configured Then Press Y EDIT to continue DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V CAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO mca RANGE 5V DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO SET EXIT SET CAL EXIT c DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS 0 mV v DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 SET SET EDIT EXIT v DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 AUTO CAL ON DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED YES SET SET EXIT SET CAL EXIT 88 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To select manual output calibration for a particular channel activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 REC OFS 0 mV Exit to return to the main 2 sample display PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT EN sov AQUTSCAHBRATEDSINO DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 AUTO CAL ON SSET CAL EXIT lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT be configured Then press EDIT to continue DIAG AIO AOUT AUTO CAL ON Press SET gt to select the analog output channel to Y DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V CAL ON ENTR EXIT SET SET EDI
3. M6200E Rev A1 153 Operating Instructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 12 4 7 Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags Teledyne Analytical Instruments implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition Each bit can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag The default settings for these bit flags are Table 6 29 Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments STATUS FLAG NAME DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT WARNING FLAGS SAMPLE FLOW WARNING 0001 PMT DET WARNING UV LAMP WARNING HVPS WARNING DARK CAL WARNING RCELL TEMP WARNING IZS TEMP WARNING PMT TEMP WARNING CONV TEMP WARNING OPERATIONAL FLAGS Instrument Off In Manual Calibration Mode 0200 In Zero Calibration Mode 0400 In Span Calibration Mode 0800 UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS UGM 0000 PPM 4000 6000 SPARE UNUSED BITS 0080 8000 UNASSIGNED FLAGS Box Temp Warning Front Panel Warning Sample Press Warning Analog Cal Warning System Reset Cannot Dyn Zero Relay Board Warning Invalid Conc NOTES It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit This allows the grouping of similar flags such as all temperature warnings under the same status bit Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as ea
4. 234 Basic Software Operation eer RR Ra Exe re RENE 236 Viewing and Clearing warning lt menm 240 Example of Signal I O Function 244 CPU Status Indicator D RU E EREEFeRREADXR MR Ta Dre EFIE 245 Pre Amplifier Board nennen nenne nnne 263 Triboelectric Charging lt ete Dn EHE rta apr peragere eR ix ex Eger sakes 265 Basic anti ESD Work nennen 268 Basic Sample Display nemen nem nemen nennen 275 Sample Display Menu Units with Z S Valve IZS Option installed 276 Primary Setup Menu Except IDAS nemen nene 277 Primary Setup Menu IDAS Jiss aee quat ga 278 Secondary Setup Menu COMM amp VARS 279 Secondary Setup Menu COMM Menu with Ethernet 280 Secondary Setup Menu HESSEN 281 Secondary Setup Menu nennen 282 LIST OF TABLES Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table
5. Wait until it falls back below 0 5 ppb M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB XXX X This may take several minutes The SPAN key now appears lt TST TST gt SPAN CONC EXIT during the transition from zero to span You may see both keys Press ENTR to change the M P CAL RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the v H2S measurements n Press EXIT to leave the calibration T 1 ST ASI ENTRYSPAN EXIT 4 unchanged and return to the previous menu M P CAL RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X EXIT returns to the main lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC gt EXIT SAMPLE display NOTE If the ZERO or SPAN keys are not displayed during zero or span calibration the measured concentration value is too different from the expected value and the analyzer does not allow to zero or span the instrument Consult Section 11 3 for more information on calibration problems 162 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 3 Manual Calibration Checks Informal calibration checks which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer s response curve are recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer s performance The following section describes the basic method for manually checking the calibration of the Model 6200E analyzer in H2S measurement mode The same method may be used to manually check the calibrate the M6200E analyzers configured f
6. SETUP X X 0 MEASURE MODE H2S See Section 6 8 1 gt NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT for instructions L this setting SETUP X X 1 DAS HOLD 15 0 Minutes v SETUP X X DAS HOLD OFF 15 0 Minutes NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT 1 5 0 ENTR EXIT a CL y SETUP X X 1 TPC ENABLE ON L Toggle this keys to change setting PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X TPC ENABLE ON a ON ENTR EXIT e Toggle this keys to change setting SETUP X X 50 0 DegC M RNT E PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT DO NOT change theses set points unless SETUP X X 50 0 DegC specifically instructed to by PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT T API Customer Service PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT EM SETUP X X 5 DYN_ZERO ON PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X DYN ZERO ON e ON ENTR EXIT SETUP X X 6 DYN_SPAN ON L Toggle this keys to change setting PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT EXIT SETUP X X DYN SPAN ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle this keys to change setting SETUP X X 7 CONC_PRECUISION 1 SETUP X X CONC_PRECUISION 3 AUTO 4 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X PREV NEXT JUMP 8 CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day L Toggle these keys to change setting EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUPX X 1 ADJ 0 Sec Day 0 ENTR EXIT 0 Y L Toggle tese keys to change setting
7. 151 Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments csse nennen 154 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of H2S and SO Calibration Gases 159 AutoCal Modes oie HP TE 173 AutoCal Attribute Setup eee eee eee nena nena eee nnn 173 Example Auto GCal Sequence en feriae epa isan e e a se Rl Ex e ced ES 174 Calibration Data Quality m meme nene 177 Activity Matrix for Calibration Equipment amp 180 Activity Matrix for Calibration Procedure ssessssesee emnes 180 Activity e perro text ee Trier Gitte pe er exe ecc men eee den Tees 182 Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span 183 M6200E Preventive Maintenance 5 190 Predictive Uses for Test amp nme nnne 192 M6200E Multigas Valve meme 214 Relay Board Status LED S wo cscccecetecceccatevecsceetectacstaseaecnettiescaerateceteceneecnsperedes 227 Front Panel Status LEDS trea lus te iste 233 Warning Messages Indicated 241 Test Functions Possible Causes for Out Of Range 243 Re
8. TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ID HESN COM2 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SET gt EDIT EXIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Y ENTR key accepts the new settings SETUP X X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 EXIT key ignores the SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU new settings y TYE1 TYPE2 ENTR EXIT COMM EXIT Y SETUP X X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE2 Press to change protocol type OFF ENTR EXIT _ NOTE While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and COM2 The TYPE selection affects both Ports 6 12 4 5 Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode The Teledyne Analytical Instruments implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different modes of response for the analyzer Table 6 28 M6200E Hessen Protocol Response Modes MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION CMD This is the Default Setting Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format Styel and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command BCC Responses from the instrument are always delimited with lt STX gt at the beginning of the response ETX at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code checksum regardless of the command encoding
9. sing the Data Acquisition System iDAS 1 IDAS Structur amp uiinace eene 1 1 iDAS Channels A 2ziDAS Parameters irs icut rs e Aree 3 IDAS Triggering EVents eer rk coca ened ined rsh RE ERROR rss efault iDAS Channels 1 Viewing iDAS Data and Settings 2 Editing iDAS Data Channels 3 Trigger 4 Editing iDAS Parameters 5 Sample Period and Report Period 6 Number of Records bas connie deed Senso edd de rte de anu au ee 7 1 D 2 325 2 2 2 2 2 4 R9S 232 Report FUNCHON os M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual 2 8 Compact Report 2 9 Starting Date ice ee Lbs creare wk Lun aA de aee 2 10 Disabling Enabling Data Channels 2 11 HOLDOFF Feature 3 Remote iDAS Configuration emote Operation of the 1 Remote Operation Using the External Digital I O 1 1 Status Outputs ceci rere 1 2 Control INPUTS rane vous e emote Operation Using the External Serial 1 Terminal Operating 2 Help Commands in Te
10. 141 Control Inputs with external 5 V power 141 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface esses enne 148 Setup for Manual Calibration without Z S valve IZS Option 160 Setup for Manual Calibration with Z S Valve Option Installed 164 Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z S Valve or IZS Option 169 Typical Setup for Manual Calibration of M6200E in Multigas Measurement Mode 172 Sample Particulate Filter Assembly 193 Zero Air Scrubber Assembly eire e 196 H2S gt SO Converter Assembly nennen nenne nnne 199 Critical Flow Orifice Assembly 201 UV ADSOLPUIOM e IE 205 UV HIG Hits erret anise T tentia ay shee eure pne rcd es aea dep UE 207 Source UV Lamp Corstruction ata die dain reed dee sind ee baie inea ese aman 208 Excitation Lamp UV Spectrum Before After Filtration 209 PMT Optical Filter Bandwidth scssi aspe Innen 209 Effects of Focusing Source UV in Sample 210 M6200E Gas Flow and Location of Critical Flow Orifice
11. Deol AVG Set 0 0 Records Hew Param Trigger Event JATIMER E Enable Channel Hold off Duplicate Print Reports Compact Reports Cio a x en aa J Edit Automatic Timer Settings Parameter TDET Start Date Jan 02 Delete Sample Mode z 0cme ii ample Period DOO HM MM Period ROO HMM fi o E Store number of samples in average Figure 6 15 APICOM user interface for configuring the iDAS Once an iDAS configuration is edited which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review alteration or documentation and archival Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures The APICOM user manual Teledyne Analytical Instruments part number 039450000 is included in the APICOM installation file which can be downloaded at http www teledyne api com software apicom Although Teledyne Analytical Instruments recommends the use of APICOM the iDAS can also be accessed and configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal Figure 6 16 However all configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from of a text file which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure M6200E Rev A1 137 Operatin
12. 5 7 Additional 5 7 1 Printed Manuals Option 70 5 7 2 Manual on CD Part number 047400200 nemen renes nennen 5 8 Extended Warranty Options 92 amp 93 5 9 Special Software 5 9 1 Maintenance Mode Switch 5 9 2 Second Language 5 9 3 Dilution Ratio Option perks 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6 1 OVERVIEW Of Operating modeGs 2e curre dts Sine a drain a 6 2 Sample 6 2 1 Test Functions 6 2 2 Warning Messages M6200E Rev A1 3 Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 3 Galibration lore 6 3 1 SETUP PASS Calibration Password Security 6 4 Setup Mode osi MUS RR RR HE 6 4 1 SETUP Mode Password Security 6 5 SETUP CFG Viewing the Analyzer s Configuration Information 6 6 SETUP CLK Setting the Internal Time of Day Clock 6 7 SETUP RNGE Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration Available Analog Output Signals cece nme nememese en meme nne eminens nne 2 Physical R
13. 10 2 6 Measurement Interferences 10 2 6 1 Direct Interference 21 20 eet Tere dene creare d tied esate 10 2 6 2 UV Absorption by Ozone init an hem eran a E n seme e be Nr emn ete beaten 10 2 6 3 Dilution 10 2 6 4 Third Body Quenchitg oeil eI shag reis a LO 256 5 Lig htsPOM Wt om detracto ae eile awe 10 3 Pneumatic Operation 10 31 Sample Gas FIOW De uoc eret v tres evan din ga 10 3 2 Multigas Measurement amp H2S SO Switching Valve 10 3 3 Flow Rate aa 10 3 3 1 Critical Flow Orifice 10 3 4 Sample Particulate Filter aici cs eite rere dee ct cc eave een hn since eee ma 10 3 5 Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker 10 3 6 SO 10 3 7 Pneumatic 10 3 7 1 Sample Pressure Sensor 10 3 7 2 Sample Flow Sensor 10 4 Electronic Operation 10 4 T 4C PU obese ated eh Po ace M lont ca 10 4 1 1 DISKON CHIP 1 oerte ta emer ir re Pre Febr cea orna ar ner Rad gamer ore re er VER AE EEL gee TRA TER E TOR 10 4 1 2 Flash
14. SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP v SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR v SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X COMM SECONDARY SETUP MENU EXIT returns to the previous menu COMMUNIGATIONS MENU SETUP X X ID COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X X COM1 MODE 0 SET gt EDIT EXIT EXAMPLE SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 EXIT key ignores SET SET EDIT EXIT the new setting SETUP X X PREV NEXT COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 ENTR key accepts the new setting ENTR EXIT SETUP X X NEXT ON COM1 d RATE 9600 ENTR 118 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 10 10 COM Port Testing The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu This test sends a string of 256 w characters to the selected COM port While the test is running the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker To initiate the test press the following key sequence SAMPLE RANGE 25000806 FORSK SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU Select which p port to lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP COND Exi test SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP OX COMI MODED 8 1 8 ENTR SET EDIT EXI
15. SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM EXIT SETUP X X anco MENU SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU B CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT to the previous ID COM1 COM2 EXIT J EXIT returns menu SETUP X X J COM1 MODE 0 modes is displayed here Use PREV and NEXT keys to move between available modes A mode is enabled by toggling the ON OFF key SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X COM1 as MODE OFF NEXT ENTR EXIT C Continue pressing next until 3 SETUP COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL OFF PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL ON PREV NEXT Continue pressing the NEXT and PREV keys to select any other modes you which to enable or disable ENTR EXI ENTR key accepts the new settings EXIT key ignores the new settings M6200E Rev A1 117 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 10 9 COM Port Baud Rate To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports press Select which COM port to configure Press SET until you reach COM1 BAUD RATE 2 Use PREV and NEXT keys to move between available baud rates 300 1200 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 4
16. p PPM PPB GM ENTER EXIT ENTR accepts the new unit SETUPX X CONC UNITS tm EXIT returns to the SETUP PPM PPB UGM ENTER EXIT menu NOTE Concentrations displayed in mg m and pg m use standard temperature and pressure STP The conversion factors from volumetric to mass units used in the M6200E are SO ppb x 2 86 ug m ppm x 2 86 mg m H2S ppb x 1 52 ug m ppm x 1 52 mg m 76 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 7 8 Dilution Ratio The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas before it enters the sample inlet Using the dilution ratio option is a 4 step process 1 Select reporting range units Follow the procedure in Section 6 7 7 2 Select the range Use the procedures in Section 6 7 3 6 7 6 Make sure that the SPAN value entered is the maximum expected concentration of the undiluted calibration gas and that the span gas is either supplied through the same dilution inlet system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration For example with a dilution set to 100 a 1 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 100 ppm sample gas if the span gas is not routed through the dilution system On the other hand if a 100 ppm span gas same dilution steps as the sample gas Set the dilution factor as a gain e g a value of
17. SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT EXIT returns to the SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU previous menu COMM EXIT SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU Select which COM Port is tested ID COM1 COM2 EXIT EXIT returns to the Communications Menu 4 SETUP COM1 MODE 0 SET gt EDIT SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X lt SET SET gt EXIT SETUP X X COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM lt SET SET gt INIT EXIT SETUP X X INITIALIZING MODEM lt SET SET gt INIT EXIT 6 12 2 7 COM Port Password Security In order to provide security for remote access of the M6200E a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE Section 6 10 8 Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled the following items apply e A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands e If the port is inactive for one hour it will automatically logoff which can also be achieved with the LOGOFF command e Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour even if the correct password is used e If not logged on the only active command is the request for the help screen e The following messages will be returned at logon LOGON S
18. v SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT E C SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK pid HR Enter Current Date of Year TIME DATE EXIT SETUP X X TIME 12 00 SETUP X X DATE 01 JAN 02 12 00 ENTR EXIT 01 JAN 02 ENTR EXIT l 3 SETUP X X3 TIME 12 00 SETUP X X DATE 01 JAN 02 T x22 ENTR EXIT 01 JAN 02 ENTR EXIT ee J SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK Y TIME DATE EXIT SETUP X X EXIT returns y to the main SAMPLE displa CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 68 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run fast or slow there is a variable to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day To change this variable press lt TST TST gt CAL SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X SETUP SETUPX X 1 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT 8 1 8 ENTR SAMPLE ENTER zh PASS 818 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU Continue to press NEXT until SETUP 8 CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day PREV JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT ei cs CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or lo
19. Chamber Temp C he current temperature of the sample chamber BOX Box s ems TEMP Temperature he ambient temperature of the inside of the analyzer case PMT Pmt TEMP Temperature C he current temperature of the PMT IZS Izs oC The current temperature of the internal zero span option Only TEMP Temperature appears when IZS option is enabled CONV P oC The current temperature of the catalytic converter that changes the TEMP H2S present in the sample gas into SO Temperature TEST Test Signal mV Signal of a user defined test function on output channel A4 TIME Clock Time hh mm ss The current day time for iDAS records and calibration events 1Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO mode appear as SO2 STB SO2 OFFS amp 502 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear M6200E Rev A1 61 Operating Instructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual To view the TEST Functions press the following Key sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB TST TST gt CAL Toggle TST TST gt keys to Nscroll through list of functions RANGE H2S STB PRES SAMP FL PMT NORM PMT UV LAMP LAMP RATIO STR LGT DARK PMT Refer to DARK LAMP Section H2S SLOPE 6 2 1 for H2S OFFS definitions HVPS of these RCELL TEMP test BOX TEMP functions PMT TEMP IZS TEMP TEST TIME Only appears if IZS option is installed 2 Only appears if analog output A4 is actively report
20. 213 M6200E Rev A1 9 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 Figure 10 11 Figure 10 12 Figure 10 13 Figure 10 14 Figure 10 15 Figure 10 16 Figure 10 17 Figure 10 18 Figure 10 19 Figure 10 20 Figure 10 21 Figure 10 22 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5 Figure A 6 Figure A 7 Figure A 8 Typical Flow Control Assembly with Critical Flow Orifice 215 M6200E Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker seem 216 M6200E Electronic Block Diagram esses emma 218 6200 rr EE 220 M6200E Sample Chamber Rt heu e re metr ERR E READER RERO Du 221 PMT nb 222 ii pp iR un I UM RR EN X RETENIR eee eee 223 PMT Cooling System IR AR e a eden 224 PMT Preamp Block Diagram sss mmn 225 Relay Board Status LED nennen nennen nna 227 Power Distribution Block mmm eene nnne 231 Interface Block Diagram ec se c rule mike dred re 232 M6200E Eront Panel layout e euam ener rat peer e eaa ERR PERI E 232 Keyboard and Display Interface Block
21. When source UV is focused Reference Detector sees most of the emitted light d UV Source 214 If source UV is unfocused Reference Detector only sees a Lens Filter small portion of emitted light 330 nm Filter PMT Lens PMT Figure 10 6 Effects of Focusing Source UV in Sample Chamber A lens located between PMT and the sample chamber collects as much of the fluoresced UV created there as possible and focuses it on the most sensitive part of the PMT s photo cathode Another lens located between the excitation UV source lamp and the sample chamber collimates the light emitted by the lamp into a steady circular beam and focuses that beam directly onto the reference detector This allows the reference detector to accurately measure the effective intensity of the excitation UV by Eliminating the effect of reflected light from the UV lamp reaching the PMT Making sure that all of the light emitted by the source lamp passed though the 214 nm filter and not absorbed by the SO reaches the reference detector Conversely this also makes sure that the volume of sample gas affected by the excitation beam is similar to the volume of fluorescing SO being measured by the PMT eliminating a possible source of measurement offset 10 2 6 Measurement Interferences It should be noted that the fluorescence method for detecting H2S is subject to interference from a number of sources The M6200E has been successfully tested for its
22. M6200E Rev A1 49 Optional Hardware and Software Model 6200E Instruction Manual The state of the IZS valves can also be controlled e Manually from the analyzer s front panel by using the SIGNAL I O controls located under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 e By activating the instrument s AutoCal feature Section 7 9 e Remotely by using the external digital control inputs Section 6 12 1 2 and Section 7 7 1 or e Remotely through the RS 232 485 serial I O ports see Appendix A 6 for the appropriate commands Sources of zero and span gas flow must be capable of supplying at least 600 cm min Both supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer s enclosure In order to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length External Zero Air Scrubber The IZS option includes an external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all H2S the zero air source The scrubber is filled with activated charcoal The Permeation Source Span gas is created when zero air passes over a permeation tube containing liquid H2S under high pressure which slowly permeates through a PTFE membrane into the surrounding air The speed at which the H2S permeates the membrane is called the effusion rate The concentration of the span gas is determined by three factors Size of the membrane The larger the area of the membrane the more permeation occurs Temperature of the NO Increasing t
23. OPTIC TEST SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU ENTR EXIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT RANGE 500 000 PPB SO2 X XXX DIAG OPTIC SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU lt TST TST gt EXIT COMM VARS DIAG EXIT Y 3 Press TST until While the optic test is activated PMT should be PMT 2751 MV SO2 X XXX 2000 mV 1000 mV TST TST gt EXIT NOTE This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool The resulting PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also changes with low level calibration M6200E Rev A1 95 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 9 6 Electrical Test The electrical test function creates a current which substitutes the PMT signal and feeds it into the preamplifier board This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre amplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly along with the A D converter on the motherboard It does not test the PMT itself The electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 1000 mV To activate the electrical test press the following keys SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLI T EXIT y SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
24. 6 11 2 6 Number of Records The number of data records in the M6200E is limited to about a cumulative one million data points in all channels one megabyte of space on the disk on chip However the actual number of records is also limited by the total number of parameters and channels and other settings in the iDAS configuration Every additional data channel parameter number of samples setting etc will 132 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat In general however the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels max 20 and parameters max 50 per channel The iDAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records at any given point If for example the iDAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records the ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records This check for memory space may also make an upload of an iDAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail if the combined number of records would be exceeded In this case it is suggested to either try from the front panel what the maximum number of records can be or use trial and error in designing the iDAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or APICOM manuals To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel press SETUP DAS EDIT ENTR and the foll
25. ENTR accepts displayed password value EXIT returns to 8 E ENTR EXIT SAMPLE display SETUP X X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE PRIMARY SETUP MENU EXIT CAL PASSWORD ENABLE OFF ENTR EXIT Toggles password status On Off SETUP X X CAL PASSWORD fauli i default state is OFF SETUP X X ON PASSWORD ENABLE ON ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts SETUP X X ON PASSWORD ENABLE ON ENTR the change EXIT ignores the change If the calibration password 101 is enabled the following keypad sequence will be required to enter one of the calibration modes SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 X XXX TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 0 Prompts password gt o o ENTR EXIT 7 SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 0 Press Y individual 1 0 1 ENTR EXIT keys toset 1 1 9 101 P4 M P CAL RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT Continue calibration process M6200E Rev A1 65 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 4 Setup Mode The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer s hardware and software features perform diagnostic procedures gather information on the instruments performance and configure or access data from the internal data acquisition system iDAS For a visual representation of
26. EXT_LOW_SPAN 2 0 go into low span calibration 1 exit low span calibration Spare 6 7 Always 1 Control inputs U14 J1006 pins 1 6 bits 0 5 default I O address 325 hex 0 5 Spare 6 7 Always 1 Control outputs U17 J1008 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default I O address 321 hex 0 7 Spare Control outputs U21 J1008 pins 9 12 bits 0 3 default I O address 325 hex 0 3 Spare Alarm outputs U21 J1009 pins 1 12 bits 4 7 default I O address 325 hex ST SYSTEM OKk2 4 1 system OK 0 any alarm condition 5 7 Spare ST SYSTEM OK 0 system OK 1 any alarm condition ST CONC VALID 0 conc valid 1 hold off or other conditions ST HIGH RANGE 2 0 high auto range in use 1 low auto range 292 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 4 M6200E Signal I O Definitions Revision A 1 SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL DESCRIPTION NUMBER ST ZERO CAL in zero calibration not in zero ST SPAN CAL in span calibration not in span ST DIAG MODE ST LOW SPAN CAL 3 7 6 not in low span B status outputs U27 J1018 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default I O address 324 hex in diagnostic mode not in diagnostic mode in low span calibration Oje ll ST LAMP ALARM 0 lamp intensity low 1 lamp intensity OK ST_DARK_CAL_ALARM 0 dark cal warning 1 dark cal OK ST FLOW ALARM 0 any flow alarm 1 all flows OK ST PRESS ALARM 0 any pressur
27. HVPS VOLTAGE RS 232 interface command prompt Displayed only if enabled with RS232 MODE variable Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface Diagnostic analog output ID Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface REMOTE CAL MODE HOLD_DAC_ON_CAL PASS_ENABLE S02 LOW SO2 LOW SO2 HIGH H2S LOW H2S HIGH OFF ON Gas and range to calibrate during contact closure and Hessen calibration Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface ON holds D A outputs during zero span calibration OFF permits D A outputs to change ON enables passwords OFF disables them STABIL GAS STABIL SAMPLES Samples RCELL CYCLE Seconds OFF 502 STABIL FREQ Seconds 10 1 300 25 2 0 5 30 Gas to use to measure concentration stability Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface Stability measurement sampling period Number of samples in concentration stability reading Reaction cell temperature control M6200E Rev A 1 287 APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial 1 Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SETUP VARIABLE RCELL PROP RCELL INTEG RCELL DERIV NUMERIC UNITS 0 005 DEFAULT VALUE RANGE VALUE 0 10 DESCRIPTION cycle period Reaction cell temperature PID proportional coefficient Re
28. M6200E Rev A1 79 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 8 1 Setting the Gas Measurement Mode If the M6200E is equipped with the appropriate SO switching valves and software several gas measurement modes are available The instrument can be set to measure H2S SO or cycle between both gases see Section 10 3 2 To select one of these three measurement modes press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X X 0 MEASURE MODE H2S JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting H2S mode is the SETUP X X MEASURE MODE H2S default mode for the ENTR accepts the M101E PREV EXIT new setting Press the PREV and NEXT buttons to move back and forth between gas modes MEASURE MODE H2S SO2 SETUP X X PREV NEXT SETUP X X MEASURE MODE SD2 NEXT 80 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 SETUP DIAG Using the Diagnostics Functions A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUPO MORE2DIAG menu As these parameters are dependent on firmware revision see Menu Tree A 5 in Appendix A The individual parameters however are explained in more detail in the following section i
29. M6200E Rev A1 93 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual summe FROM ANALOG CONFIGURATION DIAG ANALOG O CONFIGURATION Exit at any time to return to the main PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG menu Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED NO SET SET CAL DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A D ZERO CALIBRATING A D SPAN 2 DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED YES Instrument calibrates automatically Exit to return to the ANALOG CONFIGURATION MENU SET SET CAL EXIT 94 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 5 Optic Test The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED located in the cooling block of the PMT Fig 10 15 The analyzer uses the light emitted from the LED to test its photo electronic subsystem including the PMT and the current to voltage converter on the pre amplifier board To make sure that the analyzer measures only the light coming from the LED the analyzer should be supplied with zero air The optic test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 1000 mV To activate the electrical test press the following key sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DIAG SIGNAL I O l lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP PREV NEXT JUMP EXIT EMEN SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 C Press NEXT until D 8 1 8 mE
30. 243 11 1 45 Status LEDS iere Cena 244 11 1 4 1 Motherboard Status Indicator Watchdog 244 11 1 4 2 CPU Status Indicator 245 11 1 4 3 Relay Board Status 245 11 2 Gas Flow Hee 246 11 2 1 Zeto or Low Sample Flow eruit eese a aA OEE ve eux etes 247 11 225 HIGH allo PD 11 3 Calibration Problems A 11 3 1 Negative Concentrations 113 2 N RESPONSE LP 11 3 3 Unstable Zero and Span 11 3 4 Inability to Span No SPAN Key 11 3 5 Inability to Zero No ZERO Key cce cem ehe reet mr rna reden 11 3 6 Non Linear Response 11 3 7 Discrepancy Between Analog Output Display 11 4 Other Performance e ness semen sn nee 11 4 1 Excessive noise te 11 4 2 SIOWARCSPONSE EOE aa FE 11 4 3 The Analyzer Doesn t Appear on the LAN or Internet mene 251 11 5 Subsystem Checkout 11 5 1 Detailed Pressure Leak Check 11 5 2 Performing a Sample Flow Check sssssssessseee enna ne ee nennen enn 252 11 5 3 AC Power Co
31. On units with a zero span valve option installed zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets from two different sources The zero and calibration operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys CALZ and CALS To perform a manual calibration check of an analyzer with a zero span valve or IZS Option installed use the following method NOTE The instrument can only be fitted with one type of permeation tube at a time Therefore the IZS option can only be used to calibrate or check the instrument for one gas H S or SO but not both 168 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures STEP ONE Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below MODEL 700 Source of Gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE Gas with generator option Zero Span Valves Option 50 VENT if input is pressurized Sample Exhaust M L 6200E External Zero MODEL 701 Air Scrubber Zero Air Calibrated ga ero Air At high concentrati enerator Filter Internal Zero Span Option IZS Option 51 Source of SAMPLE Gas VENT if input is pressurized Sample Exhaust M L pn 6200E Ambient Air Zero Air Figure 7 3 Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z S Valve or IZS Option M6200E Rev A1 169 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual STEP TWO Pe
32. TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with CR at the beginning and the end of the string regardless of the command encoding To Select a Hessen response mode press M6200E Rev A1 151 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU v COMM EXIT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM2 EXIT SETUP X X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 SET EXIT Press to change response mode SETUP X X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD BCC TEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT ENTR key accepts the new settings EXIT key ignores the new settings 152 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 12 4 6 Hessen Protocol Gas ID Since the M6200E can be when the proper optional equipment is installed and operating a multigas instrument that measures both H S and SO both of these gases are listed in the Hessen protocol gas list In its default state the Hessen protocol firmware assigns both gases a Hessen ID number and actively reports both even if the instrument is only measuring one To
33. When COM2 is configured for RS 485 operation the port uses the same female DB 9 connector on the back of the instrument as when Com2 is configured for RS 232 operation however the pin assignments are different Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer RX TX RX TX GND RS 485 Figure 6 10 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 mode The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6 pin connectors on the CPU card CN5 CN5 Located on CPU card RX TX RX TX GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 6 11 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 mode 6 10 5 DTE and DCE Communication RS 232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment DTE and data communication equipment DCE Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions e DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3 e DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2 106 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals DTE modems DCE and computers which can be either a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to set the configuration of COM1 for one of these two
34. ren dpa hane 63 Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions cceceeeee eset eee e tees emn 66 Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions 66 Variable Names VARS Revision A 1 78 M6200E Diagnostic DIAG 81 DIAG Analog I O Functions inss aviaria nagonan anana ee Ee nennen nennen emen rennen nan 84 Analog Output Voltage enne mener nnn nnn 84 Analog Output Current Loop nemen nennen nnn 85 10 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual M6200E Documentation Table 6 11 Table 6 12 Table 6 13 Table 6 14 Table 6 15 Table 6 16 Table 6 17 Table 6 18 Table 6 19 Table 6 20 Table 6 21 Table 6 22 Table 6 23 Table 6 24 Table 6 25 Table 6 26 Table 6 27 Table 6 28 Table 6 29 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 11 4 Table 11 5 Table 11 6 Table 11 7 Table 11 8 Table 12 1 Table 12 2 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Table A 4 Table A 5 Table A 6 Table A 7 Table A 8 Table B 1 Table D 1 Analog Output P
35. CONTROL IN C D E F U A B SPAN LOW SPAN Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply ZERO CONTROL IN C D E F A B E LOW SPAN SPAN 5 VDC Power Supply Figure 6 19 Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply M6200E Rev A1 141 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 12 2 Remote Operation Using the External Serial I O 6 12 2 1 Terminal Operating Modes The Model 6200E can be remotely configured calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports As terminals and computers use different communication schemes the analyzer supports two communicate modes specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices e Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program such as APICOM More information regarding APICOM can be found in later in this section or on the Teledyne Analytical Instruments website at http www teledyne api com software apicom e Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a dumb computer terminal The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 6 24 6 12 2 2 Help Commands in Terminal Mode COMMAND Table 6 24 Terminal Mode Software Commands Function Control T Switches the analyzer to terminal mode echo edit If mode flags 1 amp 2 are OFF the interface ca
36. ENT y SETUP X X Gas TO CAL 502 ENTR 7 10 Calibration Quality After completing one of the calibration procedures described above it is important to evaluate the analyzer s calibration slope and offset parameters These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer The values for these terms both individually and relative to each other indicate the quality of the calibration To perform this quality evaluation you will need to record the values of both test functions Section 6 2 1 or Appendix A 3 all of which are automatically stored in the iDAS channel CALDAT for data analysis documentation and archival SETUP RANGE TO CAL LOW HIGH ENT SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL HIGH ENTR y SETUP X X GAS RANGE SO2 LOW SET EXIT y SETUP SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 2 00 3 2 00 30 EXIT returns PREV NEXT SET NS EXIT gt to the SETUP Menu Sequence Delta Time MODE Delta Days Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 Calibration Data Quality Evaluation FUNCTION MINIMUM VALUE OPTIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE H2S SLOPE 0 700 1 000 1 300 H2S OFFS 50 0 mV n a 250 0 mV These values should not be significantly different from the values recorded on the Teledyne Analytical Instruments Final Test and Validation Data sheet that was shipped with your instrument If they are
37. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES ACCEPTANCE LIMITS Recorder Compatible with output signal of analyzer min chart width of 150 mm 6 in is recommended Constructed of PTFE or glass Sample Line And Manifold Check upon receipt Return equipment to supplier See Section 2 3 9 Q A Handbook Calibration Equipment Meets guidelines of reference 1 and Section 2 3 2 Q A Handbook Traceable to NIST SRM meets limits in traceability protocol for accuracy and stability Section 2 0 7 Q A Handbook Return equipment supplies to supplier or take corrective action Working Standard SO Cylinder Gas Or SO Permeation Tube Analyzed against NIST SRM see protocol in Section 2 0 7 Q A Handbook See Section 2 9 2 Q A Handbook Obtain new working standard and check for traceability Obtain air from another Source or regenerate Zero Air Clean dry ambient air free of contaminants that cause detectable response with the SO analyzer Revise forms as appropriate Record Form Develop standard forms N A Must not be the same as used for calibration Audit Equipment System must be checked out against Locate problem and correct or return to known standards supplier Table 8 2 Activity Matrix for Calibration Procedure EQUIPMENT FREQUENCY AND METHOD OF ACTION IF REQUIREMENTS ARE SUPPLIES ACCEPTANCE LIMITS MEASUREMENT NOT MET Calibration NIST traceable Assayed against an N
38. Table 6 8 lists the analog I O functions that are available in the M6200E Table 6 8 DIAG Analog I O Functions SUB MENU FUNCTION AOUTS Shows the status of the analog output calibration YES NO and initiates a CALIBRATED calibration of all analog output channels CONC OUT 1 Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 analog output H2S There are three options e RANGE Selects the signal type voltage or current loop and full scale level of the output e OFS Allows to set a voltage offset not available when RANGE is set to current loop e AUTO CAL Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED but on this one channel only NOTE Any change to RANGE or REC OFS requires recalibration of this output CONC OUT 2 Same as for CONC OUT 1 but for analog channel 2 H2S TEST OUTPUT Same as for CONC OUT 1 but for analog channel 4 TEST AIN CALIBRATED Shows the calibration status YES NO and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital converter circuit on the motherboard To configure the analyzer s four analog outputs set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the outputs This consists of Selecting an output type voltage or current if an optional current output driver has been installed and the signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel see Sections 6 9 4 1 Calibrating the output channel This
39. The M6200E was factory calibrated to a high level of H2S and should be linear to within 1 of full scale Common causes for non linearity are Leaks in the pneumatic system Leaks can add a constant of ambient air zero air or span gas to the current sample gas stream which may be changing in concentrations as the linearity test is performed Check for leaks as described in fion 11 5 The calibration device is in error Check flow rates and concentrations particularly when using low concentrations If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less than 10 of the full scale flow on either flow controller you may need to purchase lower concentration standards The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration Labeled concentrations may be outside the certified tolerance The sample delivery system may be contaminated Check for dirt in the sample lines or sample chamber Calibration gas source may be contaminated Dilution air contains sample or span gas M6200E Rev A1 249 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual e Sample inlet may be contaminated with H2S exhaust from this or other analyzers Verify proper venting of the pump exhaust e Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back pressure on the sample inlet port Also if the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply enough sample gas the analyzer may be evacuating the sample line Make sure to create and
40. collected Blinking Instrument is in hold off mode a short period after the system exits calibrations IDAS channels can be enabled or disabled for this period Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected Sampling normally The iDAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels 6 11 1 IDAS Structure The iDAS is designed around the feature of a record A record is a single data point of one parameter stored in one or more data channels and generated by one of several triggering event The entire iDAS configuration is stored in a script which can be edited from the front panel or downloaded edited and uploaded to the instrument in form of a string of plain text lines through the communication ports iDAS data are defined by the PARAMETER type and are stored through different triggering EVENTS in data CHANNELS which relate triggering events to data parameters and define certain operational functions related to the recording and reporting of the data 6 11 1 1 iDAS Channels The key to the flexibility of the iDAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels Users may create up to 20 data channels and each channel can contain one or more parameters For each channel one triggering event is selected and up to 50 data parameters which can be the same or different between
41. 818 8 1 8 SETUP M CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE P SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT EXIT SETUP X X RANGE occ SNGL EXIT Returns to the Main SNGL IND ENTR EXIT SAMPLE Display Go To Go To Go To Section Section Section 6 7 4 6 7 5 6 7 6 72 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 7 4 Single Range mode SNGL The default range mode for the analyzer is single range in which all analog concentration outputs are set to the same reporting range This reporting range can be set to any value between 5 0 ppb and 20 000 ppb While the two outputs always have the same reporting range the span and scaling of their electronic signals may also be configured for different differently e g A1 0 10 V A2 0 0 1 V To select SNGLE range mode and to set the upper limit of the range press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP V SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP C 3 RANGE MODE SNGL 8 1 8 ENTR SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU RANGE CONTROL MENU v CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT MODE SET UNIT SETUP C 3 RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP C 3 RANGE 500 0 Conc MODE SET UNIT EXIT 0 0 5 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE SNGL SETUP C 3 RANGE CONTROL MENU EXIT x 2 returns to the main SNGL
42. Figure 11 1 Viewing and Clearing warning messages 240 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Table 11 1 Warning Messages Indicated Failures WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES ANALOG CAL The instruments A D A parameter for one of the analog outputs has been changed and the WARNING circuitry or one of its calibration routine was not re run analog outputs is not A D circuitry failure on motherboard calibrated Other motherboard electro9nic failure BOX TEMP Box Temp is 5 C or NOTE Box temperature typically runs 7 c warmer than ambient WARNING gt 48 temperature Poor blocked ventilation to the analyzer Stopped exhaust fan Ambient temperature outside of specified range CANNOT DYN Dynamic Span Measured concentration value is too high or low SPAN operation failed Concentration slope value to high or too low CANNOT DYN Dynamic Zero Measured concentration value is too high ZERO operation failed Concentration offset value to high CONFIG Configuration and Failed disk on chip INITIALIZED Calibration data reset User erased data to original Factory state CONV TEMP The temperature of the Bad converter heater WARNING H S gt SO catalytic Bad converter temperature sensor converter is outside its Bad relay controlling the converter heater optimal operating Entire relay board is malfunctioning range 2 buss malfunction DARK CAL The Dar
43. While the electrical test is activated PMT should equal 2000 mV x 1000 mV DIAG SIGNAL I O NEXT JUMP Press NEXT until DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST ENTR EXIT DIAG ELEC RANGE 500 000 PPB O2 X XXX TST TST gt EXIT C Press TST until 1732 MV SO2 X XXX lt TST TST gt EXIT 96 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 7 Lamp Calibration An important factor in accurately determining H2S concentration once the H2S is converter to SO is the amount of UV light available to transform the SO into SO see Section 10 1 1 and 10 1 2 The model 6200E compensates for variations in the intensity of the available UV light by adjusting the H2S concentration calculation using a ratio LAMP RATIO that results from dividing the current UV lamp UV LAMP intensity by a value stored in the CPU s memory LAMP CAL Both LAMP Ration and UV Lamp are test functions viewable from the instruments front panel To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for LAMP CAL press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DIAG SIGNAL I O lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP N NEXT ENTR EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 lt Repeat Pressing NEXT until 8 1 8 ENTR Up tein to return
44. e Turn off the analyzer power remove the cover and allow the converter to cool e Remove the top lid of the converter as well as the top layers of the insulation until the converter cartridge can be seen CAUTION The converter operates at 315 C Severe burns can result if the assembly is not allowed to cool Do not handle the assembly until it is at room temperature This may take several hours e Remove the tube fittings from the converter e Disconnect the power and the thermocouple of the converter Unscrew the grounding clamp of the power leads with a Phillips head screw driver e Remove the converter assembly cartridge and band heater from the can Make a note of the orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge e Unscrew the band heater and loosen it take out the old converter cartridge 198 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance Converter Assembly Cover Band Heater x Power LEads Band Heater and T C Assembly H2S gt SO converter Converter Assembly Housing Figure 9 3 H2S gt SO Converter Assembly Wrap the band heater around the new replacement cartridge and tighten the screws using a high temperature anti seize agent such as copper paste Make sure to use proper alignment of the heater with respect to the converter tubes Replace the converter assembly route the cables through the holes in the housing and reconnect them prope
45. rear panel Recording Device Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs To make these adjustments the AOUT auto calibration feature must be turned off Section 6 9 4 2 Activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press C FROM ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU D DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 RANGE 5V SET EDIT EXIT o d DIAG ANALOG O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET SET gt CAL EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 REC OFS 0 mV lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SET SET EXIT je If AutoCal is ON go to Section DIAG AIO OUT 1 AUTO CAL OFF Y DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO lt SET CAL EXIT oy Press SET to select the analog output channel to be configured DISPLAYED AS CHANNEL CONC OUT 1 A1 CONC OUT 2 A2 TEST OUTPUT 4 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 5V NO CAL v SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO OUT 1 VOLT Z 0 mV 1100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT These keys increase decrease the analog output by 100 10 or 1 counts Continue adjustments until the voltage measured at the output of the analyzer and or the input of the recording device matches the value in the upper right hand corner of the display to the tolerance listed in Table 6 10 DIAG AIO CO
46. y SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL HIGH ENTR y SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL HIGH lt SET EXIT v SETUP X X SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 2 00 30 EXIT returns to the SETUP PREV NEXT SET EXT gt Menu Sequence Delta Time MODE Delta Days 7 9 2 Autocal of instruments in Multigas Measurement Mode If the analyzer is being operated in multigas measurement mode autocal can only be programmed to calibrate the instrument with one of the available gases NOTE Make sure that the gas for which the AutoCal sequence has been programmed is being supplied to the analyzer at the time the autocal program initiates If the wrong gas is being supplied to the instrument the analyzer will be mis calibrated 176 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures If the instrument is in multigas measurement mode and the SNGL reporting range mode is selected the AutoCal sequence is programmed as described above If the reporting range of the M6200E must is set for either IND or AUTO the gas type and range to be measured must be specified This parameter appears at the end of the programming sequences after the CALIBRATE ON OFF parameter is set For example point then standard AutoCal programming process to g SETUP X X CALIBRATE ON lt SET SET gt EDIT d SETUP X X GAS RANGE H2S HIGH SET EDIT y SETUP X X GAS TO CAL H2S S02
47. 10 or 1 counts The resulting change in output EXIT voltage is displayed in the upper line SET SET EDIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE CURR 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 Continue adjustments until the DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 SPAN 10000 mV correct current is measured with the current meter EXIT SET CAL DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 ZERO 9731 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting ENTR accepts the new EXIT setting lt SET CAL DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED YES EXIT If a current meter is not available an alternative method for calibrating the current loop outputs is to connect a 250 1 resistor across the current loop output Using a voltmeter connected across the resistor follow the procedure above but adjust the output to the following values Table 6 13 Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor FULL VOLTAGE FOR 2 20 MA VOLTAGE FOR 4 20 MA SCALE measured across resistor measured across resistor 0 0 5V 1 0V 100 5 0V 5 0V 6 9 4 6 AIN Calibration This is the sub menu to conduct the analog input calibration This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU motherboard or power supplies Activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press
48. 2 MAINT MODE 3 LANG2 SELECT NONE PMT READING 4 SAMPLE LED lt SET SET gt UV READING 5 CALLED SAMPLE PRESSURE 6 FAULT LED 7 AUDIBLE BEEPER AOUTS CALIBRATED a TEMP CONC OUT 1 CHASSIS TEMP 10 PREAMP RANGE HIGH CONC OUT 2 IZS TEMP 11 ST SYSTEM OK CAL PMT TEMP 12 ST CONC VALID TEST OUTPUT HVPS VOLTAGE 13 ST HIGH RANGE 14 ST ZERO CAL 15 ST SPAN CAL 16 ST DIAG MODE EDIT 17 ST LAMP ALARM 18 ST DARK CAL ALARM 19 ST FLOW ALARM 20 ST PRESS ALARM SET SET 21 SR TEMP ALARM 22 ST HVPS ALARM 23 ST H2S MODE 24 ST SYSTEM ON2 25 RELAY WATCHDOG RANGE REC OFFSET AUTO CAL CALIBRATED 26 RCELL HEATER ON 27 CONV HEATEER 28 IZS HEATER 27 CAL VALVE OFF ON CAL 29 SPAN VALVE 30 H2S VALVE 31 DARK SHUTTER OFF 1 1 5V 10V CURR 2 Only relevant to analyzers with 125 options installed 32 INTERNAL ANALOG J VOLTAGE SIGNALS 56 see Appendix A Figure A 8 Secondary Setup Menu DIAG 282 M6200 Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial 1 Revision A 1 APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision A 1 Table 1 M6200E Setup Variables Revision A 1 SETUP VARIABLE NUMERIC DEFAULT VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION UNITS VALUE MEASURE MODE SO2 H2S SO2 Gas measurement mode Enclose SO2 H2S value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface H2S DAS HOLD OFF Mi
49. 5 9 9 9 Changing the External Zero Air Maintaining the H2S SO Converter nnn nnne 3 5 1 Predicting When the Converter Catalyst Should Be Replaced 3 5 2 Checking the Efficiency of the H S gt SO Converter 3 5 3 Changing the H2S SO Converter Catalyst Material 6 Cleaning the Sample 7 Cleaning or Changing Critical Flow Orifices 8 Checking for Light Leaks sco nese date is De e eate Roe Sous ved rads Tek eal Tk ea aa Ede TRIPLE Me I VIP EE Vi 10 THEORY OF OPERATION m 10 1 Measurement Principle 10 1 1 H2S Conversion eee eee ete nennen 10 1 2 SO Ultraviolet Fluorescence 10 2 The UV Light Path rta teet rope de etae ires 10 2 1 UV Source Lamp 10 2 2 ioci tube redet ol eet eia 102233 THE PM Tess 10 2 4 Optical Filters 10 2 4 1 UV Source Optical Filter 10 2 4 2 PMT Optical Filter 10 2 5 Optical Lenses
50. Calibrated S 2S GAS At span gas ration Source of SAMPLE Gas Removed during calibration 1 1 Needle valve to control flow 1 MODEL 701 Zero Air Generator Exhaust MODEL Sample vie 6200E Zero Air Figure 3 7 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas 1 Attach the 1 4 exhaust line to the exhaust port of the analyzer and to the inlet port of the pump CAUTION The exhaust from the external pump needs to be vented outside the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument and conform to all safety requirements using a maximum of 10 meters of 1 4 PTFE tubing 2 Attach the sample line to the sample inlet port Ideally the pressure of the sample gas should be equal to ambient atmospheric pressure 28 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started NOTE Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1 5 in Hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold a vent must be provided to equalize the sample gas with ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters the analyzer The vented gas needs to be routed outside the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument 3 Attach zero air and span gas supply lines as appropriate see Figures 3 6 amp 3 7 For this type of analyzer zero air and span
51. Precision Calibration To perform a precision calibration the instrument set up e Input sources of zero air and calibrated SO span gas see Table 7 1 e Follow the procedures described in Section 7 2 for analyzer s with no valve options or with an IZS valve option Do not use the method defined in Section 7 7 e Follow the procedures described in installed and Section 7 5 for analyzer s with Z S options installed 8 4 2 Precision Check A periodic check is used to assess the data for precision A one point precision check must be carried out at least once every 2 weeks on each analyzer at an SO concentration between 0 08 and 0 10 ppm The analyzer must be operated in its normal sampling mode and the precision test gas must pass through all filters scrubbers conditioners and other components used during normal ambient sampling The standards from which precision check test concentrations are obtained must be traceable to NIST SRM see Table 7 1 Those standards used for calibration or auditing may be used To perform a precision check the instrument set up sources of zero air and SO span gas and procedures should conform to those described in Section 7 3 for analyzer s with no valve options or with an IZS valve option installed and Section 7 6 for analyzer s with Z S options installed with the following exception e Connect the analyzer to a precision gas that has an SO concentration between 0 08 and 0 10 ppm If a precision chec
52. SAMPLE AIR TO SAMPLE CHAMBER SAMPLE AIR E ELE mem LUI FROM PARTICULATE FILTER Ambient Air Figure 10 9 M6200E Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker In the M6200E some of the cleaned air from the inner tube is returned to be used as the purge gas in the outer tube Figure 10 9 This means that when the analyzer is first started the concentration gradient between the inner and outer tubes is not very large and the scrubber s efficiency is relatively low When the instrument is turned on after having been off for more than 30 minutes it takes a certain amount of time for the gradient to become large enough for the scrubber to adequately remove hydrocarbons from the sample air 10 3 6 SO Scrubber In order to ensure that no ambient SO interferes with the analyzer s H2S measurement the sample gas stream is passed through a chemical scrubber that removes SO from the sample stream before it is passed though the catalytic converter see Figure 10 7 The SO scrubber is a Teflon encased stand alone unit containing a room temperature catalyst tube mounted in the front right side of the analyzer case see Figure 3 8 near the instrument s on off switch The SO scrubber material is consumed as it removes SO If the expected concentrations of SO are very high the lifetime of the scrubber will be short The expected life of the scrubber is approximately 1000 ppm hours See Section 9 3 3 for information
53. SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT The value displayed is the current output of the UV source reference detector 98 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 9 Flow Calibration The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors only the software calculated values To carry out this adjustment connect an external sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet see Section 11 5 2 for more details Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL XXX X SETUP CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLI MQRE SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR y SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU EXIT al SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT Exit at any time DIAG SIGNAL I O NEXT ENTR EXIT Repeat Pressing NEXT until v DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION ENTR DIAG FCAL ACTUAL pem 607 CC M ENTR EXIT The value displayed is the current output of the UV source reference detector v ENTR accepts the new value EXIT ignores the new
54. STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER SMPLFLW MODE AVG PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER SMPLPRS MODE AVG PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER S2SLP1 MODE INST PRECISION 3 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER S20FS1 MODE INST PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER S2ZSC1 MODE INST PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF Figure 6 14 Default iDAS Channels Setup These default Data Channels can be used as they are or they can be customized from the front panel to fit a specific application They can also be deleted to make room for custom user programmed Data Channels Appendix A 5 lists the firmware specific iDAS configuration in plain text format This text file can either be loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or can be copied and pasted into a terminal program to be sent to the analyzer 124 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions NOTE Sending an iDAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the existing configuration and will delete all stored data Back up any existing data and the iDAS configuration before uploading new settings 6 11 2 1 Viewing iDAS Data and Settings iDAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke sequence EXIT will return to the main SAMPLE Display
55. Table 6 1 Analyzer Operating modes MODE EXPLANATION DIAG One of the analyzer s diagnostic modes is active Section 6 9 M P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL key SAMPLE Sampling normally flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated SETUP SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer The gas measurement will continue during this process SPAN CAL Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer s AUTOCAL feature SPAN CAL M Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user SPAN CAL Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs ZERO CAL A Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature ZERO CAL M Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user ZERO CAL Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs Only Appears on units with Z S valve or IZS options The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP e g SETUP c 4 Finally the various CAL modes allow calibration of the analyzer Because of its importance this mode is described separately in Chapte
56. both supplied externally to accurately produce span gas of the correct concentration Linearity profiles can be automated with this model and run unattended over night Table 3 5 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of H2S amp SO Calibration Gases DT NOMINAL MSSM TYPE CONCENTRATION 2730 Hydrogen sulfide in N2 5000 ppb 2731 Hydrogen sulfide in N2 20 ppm 1693a Sulfur dioxide in N2 50 ppm 1694a Sulfur dioxide in N2 100 ppm 1661a Sulfur dioxide in N2 500 ppm M6200E Rev A1 29 Getting Started Model 6200E Instruction Manual ZERO AIR e Agasthat is similar in chemical composition to the earth s atmosphere but without the gas being measured by the analyzer in this case H2S If your analyzer is equipped with an IZS or external zero air scrubber option it is capable of creating zero air For analyzers without these options a zero air generator such as the Teledyne Analytical Instruments Model 701 can be used 4 Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using a procedure similar to that defined in Section 11 5 1 3 1 2 1 Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed If your analyzer is equiped with either the zero span valve option Option 50 or the internal zero span option Option 51 the pneumatic connections should be made as follows MODEL 700 Gas Dilution Calibrator with generator option Zero Span Valves Opti
57. e Se ee DU Figure 3 2 Rear Panel Layout M6200E Rev A1 23 Getting Started Model 6200E Instruction Manual 3 1 1 1 Connecting the Analog Outputs Attach a strip chart recorder and or data logger to the appropriate contacts of the analog output connecter on the rear panel of the analyzer ANALOG OUT A1 A2 A3 4 Figure 3 3 Analog Output Connector The Al and A2 channels output a signal that is proportional to the H2S concentration of the sample gas The output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user Section 6 9 10 to output any one of the parameters accessible through the lt TST TST gt keys of the units sample display Pin outs for the Analog Output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are Table 3 1 Analog output Pin Outs VOLTAGE OUTPUT CURRENT LOOP OPTION V Out I Out Ground I Out V Out I Out Ground I Out Not Available I Out Not Available I Out V Out Not Available Ground Not Available e The default analog output voltage setting of the M6200E UV Fluorescence H5S Analyzer is 0 5 VDC with a range of 0 500 ppb e TO change these settings see Sections 6 9 4 and 6 7 respectively An optional Current Loop output is available for each See Section 5 2 3 1 1 2 Connecting the Status Outputs The analyzer s status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer s
58. is la I 1 exp ax S yj Where Equation 10 3 lo Intensity of the excitation UV light a The absorption coefficient of SO SO Concentration of SO in the sample chamber x The distance between the UV source and the SO molecule s being affected path length M6200E Rev A1 205 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual Another factor affecting the amount of detectable UV present is the rate at which this reaction occurs k which varies depending on the temperature of the SO The warmer the gas the faster the individual molecules decay back into their ground state and the more photons of UV light are given off per unit of time F k SO Where Equation 10 4 F the amount of fluorescent light given off The rate at which the SO decays into SO SO Amount of excited SO in the sample chamber In summary the amount of fluorescence is e Indirectly affected by the temperature of the gas and the factors from equation 10 2 above concentration of SO intensity of UV light path length of the UV light and e Directly affected by two factors equation 10 4 the rate of the reaction and the amount of SO present So when the path length of exciting light is short no interfering gases are present no interfering light is present and both the temperature of the gas and the intensity of the light are known and compensated for the amount of fluorescent light emitted F
59. manually re defined using the VARS menu Table 6 6 lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level Table 6 6 Variable Names VARS Revision A 1 ALLOWED VARIABLE DESCRIPTION VALUES Selects the gas measurement mode in which the instrument is to operate SO only H2S only or dual gas measurement 502 MEASURE MODE Jof SO and H5S simultaneously Dual gas mode requires SO H2S that a special switching optional be installed see Section HS DAS_HOLD_OFF TPC_ENABLE 5 5 and 6 8 1 Changes the internal data acquisition system iDAS hold off time which is the duration when data are not stored in the iDAS because the software considers the data to be questionable That is the case during warm up or just after the instrument returns from one of its calibration modes to SAMPLE mode DAS_HOLD_OFF can be disabled entirely in each iDAS channel Enables or disables the temperature and pressure compensation TPC feature Can be between 0 5 and 20 minutes Default 15 min ON OFF RCELL_SET IZS_SET Sets the sample chamber temperature Increasing or decreasing this temperature will increase or decrease the rate at which SO2 decays into SO Section 10 1 2 Do not adjust this setting unless under the direction of Teledyne Analytical Instruments customer service personnel Sets the IZS option temperature Increasing or decreasing this temperature will increase or decrease the permeati
60. toggles properly using the Signal I O function but the output device does not turn on off then the associated device valve or heater or its control device valve driver heater relay is malfunctioning Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily be replaced The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function Table 11 6 Relay Board Control Devices FUNCTION CONTROL DEVICE SOCKETED ValveO Valve3 U5 Yes Valve4 Valve7 U6 Yes heaters K1 K5 Yes 11 5 8 Motherboard 11 5 8 1 A D functions A basic check of the analog to digital A D converter operation on the motherboard is to use the Signal I O function under the DIAG menu Check the following two A D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter e Using the Signal I O function Section 6 9 2 and Appendix D view the value of REF 4096 MV and REF If these signals are within 10 mV and 3 mV respectively of their nominal values 4096 and 0 and are stable to within 0 5 mV the basic A D converter is functioning properly If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more than specified above one or more of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty e Choose one parameter in the Signal I O function such as SAMPLE PRESSURE see previous section on how to measure it Compare its actual voltage with the voltage displayed through th
61. upper left hand corner of the relay board when looking at the electronic components If D1 is blinking then the other LED s can be used in conjunction with the DIAG menu I O functions to test hardware functionality by switching devices on and off and watching the corresponding LED go on or off The LED only indicates that the logic signal for an output has been activated If the output driver i e the relay or valve driver IC is defective then the LED will light up but the attached peripheral device will not turn on M6200E Rev A1 245 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 11 3 Relay Board Status LEDs LED COLOR FUNCTION FAULT INDICATED FAILURE S STATUS Di red Watchdog Circuit I2C bus Continuously Failed or halted CPU faulty operation ON or OFF motherboard keyboard relay board wiring between motherboard keyboard or relay board 5 V power supply D2 yellow Relay 0 sample chamber Continuously Heater broken thermistor broken heater ON or OFF D3 yellow Relay 1 H2S converter Continuously Heater broken thermocouple broken heater ON or OFF D4 yellow Relay 2 manifold heater Continuously Heater broken thermistor broken ON or OFF D5 yellow Relay 3 IZS heater Continuously Heater broken thermistor broken ON or OFF D6 yellow Relay 4 Spare N A N A D7 green Valve 0 zero span valve Continuously Valve broken
62. verify the accuracy of the box temperature 11 5 18 PMT Temperature PMT temperature should be low and constant It is more important that this temperature is maintained constant than it is to maintain it low The PMT cooler uses a Peltier thermo electric element powered by 12 VDC from the switching power supply PS2 The temperature is controlled by a proportional temperature controller located on the preamplifier board Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0 1 to 12 VDC The temperature set point hard wired into the preamplifier board will vary by about lt 1 C due to component tolerances The actual temperature will be maintained to within 0 1 C around that set point On power up of the analyzer the front panel enables the user to watch that temperature drop from about ambient temperature down to its set point of 6 8 C If the temperature fails to drop after 20 minutes there is a problem in the cooler circuit If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty a temperature of 1 C is reported 11 6 Repair Procedures This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement Note that replacement procedures that are discussed in detail in Chapter 9 Maintenance are not listed here Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection i e ESD grounding straps mats and containers Failure to use ESD p
63. 10 4 2 Sensor Module amp Sample chamber 10 4 3 Sample Chamber Heating Circuit 10 4 4 Photo Multiplier Tube PMT 10 4 5 PMT Cooling System 10 4 5 1 Thermoelectric Cooler TEC s gea rh ren une o nnt eek aw eo nae Sieg Tee Coke dira an Papa Nu 10 4 5 2 Control Board uL at e dd pA EE 10 4 6 PMT Preambplifier dep e ev desi 6 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual 10 4 7 Pneumatic Sensor 226 10 4 8 Relay Enas 81 80226 10 4 8 1 Heater 226 10 4 8 2 se petente need edens 2 226 10 4 9 Status LEDs amp Watch Dog Circuitry 2 227 10 4 10 eene ee eaeneeneas 228 10 4 10 1 A toD CODVersIO zu een ee deve denne ga egrave dee dah iug dilate aue dad 228 10 4 10 2 Sensor renean tea rinse iR n deine rabo Dee 228 10 4 10 3 Thermistor Interface uz cdc tice les irt tee eere eter nee B e ehe ti Eae ras eodtesd uus ere Dude nua 229 10 4 11 Analog OUtpUuts eri er tiles rene ne Dar era nna
64. 2 Hessen COMM Port Configuration Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the M6200E s COMM ports to be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in the table below Table 6 27 RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol Parameter Standard Hessen Data Bits 8 7 Stop Bits 1 2 Parity None Even Duplex Full To change the rest of the COMM port parameters and modes see Section 6 10 8 To change the baud rate of the M6200E s COMM ports see Section 6 10 9 NOTE Make sure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also properly set Also the instrument software has a 200 ms latency before it responds to commands issued by the host computer This latency should present no problems but you should be aware of it and not issue commands to the instrument too frequently M6200E Rev A1 149 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 12 4 3 Activating Hessen Protocol The first step in configuring the M6200E to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port s appropriately Press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX SETUP COM1 QUIET MODE OFF Repeat
65. 20 means sample gas is used it needs to pass through the 20 parts dilutent and 1 part of SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL XXX X SETUP SAMPLE 8 1 8 ENTER SETUP PASS 818 EPIS SETUP C 3 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE PRIMARY SETUP MENU EXIT DIL only appears if the dilution ratio option has been installed MODE SET UNIT DIL SETUP C 3 RANGE oira MENU EXIT SETUP C 3 Toggle these keys to set the dilution factor 0 This is the number by which the analyzer will multiply the H2S DIL FACTOR 1 0 GAIN ENTR EXIT ignores the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT concentrations of the gas passing through the reaction cell SETUP C 3 0 0 2 0 0 DIL FACTOR 20 0 GAIN ENTR EXIT The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the result NOTE Once the above settings have been entered the instrument needs to be recalibrated using one of the methods discussed in Chapter 7 M6200E Rev A1 77 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 8 SETUP VARS Using the Internal Variables The M6200E has several user adjustable software variables which define certain operational parameters Usually these variables are automatically set by the instrument s firmware but can be
66. 214 nm and outputs an analog signal Several focusing lenses and optical filters make sure that both detectors are exposed to an optimum amount of only the right wavelengths of UV To further assure that the PMT only detects light given off by decaying SO2 the pathway of the excitation UV and field of view of the PMT are perpendicular to each other and the inside surfaces of the sample chamber are coated with a layer of black Teflon that absorbs stray light UV Source Optical Filter 214 nm Window Seal UV UV Source Lamp Reference Lens Detector Filtered Excitation UV Fluorescent UV Optical Filter 330 nm Fluorescent ___ UV Only PMT Lens Focused Fluorescent UV Figure 10 2 UV Light Path PMT L 10 2 1 UV Source Lamp The source of excitation UV light for the Model 6200E is a low pressure zinc vapor lamp An AC voltage heats up and vaporizes zinc contained in the lamp element creating a light producing plasma arc Zinc vapor lamps are preferred over the more common mercury vapor lamps for this application because they produce very strong emission levels at the wavelength required to convert SO to SO 213 9 nm see Figure 10 4 The lamp used in the Model 6200E is constructed with a vacuum jacket surrounding a double bore lamp element Figure 10 3 The vacuum jacket isolates the plasma arc from most external temperature fluctuations The jacket al
67. 2731 Hydrogen sulfide in N2 20 ppm 1693a Sulfur dioxide in N2 50 ppm 1694a Sulfur dioxide in N2 100 ppm 1661a Sulfur dioxide in N2 500 ppm 7 1 6 Data Recording Devices A strip chart recorder data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data from the M6200E s serial or analog outputs If analog readings are used the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter Data recording device should be capable of bi polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded For electronic data recording the M6200E provides an internal data acquisition system iDAS which is described in detail in Section 6 11 7 2 Manual Calibration The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the Model 6200E analyzer in H2S measurement mode The same method may be used to calibrate the M6200E analyzers configured for SO measurement by substituting SO span gas for the H2S span gas listed See Section 7 8 for instructions on calibrating analyzers configured for multigas measurement mode NOTE on Calibration and Calibration Checks Pressing the ENTR key during the following procedure re calculates the stored values for H2S OFFS and H2S SLOPE instrument response curve and alters the instrument s calibration If you wish to perform a calibration CHECK do not press ENTR and see Section 7 3 M6200E Rev A1 159
68. 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6 Table 6 7 Table 6 8 Table 6 9 Table 6 10 Model 6200E Basic Unit 17 Analog output Pin O ts ise 24 Status Output Signals Liter eene nr i ere Enea REED A REA Ie 25 Control Input Signals n rar dy xe nahen Ea Eaa an RR EK e E PR A ER REC Cr 26 Inlet Outlet Connector Nomenclature 27 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of H2S amp SO Calibration Gases 29 Front Panel Display During System Warm Up 34 Possible Warning Messages at 5 nemen 35 H2S SO Switching Valve Operating 37 Zero Span Valve Operating 48 IZS Valv Operating States eec rer ERR RE RR eR a Ee e 49 H2S SO Switching Valve Operating 52 Analyzer Operating MOdES emnes nee nene nnne 60 Test Functions Defined Tee rr Re a Rr RE E ERU KR 61 List of Warning Messages
69. 4 5 PMT Cooling System The performance of the analyzer s PMT is significantly affected by temperature Variations in PMT temperature are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT The signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically influenced by temperature as well The warmer The PMT is the noisier its signal becomes until the noise renders the concentration signal useless To alleviate this problem a special cooling system exists that maintains the PMT temperature at a stable low level 10 4 5 1 Thermoelectric Cooler TEC The core of the M6200E PMT cooling system is a solid state heat pump called a thermoelectric cooler TEC Thermoelectric coolers transfer heat from a one side of a special set of semiconductor junctions to the other when a DC current is applied The heat is pumped at a rate proportional to the amount of current applied In the Model 6200E the TEC is physically attached to a cold block that absorbs heat directly from the PMT and a heat sink that is cooled by moving air see Figure 10 15 A Thermocouple embedded into the cold block generates an analog voltage corresponding to the current temperature of the PMT The PMT Preamp PCA conditions and amplifies this signal then passes it on to the TEC Control PCA M6200E Rev A1 223 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual Preamp PCA sends buffered and amplified thermistor TEC PCA sets appropriate drive voltage for cooler signal to TEC
70. 7 4 or AUTO mode se section 6 7 6 or operate independently IND mode see Section 6 7 5 The user may also select between a variety of reporting range spans as well EXAMPLE A1 OUTPUT Output Signal 0 5 VDC representing 0 1000 ppm concentration values A2 OUTPUT Output Signal 0 10 VDC representing 0 500 ppm concentration values 70 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions NOTE On analyzers with the SO H S multigas measurement option installed see section 5 5 the outputs of A1 and A2 correspond to Output 50 SO H S H2S Channel Mode Mode Mode 1 gt SO c SO H S A2 gt SO H S lt gt H S As the instrument switches from H S mode to SO mode and back only the reporting range and analog output associated with the gas currently being measured will be active The reporting range and analog output for the gas no being measured will continue to report the last valid reading The output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user see Section 6 9 10 to output many of the parameters accessible through the TST TST keys of the units Sample Display Output A3 is not available on the Model 6200E Analyzer 6 7 2 Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges The M6200E UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer has two hardware physical ranges that cover H2S concentrations between 0 and 20 000 ppb The low range is 0 to 2 000 ppb while the high
71. 8 sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell e For orifices on the reaction cell Unscrew the orifice holder with a 9 16 wrench This part holds all components of the critical flow assembly as shown in Figure 9 4 Appendix B contains a list of spare part numbers e For orifices in the vacuum manifold the assembly is similar to the one shown in Figure 9 4 but without the orifice holder part number 04090 and bottom O ring OR34 and with an NPT fitting in place of the FT 10 fitting After taking off the connecting tube unscrew the NPT fitting Take out the components of the assembly a spring a sintered filter two O rings and the orifice For the vacuum manifold only you may need to use a scribe or pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts out of the manifold e Discard the two O rings and the sintered filter and clean the critical flow orifice in a ultrasonic cleaner for about 30 minutes using methanol Let the part dry e Re assemble the parts as shown in Figure 9 4 and re connect them to the reaction cell manifold or the vacuum manifold 200 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance e Reconnect all tubing power up the analyzer and pump and after a warm up period of 30 minutes carry out a leak test as described in Section 11 5 1 FT 8 Inlet fitting C 34 O ring HW 20 spring Q3 FL1 sintered filter B om O ring 00094 xxxx critical flow orifice sp
72. CPU TYPE DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED V NEXT ENTR ZERO SPAN Only appears if a applicable option feature is installed and activated Appears whenever the currently displayed sequence is not set for DISABLED 3 Only appears when reporting range is set to AUTO range mode SPAN TI MER ENABLE STARTI NG DATE STARTI NG TI ME DELTA DAYS DELTA TI ME DURATI ON CALI BRATE RANGE TO CAL Figure A 3 TIME DATE MODE SET UNIT SNGL IND AUTO PPB PPM PASS RNGE CLK ON OFF Go To SECONDARY SETUP MENU Fig A 5 Primary Setup Menu Except iDAS M6200 Rev A 1 277 APPENDI X A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SAMPLE 1 ENTER SETUP PASS 818 cFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK udis VIEW EDIT PREV NEXT CONC PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT PNUMTC CALDAT CONC VIEW PNUMTC CALDAT PRM PRM PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 P pene Orr PENT Cycles through Selects data point to view NAME La Aromas lists of EVENT parameters PARAMETERS chosen for this Report PERIOD iDAS channel 1 00 ww OF RECORDS RS 232 REPORT CHANNEL ENABLE Sets the amount of time between each CAL HOLD report PREV NEXT NEXT EDIT PRNT Cycles through SI NO available trigg
73. Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual STEP ONE Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below RE No Valve Options Installed Calibrated H At high concen MODEL 700 Gas Source of Dilution SAMPLE Gas Calibrator Removed B during with Calibration MODEL 701 Zero Air Sample Generator V Exhaust Span Zero Air OR Calibrated S At span gas con Source of SAMPLE Gas Removed during Needle valve to control flow calibration 1 MODEL 701 Zero Air Generator Exhaust Sample Span Zero Air Figure 7 1 Setup for Manual Calibration without Z S valve or IZS Option 160 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures STEP TWO Set the expected H2S span gas concentrations In this example the instrument is set for single SNGL range mode with a reporting range span of 500 ppb The H2S span concentration values automatically default to 450 0 Conc To change this value to the actual concentration of the span gas enter the number by pressing the key under each digit until the expected value appears The span gas concentration should always be 9096 of the selected reporting range EXAMPLE Reporting range 800 ppb Span gas conc 720 ppb SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST gt CAL SETUP This sequence causes the analyzer to prompt for the expected H2S span conce
74. Data sheet part number 04551 lists these values before the instrument left the factory To view the current values of these parameters press the following key sequence on the analyzer s front panel Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB TST TST gt CAL RANGE H2S STB PRES SAMP FL PMT NORM PMT UV LAMP LAMP RATIO STR LGT DARK PMT Refer to DARK LAMP Section H2S SLOPE 6 2 1 for H2S OFFS definitions HVPS of these RCELL TEMP test BOX TEMP functions PMT TEMP IZS TEMP TEST TIME oggle TST TST gt keys 3 scroll through list of functions 1 Only appears if IZS option is installed Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting a test function Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO mode appear as SO2 STB SO2 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear 3 If your analyzer has an Ethernet card Option 63 installed and your network is running a dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP software package the Ethernet option will automatically configure its interface with your LAN However it is a good idea to check these settings to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings from your network server See Section 6 10 6 2 If your network is not running DHCP you will have to configure the analyz
75. Fluorescence H2S Analyzer or any other Teledyne Analytical Instruments product can be obtained by Contacting Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service Department at 800 324 5190 or Via the internet at http www teledyne ai com 2 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 M6200E 1 1 Using This Manual csesee Hn 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS AND WARRANTY 2 1 Specifications s e o ede dere dal 2 2 EPA Equivalency 2 3 CE Mark Compliance esse 2 3 1 Emissions 2 3 2 Safety Compliance 2 4 3 GETTING STARTED MEETS 3 1 Unpacking and Initial Setup m 3 1 1 Electrical Connecting the Analog Outputs Connecting the Status Outputs Connecting the Control Inputs wad Connecting the Serial Connecting to a LAN or the Internet i nennen nena Connecting to a LAN or the Internet 2 neumatic Corrections iicet rna 3 1 2 1 Connections with Internal Valve Options Install
76. IND AUTO ENTR EXIT MODE SET UNIT EXIT SAMPLE display NOTE On analyzers with the multigas option activated see section 5 5 and Section 6 8 1 the concentration value will switch back and forth between from H2S XXX X to SO2zXXX X depending on which gas is currently being measured M6200E Rev A1 73 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 7 5 Independent Range Mode IND Selecting independent range mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement ranges The analyzer software calls these two ranges LOW and HIGH The LOW range setting corresponds with the analog output labeled A1 on the rear panel of the instrument The HIGH range setting corresponds with the A2 output While the software names these two ranges LOW and HIGH they do not have to be configured that way Also in this mode the RANGE Test function displayed on the front panel during SAMPLE mode will be replaced by two separate functions RANGE1 amp RANGE2 e LOW range RANGE1 Range value for output A1 0 1500 ppb H2S e HIGH range RANGE2 Range value for output A2 0 500 ppb H S For M6200E s configured to measure both SO and H2S in multigas measurement mode e LOW range RANGE1 Range value for output A1 0 1500 ppm SO e HIGH range RANGE2 Range value for output A2 20 1000 ppm 5 To select the independent reporting range mode and set the upper measurement limits fo
77. If the analyzer starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not change the display then there are three possible problems e One or more of the keys is bad e The interrupt signal between the keyboard circuit and the motherboard is broken due to a cabling problem or e The keyboard circuit is bad 254 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal program If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly the display wiring or the I C bus may be faulty 11 5 7 Relay Board The relay board circuit can most easily be checked by observing the condition of its status LEDs as described in Section 11 1 4 and the associated output when toggled on and off through the SIGNAL I O function in the DIAG menu see Section 6 9 2 If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is not flashing then either the I2c connection between the motherboard and the relay board is bad or the relay board itself is bad If D1 on the relay board is flashing but toggling an output in the Signal I O function menu does not toggle the output s status LED the there is a circuit problem or possibly a blown driver chip on the relay board If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question heater valve etc
78. MEASUREMENT NOT MET Shelter Temperature Sample Introduction System Recorder Analyzer Operational Settings Mean temperature between 22 C and 28 C 72 and 82 F daily fluctuations not greater than 2 No moisture foreign material leaks obstructions sample line connected to manifold Adequate ink amp paper Legible ink traces Correct chart speed and range Correct time TEST measurements at nominal values 2 M6200E in SAMPLE mode Check thermograph chart weekly for variations greater than 2 C 4 F Weekly visual inspection Weekly visual inspection Weekly visual inspection Mark strip chart for the affected time period Repair or adjust temperature control Clean repair or replace as needed Replenish ink and paper supply Adjust time to agree with clock note on chart Adjust or repair as needed Analyzer Operational Check Precision Check Zero and span within tolerance limits as described in Subsec 9 1 3 of Sec 2 0 9 Q A Handbook Assess precision as described in Sec 2 0 8 and Subsec 3 4 3 Ibid Level 1 zero span every 2 weeks Level 2 between Level 1 checks at frequency desired analyzer by user Every 2 weeks Subsec 3 4 3 Ibid Find source of error and repair After corrective action re calibrate analyzer Calc report precision Sec 2 0 8 Ibid 182 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual EPA Protoc
79. NEXT ENTR EXH SETUP DELTA TIME 00 00 delay time for each iteration 0 0 3 0 ENTR EXIT 209 SETUP ZERO HH MM 0 24 00 EV 1 Y FREY BERD ERU EE SETUP DELTA TIEM 00 30 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X MODE ZERO SPAN PREV ENTR EXIT SETUP DURATION 15 0 MINUTES Y Toggle keys SETUP SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 1 00 00 SSET SETe VEDIT EAM duration for h PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT 4 SETUP DURATION 15 0MINUTES the Y p sequence Default SETUP TIMER ENABLE ON 3 0 0 ENTR EXIT value is minutes ON SET EDIT EXIT from SETUP DURATION 30 0 MINUTES Oe O00 SETUP STARTING DATE 01 JAN 02 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT mnm Toggle keys SETUP CALIBRATE OFF SETUP STARTING DATE 01 JAN 02 EN x d SET SET gt EXIT year x 0 4 SEP 0 3 ENTR EXIT Format Y Toggle key DD MON YY SETUP X X CALIBRATE OFF between SETUP X X STARTING DATE 04 SEP 03 Ip Off and ON ENTR EXIT ON SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X CALIBRATE ON SETUP STARTING DATE 04 SEP 03 SET SET EDIT EXIT SET SET EDIT EXIT Toggle keys to 3 Ni Rm Set time SETUP STARTING 00 00 SETUP AR SEQ 2 ZEROCSPAM 200 3 EXIT
80. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OF TELEDYNE ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS INCORPORATED S PERFORMANCE HEREUNDER WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE Terms and Conditions All units or components returned to Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated should be properly packed for handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center After the repair the equipment will be returned freight prepaid User Notes 20 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual Getting Started 3 GETTING STARTED 3 1 Unpacking and Initial Setup CAUTION To avoid personal injury always use two persons to lift and carry the Model 6200E 1 Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage If damaged please advise the shipper first then Teledyne Analytical Instruments 2 Included with your analyzer is a printed record Form number 04551 of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory This record is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument It should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument 3 Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage e Remove the set screw located in the top center of the rear panel e Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit four per side e Lift the cover straight up NO
81. PCA PMT Preamp PCA ThermoElectric Cooler Thermistor outputs temp of cold block to preamp PCA Heat Sink Cold Block Heat from PMT is absorbed by the cold block and transferred to the heat sink via the TEC then bled off SS Cooling Fan into the cool air stream Figure 10 15 PMT Cooling System 10 4 5 2 TEC Control Board The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located on the sensor housing assembly under the slanted shroud next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan Using the amplified PMT temperature signal from the PMT preamplifier board Section 10 4 6 it sets the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler The warmer the PMT gets the more current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to the heat sink TEC Control Power Status LED A red LED located on the top edge of this assembly glows constantly to indicate that the control circuit is receiving power TEC Control Test Points Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly they are numbered left to right start with the point immediately to the right of the power status LED See Section 11 5 13 for more information 10 4 6 PMT Preamplifier The PMT preamplifier board amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage PMT that can be processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the CPU to calculate the H2S concentration of the gas in the sampl
82. PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock e If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument s internal clock e If the REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour the first report activity would occur at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument s internal clock EXAMPLE Given the above settings if iDAS were activated at 7 57 35 the first sample would occur at 7 58 and the first report would be calculated at 8 00 consisting of data points for 7 58 7 59 and 8 00 During the next hour from 8 01 to 9 00 the instrument will take a sample reading every minute and include 60 sample readings When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will also store how many sample readings were used for the AVG MIN or MAX calculation but not the readings themselves REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD the samples accumulated so far during that period are lost Once the instrument is turned back on the iDAS restarts taking samples and temporarily them in volatile memory as part of the REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart At the end of this REPORT PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will be included in any A
83. PMT Preamp board Malfunction of analog sensor input circuitry on motherboard RCELL TEMP Sample chamber Bad reaction cell heater WARNING temperature is Bad reaction cell temperature sensor lt 45 C or gt 55 C Bad relay controlling the reaction cell heater Entire relay board is malfunctioning I C buss malfunction M6200E Rev A1 241 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 11 1 Warning Messages Indicated Failures cont WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES REAR BOARD Mother Board not Warning only appears on serial i o com port s NOT DET detected on power up Front panel display will be frozen blank or will not respond Massive failure of mother board RELAY BOARD WARN The CPU cannot communicate with the Relay Board I C buss failure Failed relay board Loose connectors wiring SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow rate is lt 500 cc min or gt 1000 cc min Failed sample pump Blocked sample inlet gas line Dirty particulate filter Leak downstream of critical flow orifice Failed flow sensor circuitry SAMPLE PRES WARN Sample Pressure is lt 10 in Hg or gt 35 in Hg If sample pressure is lt 10 in hg o Blocked particulate filter o Blocked sample inlet gas line o Failed pressure sensor circuitry If sample pressure is gt 35 in hg o Blocked vent line on pressurized sample zero span gas supply o Bad pressure sensor circuit
84. PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP i SETUP X X COM1 MODE 0 SET gt EDIT EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 fT SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Y SETUP X X COM1 MODEM INIT AT Y amp D amp H EXIT returns 2 SET SET EDIT EXIT to the SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU previous menu COMM EXIT ENTR accepts the y new string and returns SETUP X X COM1 MODEM INIT A T amp D amp H to the previous menu Y EXIT ignores the new SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU CH CH INS DEL A ENTR EXIT string and returns to Select which g the previous menu COM Port is ID COM1 COM2 EXIT SD tested V Press the P key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set The INS key The DEL key 0 9 inserts a character deletes a character A Z The CH and CH keys move before the cursor at the cursor space O 96 amp the cursor left and right location location P lt 3 A A along the text string NUI M6200E Rev A1 145 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual To Initialize the modem press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR
85. Remotely by using the external digital control inputs Section 6 12 1 2 and Section 7 7 1 or e Remotely through the RS 232 485 serial I O ports see Appendix A 6 for the appropriate commands Sources of zero and span gas flow must be capable of supplying at least 600 cm min Both supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer s enclosure In order to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length 5 4 2 Internal Zero Span Gas Generator Option 51 The M6200E can be equipped with an internal zero air and span gas generator IZS This option includes a heated enclosure for a permeation tube containing the calibration gas under high pressure an external scrubber for producing zero air and a set of valves for switching between the sample gas inlet and the output of the zero span subsystem functionally very similar to the valves included in the zero span valve option Figure 5 3 shows the internal pneumatic connections for a Model 6200E with the IZS option installed The following table contains the operational state of the valves associated with the IZS option during the analyzer s various operational modes Because the M6200E can be configured to measure H2S SO or both This option is available with permeation tubes filled with either H2S or SO see Section 5 4 3 The instrument can only be fitted with one type of permeation tube at a time Therefore the IZS option can o
86. SAMPLE port shown in Figure 3 2 2 Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel Ensure that the inlet to the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure 3 The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be 500 cm3 min 10 If a combined sample ozone air Perma Pure dryer is installed optional equipment the flow will be 640 cm3 min 10 500 cm3 min for the sample and 140 cm3 min for the ozone generator supply air 4 Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway 11 5 3 AC Power Configuration The M6200E can be easily configured for two main power regimes 100 120 V and 220 240 V at either 50 or 60 Hz The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC power voltage in use if it turns on and shows a front panel display after about 30 seconds Internally several LEDs should turn on as soon as the power is supplied If an incorrect power configuration is suspected check for the correct voltage and frequency at the line input on the rear panel If the unit is set for 220 240 V and is plugged into 100 120 V the analyzer will not start If the unit is set for 100 120 V and is plugged into 220 240 V the circuit breaker built into the ON OFF Switch on the front panel will trip to the OFF position immediately after power is switched on Note that the analyzer will be severely damaged if 220 240 V is supplied to it when configured for 100 120 V Never bypass the power switch or circ
87. This sequence will start 0 5 hours later each day Table 7 4 Example Auto Cal Sequence ATTRIBUTE COMMENT SEQUENCE Define Sequence 2 MODE ZERO SPAN Select Zero and Span Mode TIMER ENABLE ON Enable the timer STARTING DATE Sept 4 2002 Start after Sept 4 2002 STARTING TIME 01 00 First Span starts at 01 00 DELTA DAYS 2 Do Sequence 2 every other day DELTA TIME 00 30 Do Sequence 2 0 5 h later each day DURATION 15 0 Operate Span valve for 15 min CALIBRATE ON The instrument will re set the slope and offset values for the H S channel at the end of the AutoCal sequence 174 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X SETUP X X STARTING TIME 14 15 lt TST TST gt CALCALZ CALS SETUP SET SET EDIT EXIT y SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SOME US ENTA SETUP X X DELTA DAYS 1 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT y Toggle keys SETUPX X PRIMARY SETUP MENU pen gt number of CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP DEETADAYS I days between 0 0 2 ENTR EXIT procedures 1 367 SETUP SEQ 1 DISABLED NEXT MODE EXIT SETUP DELTA DAYS 2 Y SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP SEQ 2 DISABLED PREV NEXT MODE EXIT SETUP DELTA TIME00 00 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP MODE DISABLED Toggle keys i to set
88. Tubes 5 6 Calibration Gas Traceability Data Recording Devices str M Manual Calibration Checks Manual Calibration with Zero Span Valves Manual Calibration with IZS Option ne enne Manual Calibration Checks with IZS or Zero Span Valves Manual Calibration in INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reporting Range Modes 7 1 Calibration With Remote Contact Closures 7 8 Manual Calibration in Multigas Measurement Mode 7 9 Automatic Calibration Checks nem memememe me 7 9 1 Autocal of instruments in INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reporting Range 176 7 9 2 Autocal of instruments in Multigas Measurement Mode 2 176 7 10 Calibration Quality 8 EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION 8 1 Calibration Requirements Calibration of Equipment Recording DEVICE ire E Recommended Standards for Establishing Traceability EPA Calibration Using Permeation Tubes Calibration Frequency Record Keeping Summary of Quality Assurance Checks evel 1 Calibrations versus Level 2 Checks ZERO and SPAN Checks 3 1 Zero Span Check ison
89. V Out not available A4 Ground not available See Figure 3 2 for a the location of the analog output connector on the instruments rear panel M6200E Rev A1 85 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 9 4 1 Analog Output Signal Type and Range Span Selection To select an output signal type DC Voltage or current and level for one output channel activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press FROM ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO v SET SET CAL EXIT Press SET gt to select the analog output channel to be configured Press EDIT to continue DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V CAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V EDIT EXIT pm d DIAG AIOOUTPUT RANGE 5V These keys set the signal level and type of the EXIT selected channel 7 Pressing ENTR records the new setting DIAG AIOOUTPUT RANGE 10V and returns to the previous menu Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and ENTR EXIT p returns to the previous menu 6 9 4 2 Analog Output Calibration Mode The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or manually In its default mode the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all channels Manual calibration should be used for the 0 1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely ma
90. X XXX PPB H28 X XXX lt TST TST gt SETUP ACTION Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument Set the Display to show the H2S STB test function This function calculates the stability of the H2S x measurement Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB SO2 X XXX lt TST TST gt cX SETUP M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB SO2 X XXX lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB 502 X XXX v TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT lt ACTION Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the SO measurements Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu The value of H2S STB may jump significantly The SPAN key now M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB H2S X XXX appears during the transition from zero to span lt TST TST gt SPAN CONC EXIT You may see both keys If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to M P CAL RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC Wait until it falls back below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes M P CAL RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 X XXX appear see Section 11 for troubleshooting tips 7 lt TST TST ENTR SPAN CONC EXIT lt Pr
91. ability to reject interference from most of these sources 210 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation 10 2 6 1 Direct Interference Obviously since the M6200E measures H5S by converting it to 50 the most significant interfering gas for this measurement would be ambient SO that is present in the sample gas The M6200E circumvents this by passing the sample gas through a chemical scrubber that removes all SO from the sample gas before the H2S gt SO conversion takes place This ensures that the only SO present in the sample chamber is the result of the H2S gt SO conversion Obviously to make sure that the analyzer operates correctly it is important to make sure that this scrubber is functioning properly The second most common source of interference is from other gases that fluoresce in a similar fashion to SO when exposed to UV Light The most significant of these is a class of hydrocarbons called poly nuclear aromatics PNA of which xylene and naphthalene are two prominent examples Nitrogen oxide fluoresces in a spectral range near to SO For critical applications where high levels of NO are expected an optional optical filter is available that improves the rejection of NO contact customer service for more information The Model 6200E Analyzer has several methods for rejecting interference from these gasses A special scrubber kicker mechanism removes any PNA chemicals present in the sample
92. actual display of your instrument The ENTR key may disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR key will re appear 6 1 Overview of Operating modes The M6200E software has a variety of operating modes Most commonly the analyzer will be operating in SAMPLE mode In this mode a continuous read out of the H2S concentration is displayed on the front panel and output as an analog voltage from rear panel terminals calibrations can be performed and TEST functions and WARNING messages can be examined The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode This mode is used for performing certain configuration operations such as for the iDAS system the reporting ranges or the serial RS 232 RS 485 Ethernet communication channels The SET UP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting Mode Field e SAMPLE A RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S 400 0 TST TST CAL SETUP Figure 6 1 Front Panel Display The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running M6200E Rev A1 59 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual Besides SAMPLE and SETUP other modes the analyzer can be operated in are
93. be any 4 digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any number of ways e g location numbers company asset number etc 102 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 10 2 COM Port Default Settings As received from the factory the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem with pin 3 of the DB 9 connector designated for receiving data and pin 2 designated for sending data e COM1 RS 232 fixed DB 9 male connector o Baud rate 19200 bits per second baud o Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit o Parity None e 2 RS 232 configurable DB 9 female connector o Baud rate 115000 bits per second baud o Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit o Parity None CAUTION Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that make the link inoperable Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne Analytical Instruments for pin assignments before using 6 10 3 RS 232 COM Port Cable Connections In its default configuration the M6200E analyzer has two available RS 232 Com ports accessible via 2 DB 9 connectors on the back panel of the instrument The COM1 connector is a male DB 9 connector and the COM2 is a female DB9 connector Male DB 9 RS 232 Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer As seen from outside analyzer GND GND DTE mode GND DCE mode Figure 6 7
94. below SAMPLE H2S STB XXX X PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL HIGH LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP Wait until H2S STB falls below PT 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes Analyzer enters ZERO CAL Mode ZEROCALM 25 5 XXX XX PPB XXX X See Table 5 1 for Z S pl v Valve States during a ere this operating mode lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT v Continue Calibration as per Standard Procedure Once this selection is made the calibration procedure continues as previously described in Sections 7 2 through 7 6 The other range may be calibrated by starting over from the main SAMPLE display 7 7 1 Calibration With Remote Contact Closures Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN connector Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be found in Section 6 12 2 When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds the instrument switches into zero low span or high span mode and the internal zero span valves will be automatically switched to the appropriate configuration The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order It is recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading the instrument will stay in the selected mode for a
95. bus and the relay card The converter is enclosed in high temperature insulation and encased in a stainless steel housing The converter is most efficient when it operates at 315 C converting 95 of the H2S into SO Converter temperature is viewable via the front panel as the test function CONV TEMP see Section 6 2 1 and can also be output via the test channel analog output see Section 6 9 10 A M6200E Rev A1 203 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual warning message CONV TEMP WARNING see Section 6 2 2 will be issued by the CPU if the converter s temperature is below 310 C or above 320 C When the converter is operating at peak efficiency there is a nearly 1 1 relationship between the amount of H S entering the catalytic converter and the amount of SO leaving it Therefore by measuring the amount of SO in the gas after it leaves the converter the amount of H5S originally present on the sample gas can be directly inferred This is accomplished by measuring the ultraviolet fluorescence of the SO in the sample chamber 10 1 2 SO Ultraviolet Fluorescence The physical principle of the M6200E s measurement method relies on the fluorescence that occurs when Sulfur dioxide SO is excited by ultraviolet light with wavelengths in the range of 190 nm 230 nm This reaction is a two step process The first stage Equation 10 1 occurs when SO molecules are struck by ultraviolet photons of the appropriate wavele
96. check the correct operation of the preamplifier board we suggest the technician carry out the electrical and optical tests described in 6 8 5 and 6 8 6 If the ETEST fails the preamplifier board may be faulty 11 5 13 PMT Temperature Control PCA The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located on the sensor housing assembly under the slanted shroud next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan If the red LED located on the top edge of this assembly is not glowing the control circuit is not receiving power Check the analyzers power supply the Relay boards power distribution circuitry and the wiring connecting them to the PMT temperature control PCA TEC Control Test Points Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly they are numbered left to right start with the T1 point immediately to the right of the power status LED These test points provide information regarding the functioning of the control circuit e To determine the current running through the control circuit measure the voltage between T1 and T2 Multiply that voltage by 10 e To determine the drive voltage being supplied by the control circuit to the TEC measure the voltage between T2 and T3 e If this voltage is zero the TEC circuitry is most likely open Or e If the voltage between T2 and T3 0 VDC and the voltage measured between T1 and T2 0 VDC there is most likely an open circuit or failed op amp on control PCA itself e I
97. circuit assembly the gt PCB with electronic components ready to use PCB acronym for printed circuit board the bare board without electronic components 42 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Frequently Asked Questions amp Glossary RS 232 a type of serial communications port RS 485 a type of serial communications port TCP IP acronym for transfer control protocol internet protocol the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices VARS acronym for variables the variables settings of the analyzer User Notes M6200E Rev A1 43 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE This section includes descriptions of the hardware and software options available for the Model 6200E UV Fluorescence H S Analyzer For assistance with ordering these options please contact the sales department of Teledyne Analytical Instruments at TEL 626 961 9221 TEL 626 934 1500 FAX 626 961 2538 FAX 626 934 1651 WEBSITE http www teledyne ai com 5 1 Rack Mount Kits Options 20a 20b amp 21 There are several options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19 racks OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION OPT 20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in chassis slides OPT 20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in chassis slides OPT 21 Rack mount brackets only 5 2 Current Loop Analog Outputs Option 41 This option adds isolated voltage to
98. closure zero calibration failed while DYN ZERO was set to ON WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN SPAN was set to ON WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A D or at least one D A channel has not been calibrated 290 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision A 1 Table A 3 M6200E Test Functions Revision A 1 TEST Function Message Text DESCRIPTION RANGE1 RANGE1 500 0 PPB D A 1 range in independent range mode RANGE2 RANGE2 500 0 PPB D A 2 range in independent range mode STABILITY H2S 5 0 0 PPB Concentration stability standard deviation based on setting of STABIL FREQ and STABIL SAMPLES loop Time in parenthesis is standard deviation NORMPMTDET NORM PMT 742 9 MV auto zero offset but not range LAMPRATIO LAMP RATIO 100 0 reading STRAYLIGHT STR LGT 0 1 PPB DARKLAMP DRK LMP 42 4 MV UV lamp dark offset SLOPE H2S SLOPE 1 061 Slope for current range computed during zero span calibration calibration RCELLDUTY RCELL ON 0 00 SEC RCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP 52 1 C PMTTEMP PMT TEMP 7 0 C PMT temperature IZSDUTY IZS ON 0 00 SEC IZS temp
99. combined error analysis needs to be performed The analyzer will alert the user that a warning is active by displaying the keypad labels MSG and CLR on the front panel and a text message in the top center line of the display as shown in this example SAMPLE AZERO WARNING NOX 123 4 lt TST TST gt CAL MSG CLR SETUP The analyzer will also issue a message to the serial port and cause the red FAULT LED on the front panel to blink To view or clear a warning message press SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET NOX XXX X In WARNING mode lt TST TST gt keys replaced with TEST key 9 TEST CAL MSG SETUP Pressing TEST switches to SAMPLE mode and hides warning MSG indicates that one or more messages until new warning s warning message are active but are activated hidden Pressing MSG cycles X through warnings SAMPLE RANGE 500 PPB NOX XXX X In SAMPLE mode all warning I messages are hidden but MSG TST TST gt CAL MSG CLR SETUP Selon appears SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET XXX X Press CLR to clear the current If warning messages re appear lt TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP warning message If more than one warning is the cause needs to be found Do n S not repeatedly clear warnings active Food n d will Without corrective action LLL y Once the last warning has been cleared the analyzer returns to SAMPLE Mode
100. comes with all three of these channels set up to output a DC voltage However 4 20mA current loop drivers be purchased for the first two of these outputs A1 and A2 Output Loop back All three of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to the A D converter through a Loop back circuit This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures 10 4 12 External Digital I O This External Digital I O performs two functions STATUS OUTPUTS Logic Level voltages are output through an optically isolated 8 pin connector located on the rear panel of the analyzer These outputs convey good bad and on off information about certain analyzer conditions They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices see Section 6 12 1 1 CONTROL INPUTS By applying 5VDC power supplied from an external source such as a PLC or Datalogger see Section 6 12 1 2 Zero and Span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel 10 4 13 I C Data Bus The I C data bus is used to communicate data and commands between the CPU the keyboard display interface and the various switches and relays on the relay board I C is a two wire clocked bi directional digital serial I O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC 104 bus to I C The data is then f
101. components 11 4 2 Slow Response If the analyzer starts responding too slowly to any changes in sample zero or span gas check for the following e Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines e Sample inlet line is too long e Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices Check flows Section 11 5 2 pressures Section 11 5 1 and if necessary change the critical flow orifice Section 9 3 7 e Wrong materials in contact with sample use Teflon materials only e Sample vent line is located too far from the instrument sample inlet and causes long mixing and purge times Locate sample inlet overflow vent as close as possible to the analyzer s sample inlet port 250 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR e Dirty sample chamber Clean the sample chamber e Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer e Insufficient time allowed for H2S calibration gas source to become stable 11 4 3 The Analyzer Doesn t Appear on the LAN or Internet Most problems related to internet communications via the Ethernet card option will be due to problems external to the analyzer e g bad network wiring or connections failed routers malfunctioning servers etc However there are several symptoms that indicate the problem may be with the Ethernet card itself e If none of the Ethernet s cards four status LED s located on the analyzer s rear panel is lit it is possible t
102. describes how to determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being investigated M6200E Rev A1 251 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual 11 5 1 Detailed Pressure Leak Check Obtain a leak checker similar to Teledyne Analytical Instruments part number 01960 which contains a small pump shut off valve and pressure gauge to create both over pressure and vacuum Alternatively a tank of pressurized gas with the two stage regulator adjusted to lt 15 psi a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used CAUTION Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a pressurized system do not apply or re apply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be sucked into the instrument contaminating inside surfaces Do not exceed 15 PSI when pressurizing the system 1 Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover 2 Install a leak checker or a tank of gas compressed oil free air or nitrogen as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel 3 Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas allowing enough time to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice Check each tube connection fittings hose clamps with soap bubble solution looking for fine bubbles Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution do not re apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and con
103. for the gas no being measured will continue to report the last valid reading 6 7 6 Auto Range Mode AUTO In AUTO range mode the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between two user defined ranges low and high The unit will switch from low range to high range when the H2S concentration exceeds 98 of the low range span The unit will return from high range back to low range once both the H2S concentration falls below 75 of the low range span When set up to measure a single gas H2S or SO in AUTO Range mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both the A1 and A2 outputs and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as described above To select auto range mode and set the upper span limits for the high and low ranges press the following keystroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X SETUP X X RANGE MODE AUTO lt TST TST gt CAL _ _________ SETUP SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT v SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP xk RANGE CONTROL MENU EXIT x 2 returns to the main MODE SET UNIT EXIT SAMPLE display SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU P v CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X LOW RANGE 500 0 Conc SETUP X X RANGE colmo MENU Toggle the numeral 0 0 5 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT keys to set the LOW and HIGH MODE SET UNIT EXIT range value ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT SETUP X X RANGE MODE da SETUP
104. gas are defined as follows Zero air and span gas inlets should supply their respective gases in excess of the 700 cc min demand of the analyzer Supply and vent lines should be of sufficient length and diameter to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects SPAN GAS e gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range In the case of H2S measurements made with the Teledyne Analytical Instruments Model 6200E UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer it is recommended that you use a span gas with a H2S concentration equal to 9096 of the measurement range for your application EXAMPLE If the application is to measure between ppb and 500 ppb an appropriate span gas concentration would be 450 ppb H5S in Cylinders of calibrated H2S gas traceable to NIST Standard Reference Material specifications also referred to as SRM s or EPA protocol calibration gases are commercially available Table 3 5 lists specific NIST SRM reference numbers for various concentrations of H2S Some applications such as EPA monitoring require a multipoint calibration procedure where span gases of different concentrations are needed We recommend using a bottle of calibrated H2S gas of higher concentration in conjunction with a gas dilution calibrator such as a Teledyne Analytical Instruments Model 700 This type of calibrator precisely mixes a high concentration gas from zero air
105. gas dilution calibrator Model 700 for this purpose What do I do if the concentration on the instrument s front panel display does not match the value recorded or displayed on my data logger even if both instrument s are properly calibrated This most commonly occurs for one or both of the following reasons 1 a difference in circuit ground between the analyzer the data logger or 2 a scale problem with the input to the data logger The analog outputs of the analyzer can be manually calibrated to compensate for either or both of these effects see Section 6 9 4 2 amp 6 9 4 3 How do I measure the sample flow Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample inlet port when the instrument is operating The sample flow should be 650 cm3 min 10 Section 11 5 2 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the sample gas flow How often do I need to change the particulate filter Once per week Table 9 1 contains a maintenance schedule listing the most important regular maintenance tasks M6200E Rev A1 41 Frequently Asked Questions amp Glossary Model 6200E I nstruction Manual Q How long does the sample pump last A The sample pump should last about one year and the pump head should to be replaced annually or when necessary Use the RCEL pressure indicator on the front panel to see if the pump needs replacement If this value falls below 10 in Hg A on average the pump
106. gt SO Converter The catalyst contained the H2S gt SO converter of your M6200E must be replaced periodically in order for the analyzer to continue measuring H2S accurately and reliability This material is capable of efficiently converting H2S into SO for up to 6000 ppm hours This means that if the H2S content of the sample gas is typically around 600 ppb the scrubber will function for approximately 10 000 hours a little over 13 months If however the typical ambient H5S level of the sample gas is 1000 ppb the scrubber would only last for approximately 6000 hours or about 8 months 9 3 5 1 Predicting When the Converter Catalyst Should Be Replaced To determine how long the H2S SO converter will operate efficiently 1 Measure the amount of H S in the sample gas 2 Divide 6000 by the H2S concentration EXAMPLE If the H2S concentration is 750 ppb 6000 ppm hr 0 75 ppm 100 000 ppb hr 750 ppb 8000 hrs Operational hours Operational hours Operational hours 9 3 5 2 Checking the Efficiency of the H2S gt SO Converter To check to see if your H2S SO converter is operating properly 1 Setthe analyzer to SO measurement mode see Section 6 8 1 2 Supply a gas with a known concentration of SO to the sample gas inlet of the analyzer 3 Wait until the analyzer s SO concentration measurement stabilizes This can be determined by setting the analyzer s display to show the SO2 STB test function see Section 6 2 1 SO
107. gt data from the flash chip M200E NOX ANALYZER The instrument is e loading the analyzer BOOT PROGRESS XXXXX 50 _____ firmware The revision level of the firmware installed in your BOOT PROGRESS XXXXXXXX 80 __ analyzer is briefly displayed SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET SO2 X XXX E Firmware TEST CAL T SETUP fully booted Press CLR to clear initial warning messages SOFTWARE REVISION C 2 see Section 3 2 3 The analyzer should automatically switch to SAMPLE mode after completing the boot up sequence and start monitoring H2S gas 3 2 2 Warm Up The M6200E requires about 60 minutes warm up time before reliable H2S measurements can be taken During that time various portions of the instrument s front panel will behave as described in Table 3 6 below M6200E Rev A1 33 Getting Started Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 3 6 Front Panel Display During System Warm Up NAME BEHAVIOR SIGNIFICANCE Concentration Displays current Field compensated H2S Concentration Mode Field Displays blinking Instrument is in sample mode but is still in the SAMPLE process of warming up STATUS LED S Sample Green On Unit is operating in sample mode front panel display is being updated Cal Yellow Off The instrument s calibration is not enabled Fault Red Blinking The analyzer is warming up and hence out of specification for a fault free reading
108. in Table 6 18 and which can be combined by adding the Mode ID numbers For example quiet mode computer mode and internet enabled mode would carry a combined mode ID of 1 the standard configuration on the M6200E COM2 port Note that each COM port needs to be configured independently Table 6 18 COMM Port Communication modes MODE ID DESCRIPTION QUIET Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer iDAS reports and 1 warning messages to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a computer program such as APICOM Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is communicating with a computer program such as APICOM SECURITY 4 When enabled the serial port requires a password before it will respond The only command that is active is the help screen CR HESSEN The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries PROTOCOL 16 Teledyne Analytical Instruments part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol E 7 1 When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings from 2048 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit to Even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit RS 485 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS 485 communication RS 485 mode has precedence over multidrop mode if both are enabled MULTIDROP 32 Multidrop pro
109. in your instrument RECORDED ACCEPTABLE RECORDED ACCEPTABLE PARAMETER VALUE VALUE PARAMETER VALUE VALUE RANGE ppb ppm 50 ppb 20 ppm SLOPE 1 0 0 3 H2S STB ppb lt 1 ppb with zero H2S OFFS mV 250 air SAMP FL cm3 min 500 50 HVPS M 5500 900 PMT signal mV 20 to 150 ETEST mM 2000 1000 with zero air PMT signal at mV 0 5000 OTEST mM 2000 1000 span gas conc ppb ppm 0 20 000 ppb NORM PMT at mV 0 5000 RCELL TEMP ec 50 1 span gas conc ppb ppm 0 20 000 ppb UV LAMP mV 2 000 to 4 000 BOX TEMP Ambient 5 STR LGT lt 100 ppb zero PMT TEMP C 7 2 air DARK PMT 50 to 200 IZS TEMP C 50 3 DARK LAMP mV 50 to 200 3 Has the analyzer been checked for leaks Yes No 1 For proper flows Yes No 4 What are the failure symptoms Continue on back if necessary 5 Which tests have you done trying to solve the problem Continue on back if necessary 6 If possible fax a portion of a strip chart or email a data file to customer service CUSTOMER SERVICE CONTACT INFORMATION 6565 Nancy Ridge Drive San Diego CA 92121 PHONE 1 858 657 9800 or 1 800 324 5190 FAX 1 858 657 9816 EMAIL api customerservice teledyne com You can access and submit an online version of this form at http www teledyne api com forms csforM6200E asp Notes and further information M6200E Rev A1 303 Appendix C Repair Questionnaire M62
110. increased number of electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier are collected by a positively charged anode at the other end which creates a useable current signal This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to the motherboard 222 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation Current Flow Window Photocathode n Photon Dynode Focusing Electrode Electron Multiplier Figure 10 14 Basic PMT Design A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the electron multiplier The higher the voltage the greater is the number of electrons emitted from each dynode of the electron multiplier making the PMT more sensitive and responsive to small variations in light intensity but also more noisy dark noise The gain voltage of the PMT used in the M6200E is usually set between 450 V and 800 V This parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS Section 6 2 1 For information on when and how to set this voltage see Section 11 6 3 The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly Figure 10 13 This assembly also includes the high voltage power supply required to drive the PMT an LED used by the instrument s optical test function a thermistor that measures the temperature of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system including the thermo electric cooler TEC 10
111. indicated by brackets INST IP 0 00 000 000 lt CH CH gt DEL 0 ENTR EXIT GATEWAY IP 000 000 000 000 lt SET SET gt EDIT GATEWAY IP 0 00 000 000 lt CH CH gt DEL ENTR EXIT SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 D SET SET EDIT SUBNET 2 55 255 255 0 TCP PORT 3000 CH DEL ENTR EXIT SET The PORT number needs to remain at 3000 Do not change this setting unless instructed to by Pressing EXIT from any of the above display menus causes the Ethernet option to reinitialize its internal interface firmware Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel Y c INITIALIZING INET 0 gt INITIALIZING INET 100 INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP XX COMMUNICATIONS MENU y etworl ministrator ID INET EXIT M6200E Rev A1 111 Operating Instructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 10 6 4 Changing the Analyzer s HOSTNAME The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network The default name for all Teledyne Analytical Instruments Model 6200E analyzers is 101E To change this name particularly if you have more than one Model 6200E analyzer on your network press Y SAMPLE RANGE 500
112. is directly related to the concentration of the SO in the Sample Chamber The Model 6200E UV Fluorescence SO Analyzer is specifically designed to create these circumstances e The light path is very short e The optical design reduces the effects of stray light geometrically and spectrally e A special hydrocarbon scrubber removes the most common interfering gases from the sample gas e Areference detector measures the intensity of the available excitation UV light and is used to remove effects of lamp drift e Finally the temperature of the sample gas is measured and controlled via heaters attached to the sample chamber The net result is that any variation in UV fluorescence can be directly attributed to changes in the concentration of SO in the sample gas 10 2 The UV Light Path The optical design of the Model 6200E s sample chamber optimizes the fluorescent reaction between SO and UV Light Figure 10 2 and assures that only UV light resulting from the decay of SO2 into SO is sensed by the instrument s fluorescence detector UV radiation is generated by a lamp specifically designed to produce a maximum amount of light of the wavelength needed to excite SO into SO2 330 nm and a special reference detector 206 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation circuit constantly measures lamp intensity see Equation 10 2 A Photo Multiplier Tube PMT detects the UV given off by the SO2 decay
113. more than nominal flow or were replaced with an orifice of wrong specifications If the flows are more than 15 higher than normal we recommend that the technician re calibrate the flow electronically using the procedure in Section 6 9 9 followed by a thorough and regular monitoring of these flows to see if the new setting is retained properly 11 3 Calibration Problems 11 3 1 Negative Concentrations Negative concentration values can be caused for several things e A slight negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas and the signal is drifting around the zero calibration point This is caused by the analyzer s zero noise and may cause reported concentrations to be negative for a few seconds at a time down to 20 ppb but should alternate with similarly high positive values e Mis calibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values If the zero air contained some H2S gas contaminated zero air or a worn out zero air scrubber and the analyzer was calibrated to that concentration as zero the analyzer may report negative values when measuring air that contains little or no H2S The same problem occurs if the analyzer was zero calibrated using ambient air or span gas e If the response offset test function for H2S H2S OFFS are greater than 150 mV a failed PMT or high voltage supply or sample chamber contamination could be the cause Clean the sample chamber according to Section 9
114. name of a data channel follow the above key sequence and then press 4 FROM THE PREVIOUS KEY SEQUENCE SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT SETUP NAME CONC ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous N ENTR EXIT gt menu EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 A Z space amp _ lt gt M6200E Rev A1 127 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 11 2 3 Trigger Events To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu see Section 6 11 2 2 Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 ATIMER 2 4032 R Exits to the Main PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Data Acquisition menu SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu SETUP X X EVENT ATIMER lt PREV NEXT gt ENTR EXIT Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the list of available trigger events 6 11 2 4 Editing iDAS Parameters Data channels can be edited
115. of the process as follows XXX X SETUP TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SAMPLE 502 H2S GAS TO CAL 25 SETUP SAMPLE GAS TO CAL SO2 Wait until H2S LOW HIGH STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes ZERO CALM TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC Continue Calibration as per Standard Procedure Once this selection is made the calibration procedure continues as previously described The other gas may be calibrated by starting over from the main SAMPLE display 172 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 9 Automatic Calibration Checks AutoCal The AutoCal system allows unattended periodic operation of the zero span valve options by using the analyzer s internal time of day clock AutoCal operates by executing user defined sequences to initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer and to open and close valves appropriately It is possible to program and run up to three separate sequences SEQ1 SEQ2 and SEQ3 Each sequence can operate in one of three modes or be disabled Table 7 2 AutoCal Modes MODE ACTION DISABLED Disables the sequence ZERO Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check ZERO SPAN Causes the sequence to perform a zero and span concentration calibration or check SPAN Causes the sequence to perform a span concentration calibration o
116. of the transistors on pins 1 8 are bussed together SPARE DC POWER 5 VDC 300 mA source combined rating with Control Output if used V Digital The ground level from the analyzer s internal DC power supplies Ground M6200E Rev A1 25 Getting Started Model 6200E I nstruction Manual 3 1 1 3 Connecting the Control Inputs If you wish to use the analyzer to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes several digital control inputs are provided through a 10 pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer s rear panel There are two methods for energizing the control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin labeled is the most convenient method However if full isolation is required an external 5 VDC power supply should be used CONTROL IN CONTROL IN oe oe ARR Rage ZERO CAL SPAN CAL ZERO CAL SPAN CAL 5 VDC Power ES Supply Local Power Connections External Power Connections Figure 3 5 Control Input Connector Table 3 3 Control Input Signals STATUS INPUT DEFINITION ON CONDITION A The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode The mode REMOTE ZERO CAL field of the display will read ZERO CAL R B The analyzer is placed in low span calibration mode as part REMOTE f performin low span midpoint calibration The mode LO SPAN CAL field of the display will read LO CAL SPARE The gro
117. operating inside the analyzer Use common sense when operating inside a running analyzer NOTE The front panel of the analyzer is hinged at the bottom and may be opened to gain access to various components mounted on the panel itself or located near the front of the instrument such as the particulate filter A locking screw located at the top center of the panel and two fasteners located in the upper right and left corners of the panel lock it shut Figure 3 9 11 1 General Troubleshooting The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected evaluated and repaired During operation the analyzer continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps e Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary e Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action e Use the internal electronic status LED s to determine whether the electronic communication channels are operating properly Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay board Note that the analyzer s DC power wiring is color coded and these colors match the color of the correspondin
118. principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and permanently recorded e SAMPLE PERIOD Determines how often iDAS temporarily records a sample reading of the parameter in volatile memory The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be accessed from the standard iDAS front panel menu but is available via the instruments communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol 130 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the iDAS parameter s sample mode is set for AVG MIN or MAX e REPORT PERIOD Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are processed e g average minimum or maximum are calculated and the results stored permanently in the instruments Disk on Chip as well as transmitted via the analyzer s communication ports The REPORT PERIOD may be set from the front panel If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen REPORT PERIOD In AVG MIN or MAX sample modes the settings for the SAMPLE PERIOD and the REPORT PERIOD determine the number of data points used each time the average minimum or maximum is calculated stored and reported to the COMM ports The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the of the chosen REPORT PERIOD Also the SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT
119. properly vent excess span gas e Ifthe instrument is equipped with an intern IZS valve option and the H2S span value is continuously trending downward the IZS permeation tube may require replacement 11 3 7 Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value reported on the front panel you may need to re calibrate the analog outputs This becomes more likely when using a low concentration or low analog output range Analog outputs running at 0 1 V full scale should always be calibrated manually See Section 6 9 4 3 for a detailed description of this procedure 11 4 Other Performance Problems Dynamic problems i e problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve The following section provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions 11 4 1 Excessive noise Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample supply or the analyzer itself Make sure that the sample or span gas supply is leak free and carry out a detailed leak check as described earlier in this chapter Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board the high voltage power supply and or the PMT detector itself Contact the factory on trouble shooting these
120. quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface RS 232 COM1 modem initialization string Sent verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up or manually Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface RS232_MODE2 BitFlag 0 65535 RS 232 COM2 mode flags Same settings as RS232_MODE BAUD_RATE2 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 RS 232 COM2 baud rate Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface MODEM_INIT2 Any character in the allowed character set Up to 100 characters RS 232 COM2 modem initialization string Sent verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up or manually Enclose value in double 286 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial 1 Revision A 1 SETUP VARIABLE NUMERIC UNITS DEFAULT VALUE VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION amp BO amp N6 long quotes when setting from the RS amp MO EO 232 interface Q1 amp WO RS232 PASS Password 940331 0 999999 RS 232 log on password MACHINE ID ID 101 2 0 9999 Unique ID number for instrument TEST CHAN ID 102 3 108 MM NONE Any character in the allowed character set Up to 100 characters long NONE PMT READING UV READING SAMPLE PRESSURE SAMPLE FLOW RCELL TEMP CHASSIS TEMP IZS TEMP PMT TEMP CONV TEMP
121. rear panel labeled STATUS They are used to interface with a device that accepts closed contact digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLC s 24 M6200E Rev Al Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started STATUS 1 2 SYSTEM OK CONC VALID Figure 3 4 w 4 5 o 7 8 y HIGH RANGE ZERO CAL SPAN CAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE Connect to Internal Ground of Monitoring Status Output Connector NOTE Most PLC s have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will draw When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature external resistors must be used to limit the current through the individual transistor outputs to 50mA 120 Q for 5V supply Table 3 2 Status Output Signals DEFINITION CONDITION 1 SYSTEM ON if no faults are present OFF any time the HOLD OFF feature is active such as during calibration or when other faults exist possibly invalidating the current concentration 2 CONC VALID measurement example sample flow rate is outside of acceptable limits ON if concentration measurement is valid 3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of the AUTO Range Mode 4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument s ZERO point is being calibrated 5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument s SPAN point is being calibrated 6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode 7 8 SPARE D EMITTER BUS The emitters
122. refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 11 t Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO2 mode they appear as SO2 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both version are listed and should be checked M6200E Rev A1 177 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual User Notes 178 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration 8 EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION 8 1 Calibration Requirements When configured for SO measurement mode or multigas measurement mode the M6200E may be used for EPA SLAMS monitoring In these cases it must be calibrated in accordance with the instructions in this section At the writing of this manual there is no EPA requirements for the monitoring of H2S or published H2S calibration protocols therefore these instruction only discuss the calibration of the SO measurement feature In order to insure that high quality accurate measurements are obtained at all times the M6200E must be calibrated prior to use A quality assurance program centered on this aspect and including attention to the built in warning features of the M6200E periodic inspection regular zero span checks and routine maintenance is paramount to achieving this In order to have a better understanding of the factors involved in assuring continuous and reliable information from the M6200E it is strongly recommended that Publication No PB 273 518 Quality Assurance Handboo
123. siir e Rr ie ELO IP e etin 62 Viewing and Clearing M6200E WARNING Messages 64 Analog Output Connector Key ccecece eee nennen senem nne nnne 70 Setup for Calibrating Analog 90 Setup for Calibrating Current 92 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp COM2 in RS 232 mode 103 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp COM2 in RS 232 mode 104 CPU card Locations of RS 232 486 Switches Connectors and Jumpers 105 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 mode 106 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 mode 106 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multidrop PCA option 62 113 RS232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect Diagram 115 Default IDAS Chann ls SetuP nennen 124 APICOM user interface for configuring the IDAS 137 iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation 138 Status Output Connector neseksa ninr ire yr he ann Rn ER RRR Ray ER e 139 Control Inputs with local 5 V power
124. t Corinector RR inan a 24 Status Output Connector iiss iy tence cerei e re ee de ape es olx sce ia oe dele Perse crop apre E 25 Control Inp t COLnectotr rre ih RI RR Y E RU E MERI TRES ia 26 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator 28 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas 28 Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units with Valve Options 30 M6200E Layout With IZS aias ce Deren regen e eese Ene Rin cara tee dete 31 Front Panel FayOUub od rex e imet e he ee Per Mene rans Etat aa at nudi euius 34 Pneumatic Diagram of the M6200E Standard Configuration 37 Current Loop Option Installed on the 46 Pneumatic Diagram of the M6200E With Z S Option Installed 47 Pneumatic Diagram of the M6200E with IZS Options Installed 49 M6200E Multidrop Gard err pere rrt ro CU 53 M6200E Ethernet Card oen ener urina ere sani 54 M6200E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed sese 54 Front Panel Display ei eaea ck pa Rhe SR REPAIR IREQRRREY ERA 59 Viewing M6200E TEST F rlCEiOns
125. that damage from occurring 12 1 How Static Charges are Created Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer are very small require very little power and operate very quickly Unfortunately the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also makes them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro static charges occur in the first place Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate some electrons from one surface are retained by the other Materials Materials Makes Separate Contact Protons 3 Protons 3 PROTONS 3 PROTONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 2 ELECTRONS 4 NET CHARGE O Net CHARGE Net CHARGE 1 CHARGE 1 Figure 12 1 Triboelectric Charging If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded the resulting positive or negative charge can not bleed off and becomes trapped in place or static The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor With each step electrons change places and th
126. the excitation and decay of SO SO During instrument calibration when the analyzer is sampling zero air calibration gas devoid of H2S a measurement of the background light that is still present in the sample chamber is recorded and used to offset the value of the PMT output used to calculate the H2S concentration 10 3 Pneumatic Operation CAUTION It is important that the sample airflow system is leak tight and not pressurized over ambient pressure Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule Table 9 1 Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found in Section 11 5 1 NOTE Relative Pressure versus Absolute Pressure In this manual vacuum readings are given in inches of mercury absolute pressure in Hg A i e indicate an absolute pressure referenced against zero a perfect vacuum 212 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual Theory Of Operation 10 3 1 sample gas Flow The Flow of gas through the M6200E UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air though the instrument HYDROCARBON SCRUBBER KICKER SAMPLE PRESSURE 0 SENSOR FLOW FLOW PRESSURE SENSO SENSOR PCA I INSTRUMENT CH
127. the LAN the device is connected to EDIT key SUBNET Configured disabled All addressable devices and MASK by DHCP when DHCP Computers on a LAN must have is ON the same subnet mask Any transmissions sent devices with different assumed to be outside of the LAN and are routed through gateway computer onto the Internet This number defines the terminal control port by which the instrument is addressed by ICE PORT 3000 Editable terminal emulation software such as Internet or Teledyne Analytical Instruments APICOM The name by which your analyzer will appear when addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the Internet While the HOST NAME 101E Editable default setting for all Teledyne Analytical Instruments M6200E analyzers is M6200E the host name may be changed to fit customer needs Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service personnel 108 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions NOTE It is a good idea to check these settings the first time you power up your analyzer after it has been physically connected to the LAN Internet to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate information from you network server s If the gateway IP instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes e g 0 0 0 0 the DCHP was not successful You may have to manually c
128. the software menu trees refer to Appendix A 1 The areas access under the Setup mode are Table 6 4 Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions KEYPAD MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE LABEL DESCRIPTION SECTION Analyzer Configuration CFG Lists key hardware and software configuration 6 5 information Used to set up an operate the AutoCal feature Auto Cal Feature ACAL Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal 7 9 valve options installed Internal Data Acquisition iDAS DAS Used to set up the iDAS system and view recorded data 6 11 Analog Output Reporting Used to configure the output signals generated by the Range Configuration RAGE instruments Analog outputs B Calibration Password PASS Turns the calibration password feature ON OFF 6 3 1 Security Internal Clock CLK Used to Set or adjust the instrument s internal clock 6 6 Configuration Advanced SETUP features MORE This button accesses the instruments secondary setup See menu Table 6 5 Table 6 5 Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions KEYPAD MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE LABEL DESCRIPTION SECTION c Used to set up and operate the analyzer s various External Communication COMM external I O channels including RS 232 RS 485 oe Channel Configuration 6 12 modem communication and or Ethernet access System Status Variables VARS Used to view various variables related to the 6 8 instruments current operational status Used to access
129. time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged device is installed causes down time lost data lost productivity as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property Static Charges can t build up on a conductive surface There are two errors in this statement Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded The charge will be equalized across the entire device but without access to earth ground they are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and or discharge triggered in the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench M6200E Rev A1 267 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Model 6200E Instruction Manual e As long as my analyzer is properly installed it is safe from damage caused by static discharges It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves This does not however prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things like you and your clothing from discharging through the instrument and
130. tube if necessary and replace it with the new tube Make sure that the tube is placed into the larger of two holes and that the open permeation end of the tube plastic is facing up 6 Re attach the cover with three screws and make sure that the sealing O ring is properly in place and that the three screws are tightened evenly 7 Replace the analyzer cover plug the power cord back in and turn on the analyzer 8 Carry out an IZS span check to see if the new permeation device works properly The permeation rate may need several days to stabilize WARNING Do not leave instrument turned off for more than 8 hours without removing the permeation tube Do not ship the instrument without removing the permeation tube The tube continues to emit gas even at room temperature and will contaminate the entire instrument 9 3 3 Maintaining the SO Scrubber The SO scrubber of your M6200E utilizes a consumable compound to absorb SO form the sample gas that must be replaced periodically in order for the analyzer to continue measuring H2S accurately and reliability This material is capable of efficiently scrubbing SO for up to 1000 ppm hours This means that if the SO content of the sample gas is typically around 100 ppb the scrubber will function for approximately 10 000 hours a little over 13 months If however the typical ambient SO level of the sample gas is 250 ppb the scrubber would only last for approximately 4000 hour
131. value M6200E Rev A1 99 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 9 10 Test Channel Output When activated output channel A4 can be used to report one of the test functions viewable from the SAMPLE mode display To activate the A4 channel and select a test function follow this key sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR lp SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT DIAG SIGNAL 1 0 NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT C Continue to pris NEXT until y DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT EXIT returns to the main PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SAMPLE display DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL NONE NEXT ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL PMT READING ENTR Press PREV or NEXT to move through the list of available parameters Table 6 13 the displayed Table 6 14 TEST CHANNEL TEST PARAMETER RANGE NONE Test channel is turned off PMT READING UV READING SAMPLE PRESSURE SAMPLE FLOW RCELL TEMP CHASSIS TEMP IZS TEMP PMT TEMP CHASSIS TEMP HVPS VOLTAGE not the output signal This refers to the voltage range of the parameter and 0 5000 m
132. various warning messages will appear MODE FIELD MESSAGE FIELD LOCKING SCREW CONCENTRATION FIELD STATUS LED s FASTENER FASTENER SAMPLE A RANGE 500 0 PPB SO2 400 0 lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP FLUORESCENCE SO2 ANALYZER MODEL 6200E KEY DEFINITIONS KEYBOARD ON OFF SWITCH Figure 3 10 Front Panel Layout 3 2 3 Warning Messages Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside of specified limits during the analyzer s warm up period the software will suppress most warning conditions for 60 minutes after power up If warning messages persist after 60 minutes investigate their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Chapter 11 The following table includes a brief description of the various warning messages that may appear 34 M6200E Rev Al Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started Table 3 7 Possible Warning Messages at Start Up MESSAGE MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The instruments A D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated AZERO WRN XXX X MV The reading taken during the auto zero cycle is outside of specified limits The value XXX X indicates the auto zero reading at the time of the warning BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the M6200E chassis is outside the specified limits CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to active CANNOT DYN ZE
133. x 597 mm Weight Analyzer Basic Configuration 45 165 20 5 kg w internal pump AC Power Rating 100 V 50 60 Hz 1 7 A 2 3 A surge 115 V 60 Hz 1 5 2 0 A surge 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 75 A 1 0 A surge Environmental Installation category over voltage category II Pollution degree 2 Analog Outputs Three 3 Outputs Analog Output Ranges 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V 2 20 or 4 20 mA isolated current loop All Ranges with 5 Under Over Range Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full scale voltage Status Outputs 8 Status outputs from opto isolators Control Inputs 6 Control Inputs 3 defined 3 spare Serial I O One 1 RS 232 One 1 RS 485 2 connecters in parallel Baud Rate 300 115200 Optional Ethernet Interface Certifications EN61326 1997 w A1 98 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 Class A IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 For indoor use at altitudes lt 2000m only As defined by the USEPA Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA M6200E Rev A1 17 Specifications Approvals and Warranty Model 6200E Instruction Manual 2 2 EPA Equivalency Designation The Model 6200E Analyzer is designated as Reference Method Number EQOA XXXX XXX as per 40 CFR Part 53 when operated under the following conditio
134. 0 0 Conc 0 4 5 0 ENTR EXIT This sequence causes the analyzer to prompt for the expected H2S span concentration EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous display M6200E Rev A1 165 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual Step Three Perform the calibration or calibration check according to the following flow chart SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Scroll the display to the H2S SAMPLE H2S STB XXX X PPB XXX X STE testiunction This tunction calculates the stability of the H2S measurements lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ SETUP ACTION Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several Analyzer enters ZERO CAL mode 1 ZERO CAL M XXX X minutes lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT XXX X EXIT returns the unit to v SAMPLE mode without changing the calibration values y Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP The value of H2S STB may jump significantly Wait until it falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes Analyzer enters S
135. 0 1 Table B 1 6200 Spare Parts List PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION NOTES 000940100 Orifice 3 mil 60 cc IZS 000940800 Orifice 12 mil 650 cc Rx Cell 002690000 Lens UV 002 039700 002700000 Lens PMT 002 039800 002720000 PMT Optical Filter 002 035300 003290000 Thermistor Assembly 885 071600 003690000 Filter TFE 37 mm Qty 100 872 006400 005960000 Activated Charcoal 6 165 008160000 M100 47 mm Filter Holder 009690000 Filter TFE 47 mm Qty 100 009690100 Filter TFE 47 mm Qty 25 013390000 Kicker Assembly M100A 013400000 PMT H S 013420000 Rotary Solenoid Assembly Shutter Solenoid 013570000 Thermistor Assembly Cooler 014080100 Assembly High Voltage Power Supply 014400000 Zero Air Scrubber for IZS 014610000 Cooler Assembly 024180000 CD UV Filter 214 NM 024710000 Tubing 6 1 8 CLR 024720000 Tubing 6 1 8 BLK 024750000 Tubing 6 1 4 TYGON 040300100 115V Configuration Plug 041510100 PRESS FLOW SEN 041520200 Module Relay PCA amp Power Supply 041660000 PCA UV Lamp Power Supply 041800100 PCA PMT Preamp M6200E 042410200 Internal Pump Assy 045570000 UV Lamp Assy M6200E CH0000017 SOX Scrubber Material FLO000001 Sintered Filter 002 024900 FLO000003 Filter DFU 036 040180 M6200E Rev A1 301 APPENDI X B M6200E Spare Parts List Model 6200E Instruction Manual PART NU
136. 0 PPB XXX X DHCP ON lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SET gt EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 C Continue pressing SET UNTIL 8 1 8 ENTR HOSTNAME 101E v SETUP X SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU EDIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT HOSTNAME M 101E 55 Y SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU CH CH INS DEL 2 ENTR EXIT COMM EXIT A Use these keys See Table 6 19 to edit HOSTNAME SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU HOSTNAME 101E FIELD1 ID INET EXIT EXIT ENG INET 0 2 INITIALIZING INET 100 y INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED y SETUPX X COMMUNICATIONS MENU Contact your IT Network Administrator ID INET EXIT 112 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 17 Internet Configuration Keypad Functions KEY FUNCTION Moves the cursor one character to the left Moves the cursor one character to the right Inserts a character before the cursor location Deletes a character at the cursor location Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion 0 9 A Z space amp _ 4 lt gt Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu Some keys only appear as needed 6 10 7 M
137. 00E Model 6200E Instruction Manual 304 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX D ELECTRONI C SCHEMATI CS APPENDIX D ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS Table D 1 List of Electronic Schematics Document Document Title 03956 PCA 03955 Relay Driver 04002 PCA 04003 Pressure Flow Sensor Board 04070 PCA 04069 Motherboard 04181 PCA 04180 PMT Preamp 04259 PCA 04258 Keyboard Display Interface 04420 PCA 04120 UV Detector Preamp 04693 PCA 04692 UV Lamp Driver 04932 PCA Thermo Electric Cooler Board 04468 PCA 04467 Analog Output Res M6200E Rev Al 305 APPENDIX D ELECTRONI C SCHEMATI CS Model 6200E Instruction Manual User Notes 306 M6200E Rev A1
138. 1 open Spare Rear board primary MUX analog inputs PMT_SIGNAL HVPS_VOLTAGE PMT detector HV power supply output PMT_TEMP PMT temperature UVLAMP_SIGNAL UV lamp intensity Temperature MUX Spare SAMPLE_PRESSURE Sample pressure TEST INPUT 8 Diagnostic test input REF 4096 MV SAMPLE FLOW VACUUM PRESSURE TEST INPUT 11 m o Ble 4 096V reference from MAX6241 Sample flow rate Vacuum pressure Diagnostic test input 12 13 Spare thermocouple input 14 DAC MUX REF GND 15 Ground reference Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs BOX TEMP Internal box temperature RCELL TEMP Sample chamber temperature IZS TEMP IZS temperature TEMP INPUT 4 0 1 2 Spare Diagnostic temperature input 294 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 4 M6200E Signal I O Definitions Revision A 1 SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL DESCRIPTION NUMBER Diagnostic temperature input TEMP INPUT 6 6 Diagnostic temperature input 7 Spare Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs DAC CHAN O 0 DAC channel 0 loopback DAC CHAN 1 1 DAC channel 1 loopback DAC CHAN 2 DAC CHAN 3 CONC OUT 1 CONC OUT 2 TEST OUTPUT DAC channel 2 loopback DAC channel 3 loopback Rear board analog outputs Concentration output 1 Concentration output 2 N Test measurement output w Spare Option
139. 1326 1997 w A1 98 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 Class A Tested on 07 21 03 2003 at CKC Laboratories Inc Report Number CE03 021 2 3 2 Safety Compliance The Teledyne Analytical Instrument s UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer M6200E was tested and found to be fully compliant with IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 Tested on 04 04 03 2003 at CKC Laboratories Inc Report Number WO 80146 2 4 Warranty Warranty Policy 02024 Prior to shipment Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested Should equipment failure occur Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available Coverage After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated stands ready to provide on site or in plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer Non TAI Manufactured Equipment Equipment provided but not manufactured by Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturers warranty General Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorpor
140. 2 STB should be 0 5 ppb or less before proceeding M6200E Rev A1 197 Instrument Maintenance Model 6200E Instruction Manual 4 Record the stable SO concentration 5 Set the analyzer to H2S measurement mode see Section 6 8 1 6 Supply a gas with a known concentration of H2S equal to that of the SO gas used in steps 2 4 above to the sample gas inlet of the analyzer 7 Wait until the analyzer s SO concentration measurement stabilizes This can be determined by setting the analyzer s display to show the H2S STB test function see Section 6 2 1 H2S STB should be 0 5 ppb or less before proceeding 8 Record the stable H2S concentration 9 Divide the H2S concentration by the SO concentration EXAMPLE If the SO and H2S concentration of the two test gases used is 500 ppb Measured SO concentration 499 1 ppb Measured H2S concentration 490 3 ppb Converter Efficiency 490 3 499 1 Converter Efficiency 0 982 98 2 10 It is recommended that the H2S gt SO converter catalyst material be replaced if the converter efficiency falls below 96 or whatever efficiency rating is specified by local regulatory requirements 9 3 5 3 Changing the H2S SO Converter Catalyst Material The H S gt SO converter is located in the center of the instrument see Figure 3 9 for location and 9 3 for the assembly The converter is designed for replacement of the cartridge only the heater with built in thermocouple can be reused
141. 2 2 5 Status Reporting Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS 232 interface the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode Section 6 10 8 Table 6 18 Status reports include iDAS data when reporting is enabled warning messages calibration and diagnostic status messages Refer to Appendix A 3 for a list of the possible messages and this section for information on controlling the instrument through the RS 232 interface General Message Format All messages from the instrument including those in response to a command line request are in the format X DDD HH MM Id MESSAGE lt CRLF gt Where X is a command type designator a single character indicating the message type as shown in the Table 6 25 DDD HH MM is the time stamp the date and time when the message was issued It consists of the Day of year DDD as a number from 1 to 366 the hour of the day HH as a number from 00 to 23 and the minute MM as a number from 00 to 59 ID is the analyzer ID a number with 1 to 4 digits MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages test measurements iDAS reports variable values etc 144 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions CRLF is a carriage
142. 200E Instruction Manual 10 4 Electronic Operation ETHERNET Or I O OPTION Analog Outputs AI COMMB COMMA Female Male A2 Control Inputs A3 A4 Status outputs Analog External Outputs Digital 1 0 D A PC 104 CPU Card Power Up A D Circuit Eyen Disk On Box Chip Temp MOTHER BOARD Flash Chip PC 104 Bus Q Thermistor Internal Analog PUMP Interface Digitall o Sensor Inputs IC Bus Externally Powered SAMPLE d Pneumatic CHAMBER E i Sensor Status TEMPERATURE 5 d y 5 E Board Keybd LED AL s amp 8 Sample RELAY IZS PERM TUBE o 8 5 E He Display BOARD 1 HJO uf x ensor TEMPERATURE ole al ul 1 215 Sample Flow FL Sensor Shutter Elo tfal Sample Chamber EJE z olo Heater control al a amp UV Reference 5 5 Detector p 1 Sample Cal IZSOption Valve PMT Permeation Option 1 Tube Heater AE Sensor hv gt li PMT TEC Drive IZS Valve 0 Option PREAMP PCA m agers B verter 3 C PMT i Heater H2S gt SO H2S gt SO2 CONVERTER Valve PMT TEC TEMPERATURE SENSOR Figure 10 10 M6200E Elect
143. 200E Rev A1 51 Optional Hardware and Software Model 6200E Instruction Manual 5 5 Multigas Measurement Option option 82 When installed and operating the multigas measurement option allows the instrument to be configured so that it can measure either or both H2S or SO A valve directs the sample gas stream through alternate gas paths that all allowing the analyzer to measure either H2S or ambient SO When the multigas option is activated this option the instrument may be used in one of three gas measurement modes Table 5 3 H S SO Switching Valve Operating States GAS DESCRIPTION MODE The sample gas stream is stripped of any ambient SO by a special H S chemical scrubber then passed through a catalytic converter that 2 changes the H5S present into SO which is then measured using the UV Fluorescence method so The sample gas stream bypasses the SO Scrubber and catalytic 2 converter allowing the only ambient SO to be measured H S SO The switching valve alternates the gas stream between the two paths 2 at regular intervals allowing the instrument to measure both gases See Sections 6 8 1 and 10 3 2 for more information 5 6 Communication Options 5 6 1 RS232 Modem Cable Option 60 This option consists of a cable to connect the analyzer s COM1 port to a computer a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a DB 9 male connector The cable is terminat
144. 27 Fo SETUP SET SET EDIT PRINT Press SET key until Y SETUP RS 232 REPORT OFF SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu SETUP X X RS 232 REPORT OFF EXIT ignores the new setting Toggle key to turn and returns to the previous reporting ON or OFF lt 4 ENTR EXIT menu 6 11 2 8 Compact Report When enabled this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS 232 reports Instead of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line up to five parameters are reported in one line instead 6 11 2 9 Starting Date This option allows to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date If the Starting Date is in the past the iDAS ignores this setting 134 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 11 2 10 Disabling Enabling Data Channels Data channels can be temporarily disabled which can reduce the read write wear on the disk on chip The ALL 01 channel of the M6200E for example is disabled by default To disable a data channel follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu 1 0 ATIMER 2 4032 R Exits to the main PREV NEXT INS D
145. 3 Dilution Ratio Option The dilution ration feature is a software option that is designed for applications where the sample gas is diluted before being analyzed by the Model 6200E Typically this occurs in continuous emission monitoring CEM applications where the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas 56 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software Once the degree of dilution is known this feature allows the user to add an appropriate scaling factor to the analyzer s CO concentration calculation so that the measurement range and concentration values displayed on the instrument s front panel display and reported via the analog and serial outputs reflect the undiluted values Contact Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service personnel for information on activating this feature Instructions for using the dilution ratio option can be found in Section 6 7 8 User Notes M6200E Rev A1 57 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS To assist in navigating the analyzer s software a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A 1 of this manual NOTES The flow charts appearing in this section contain typical representations of the analyzer s display during the various operations being described These representations may differ slightly from the
146. 3 6 M6200E Rev A1 247 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual 11 3 2 No Response If the instrument shows no response display value is near zero even though sample gas is supplied properly and the instrument seems to perform correctly e Confirm response by supplying H2S span gas of about 80 of the range value to the analyzer e Check the sample flow rate for proper value e Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module e Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu see Section 6 9 6 If this test produces a concentration reading the analyzer s electronic signal path is working e Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu see Section 6 9 5 If this test results in a concentration signal then the PMT sensor and the electronic signal path are operating properly If the M6200E passes both ETEST and OTEST the instrument is capable of detecting light and processing the signal to produce a reading Therefore the problem must be in the pneumatics optics or the UV lamp lamp driver 11 3 3 Unstable Zero and Span Leaks in the M6200E or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most common source of unstable and non repeatable concentration readings e Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 5 1 Consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the M6200E such a
147. 3 Extends warranty to cover a five 5 year period from the date of purchase 5 9 Special Software Features 5 9 1 Maintenance Mode Switch Teledyne Analytical Instruments analyzers are equipped with a switch that places the instrument in maintenance mode When present the switch is accessed by opening the hinged front panel and is located on the rearward facing side of the display keyboard driver PCA on the left side near the particulate filter When in maintenance mode the instrument ignores all commands received via the COMM ports that alter the operation state of the instrument This includes all calibration commands diagnostic menu commands and the reset instrument command The instrument continues to measure concentration and send data when requested This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to multidrop or Hessen protocol networks 5 9 2 Second Language Switch Teledyne Analytical Instruments analyzers are equipped with a switch that activates an alternate set of display messages in a language other than the instrument s default language This switch is accessed by opening the hinged front panel and is located on the rearward facing side of the display keyboard driver PCA on the right side To activate this feature the instrument must also have a specially programmed Disk on Chip containing the second language Contact Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service personnel for more information 5 9
148. 4 digit number 2 Remove the top cover see Section 3 1 of the analyzer and locate JP2 on the multidrop PCA see Figure 6 12 3 Make sure that the jumpers are in place connection pins 9 10 and 11 12 4 Ifthe analyzer is to be the last instrument on the chain make sure a jumper is in place connecting pins 21 22 5 If you are adding an analyzer to the end of an already existing chain don t forget to remove JP2 pins 21 lt gt 22 on the multidrop PCA on the analyzer that was previous the last instrument in the chain 6 Close the instrument 7 Using straight through DB9 male gt DB9 Female cables interconnect the host and the analyzers as shown in Figure 6 13 NOTE Teledyne Analytical Instruments recommends setting up the first link between the Host and the first analyzer and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain 114 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions KEY Female DB9 RS 232 port Male DB9 Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 Make Sure Jumper between JP2 pins 21 lt gt 22 is installed Figure 6 13 RS232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect Diagram M6200E Rev A1 115 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 10 8 COM Port Communication Modes Each of the analyzer s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes which are listed
149. 5 1 5 2 4 80 5 25 PS1 15 AGND 3 15 4 13 5 16 0 PS1 15 AGND 3 15V 5 14 0 16 0 PS1 AGND AGND 3 DGND 1 0 05 0 05 PS1 Chassis DGND 1 Chassis N A 0 05 0 05 PS2 12 12V Ret 6 12V 7 11 8 12 5 PS2 DGND 12V Ret 6 DGND 1 0 05 0 05 11 5 5 I C Bus Operation of the bus can be verified by observing the behavior of the LED labeled D1 on the relay board in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly and the wiring from the motherboard to the keyboard as well as from the keyboard to the relay board is intact the I C bus is operating properly if e D1 on the relay board is flashing or e D1 is not flashing but pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display If the display is locked up or if the analyzer is not booting up at all the IC bus may be the cause Contact customer service if you suspect a problem with the I C bus 11 5 6 Keyboard Display Interface The front panel keyboard the display and the keyboard display circuit board can be verified by observing the operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly ww e The vacuum fluorescent display is working properly if on power up a character is visible on the upper left hand corner of the display e
150. 96 4096 mV reference REF_4096_MV mV M6200E Rev A 1 297 APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators Revision A 1 Table A 7 Terminal Command Designators Revision A 1 COMMAND ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX DESCRIPTION ID Display help screen and commands list LOGON ID password Establish connection to instrument LOGOFF ID Terminate connection to instrument SET ALL name hexmask Display test s T ID LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print test s to screen name Print single test CLEAR ALL name hexmask Disable test s SET ALL name hexmask Display warning s W 1D LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print warning s name Clear single warning CLEAR ALL name hexmask Clear warning s ZERO LOWSPAN SPAN 1 2 Enter calibration mode ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence C ID COMPUTE ZERO SPAN Compute new slope offset EXIT Exit calibration mode ABORT Abort calibration sequence LIST Print all I O signals name value Examine or set I O signal LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests ENTER name Execute diagnostic test EXIT Exit diagnostic test RESET DATA CONFIG exitcode Reset instrument D ID PRINT name SCRIPT Print iDAS configuration RECORDS name Print number of iDAS records REPORT name RECORDS nu
151. AG FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT PREV ENTR EXIT 6 9 2 Signal I O The signal I O diagnostic mode allows to review and change the digital and analog input output functions of the analyzer See Appendix A 4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu NOTE Any changes of signal I O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I O menu is exited Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration which remain as entered when exiting 82 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To enter the signal I O test mode press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DIAG SIGNAL 1 0 Use the NEXT amp PREV keys to move between TST TST gt CAL SETUP PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT signal types SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DIAG 1 0 EXT_ZERO_CAL OFF Use the JUMP key to godirectly toa specific signal 8 1 8 ENTR PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT See Appendix 4 for pM retums a complete list of o neman available SIGNALS SAMPLE display EXAMPLE SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG 1 0 JuMP To 12 EXAMPLE CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 1 2 ENTR EXIT Enter 12 to Jump to 12 ST CONC VALID SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG 1 0 ST_CONC_VALID ON Exit to return N v to the DIAG
152. ASSIS KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP l MOLYBDENUM l CONVERTER PUMP SAMPLE GAS ui 1 INLET J I L ER Gas Flow when multigas version of EXHAUST GAS 6200E analyzer is measuring SO OUTLET l EXHAUST TO OUTER 1 KICKER E UM SAMPLE eal i l SPAN GAS INLET sim CHAMBER CONTROL I E ASSY I 1 ZERO AIR INLET EM g PMT l 2 5 L amp a EM z ul I Figure 10 7 M6200E Gas Flow and Location of Critical Flow Orifice 10 3 2 Multigas Measurement amp H S SO Switching Valve When installed and operating the multigas measurement option allows the instrument to be configured so that it can measure either or both H2S or SO A Teflon switching valve activated under CPU control via the buss and the relay board directs the sample gas stream through the so2scrubber and H2S gt SO converter H S measurement mode or directly to the sample chamber bypassing the H2S gt SO converter allowing the analyzer to measure SO When the multigas option Option 82 is activated this valve switches back and forth allowing the analyzer to measure both SO and H5S see Section 5 5 The cycle for this operation is M6200E Rev A1 213 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 10 1 M6200E Multigas Valve Cycle Phases Gas Mode H S gt SO Valve Status Default Activity Time Setti
153. Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp COM2 in RS 232 mode M6200E Rev A1 103 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10 pin connectors on the CPU card CN3 COM1 and CN4 COM2 CN3 amp CN4 Located on CPU card RXD GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 6 8 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp COM2 in RS 232 mode Teledyne Analytical Instruments offers two mating cables one of which should be applicable for your use e Part number WROOO0077 a DB 9 female to DB 9 female cable 6 feet long Allows connection of COM1 with the serial port of most personal computers Also available as Option 60 Section 5 6 1 e Part number WR000024 a DB 9 female to DB 25 male cable Allows connection to the most common styles of modems e g Hayes compatible and code activated switches Both cables are configured with straight through wiring and should require no additional adapters To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem there are activity indicators just above the COM1 port Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem both the red and green LEDs should be on If the lights for COM 1 are not lit use small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes see Section 6 10 5 If both LEDs are still not illuminated ch
154. COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be captured with a computer or other output device 6 9 3 Analog Output Step Test This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0 to 100 of the full scale range in 2096 increments This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging recording devices attached to the analyzer To begin the Analog Output Step Test press Y SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DIAG SIGNAL 1 0 lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP NEXT ENTR EXIT UY SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT 8 1 8 ENTR PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUPX X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT pou analog output step test CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 0 EXIT 096 10096 Y Exit Exit SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT returns to the DIAG menu gt COMM VARS DIAG EXIT T 4 EXIT Pressing the key under 0 while performing the test will pause the test at that level Brackets will appear around the value example 20 Pressing the same key again will resume the test M6200E Rev A1 83 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 9 4 Analog I O Configuration
155. Configuration Table 3 8 H2S SO Switching Valve Operating States GAS CONDITION OF H2S SO SWITCHING VALVE VALVE PORT MODE CONNECTION FIG 5 2 H2S Open to SO Scrubber and Molybdenum Converter 223 so Open to directly to Sample Chamber Bypasses SO 251 2 Scrubber and Molybdenum Converter H2S SO Switches between above two states every 10 minutes M6200E Rev A1 37 Getting Started Model 6200E Instruction Manual 3 3 Initial Calibration 3 3 1 Basic Calibration Procedure The following three step procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any of the available zero span Z S or IZS valve options installed Chapter 7 contains instructions for calibrating instruments with valve options The initial calibration should be carried out with the analyzer s reporting range for SINGLE range mode with a range span of 500 PPB factory default settings for most units This will enable you to compare your results to the factory calibration STEP ONE Set verify the analog output reporting range of the M6200E SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUPXX W CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT EXIT Press this button to set Press this button to select the the analyzer for SNGL gt concentration
156. EL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition PC SETUP X X menu SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT Press SET key until Y SETUP X X CHANNEL ENABLE ON SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new setting SETUP X X CHANNEL ENABLE ON and returns to the previous Toggle key to turn menu channel ON or OFF OFF ENTR EXIT M6200E Rev A1 135 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 11 2 11 HOLDOFF Feature The iDAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and during the DAS HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS Section 6 8 To enable or disable the HOLDOFF follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 ATIMER 2 4032 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT PC SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT C Press SET key until D SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF ON SET gt S PRINT EXIT SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF ON Toggle key to turn HOLDOFF ON or OFF ON ENTR EXIT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous m
157. ER SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET SPAN GAS INLET ZERO AIR INLET ZERO SPAN VALVE Figure 5 2 Scrubber gt Gas Flow when multigas version of Tj duuuuuuuuuuuunauuuuuuuH M6200E analyzer is measuring SO28 EXHAUST TO OUTER LAYER OF KICKER SAMPLE CHAMBER HYDROCARBON REACTION CELL PURGE SAMPLE SCRUBBER PRESSURE KICKER QO SENSOR SAMPLE CAL VALVE FLOW SENSOR FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR PCA Pneumatic Diagram of the M6200E With Z S Option Installed M6200E Rev A1 47 Optional Hardware and Software Model 6200E Instruction Manual The following table describes the state of each valve during the analyzer s various operational modes Table 5 1 Zero Span Valve Operating States MODE VALVE CONDITION VALVE PORT CONNECTION FIG 5 2 Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet 322 SAMPLE Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span inlet 122 ZERO CAL Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span inlet 122 SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to SPAN GAS inlet 122 The state of the zero span valves can also be controlled e Manually from the analyzer s front panel by using the SIGNAL I O controls located under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 e activating the instrument s AutoCal feature Section 7 9 e
158. Euh re tues 5 229 10 4 12 External Digital I O eco ered de mnn 230 10 413 TC Data BUS 230 10 4 14 Power up Circuit 0 0 cece eee Henn 230 10 5 Power Supply Circuit Breaker 230 10 6 Communications Interface 231 10 6 1 Front Panel Interface rere tance cna oii dates Gab La ELT Use KU eeu ea te we REED IAE 232 10 6 1 1 Analyzer Status LED S ico eg denne sete ite dealers 233 10 6 1 2 Keyboard 233 10 6 1 3 Display 233 10 6 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface Electronics n 234 10 7 Software Operation e235 10 7 1 Adaptive Filter Hmm 236 10 7 2 Calibration Slope and 236 10 7 3 Temperature and Pressure Compensation TPC Feature 237 10 7 4 Internal Data Acquisition System iDAS TRIS 238 11 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR nnn 239 11 1 General Troubleshooting 239 11 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with Warning Messages 240 11 1 2 Fault Diagnosis with Test 242 11 1 3 Using the Diagnostic Signal I O
159. FL Sample Flow cm3 min he flow rate of the sample gas through the sample chamber This cc m value is not measured but calculated from the sample pressure PMT PMT Signal mV The raw output voltage of the PMT NORM NORMALIZED mV The output voltage of the PMT after normalization for auto zero offset PMT PMT Signal and temperature pressure compensation if activated UV LAMP Source id mV The output voltage of the UV reference detector Lamp Intensity The current output of the UV reference detector divided by the RATIO is reading stored in the CPU s memory from the last time a UV Lamp amp Tauo calibration was performed The offset due to stray light recorded by the CPU during the last zero STR LGT Stray Light ppb point calibration performed The PMT output reading recorded the last time the UV source lamp DRICPMT Dark PMT mv shutter was closed Dark UV The UV reference detectort output reading recorded the last time the DRK LMP Source Lamp mV UV source lamp shutter was closed H2S H2S The sensitivity of the instrument as calculated during the last SLOPE measurement calibration activity The slope parameter is used to set the span Slope calibration point of the analyzer H2S H2S The overall offset of the instrument as calculated during the last OFFS measurement calibration activity The fffset parameter is used to set the zero point Offset of the analyzer response HVPS V The PMT high voltage power supply RCELL Sample
160. INIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased WPMT PMT DET WARNING PMT detector outside of warning limits specified by DETECTOR LIMIT variable WUVLAMP UV LAMP WARNING UV lamp reading outside of warning limits specified by DETECTOR LIMIT variable WSAMPFLOW SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by SAMP FLOW SET variable WSAMPPRESS SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of warning limits specified by SAMP PRESS SET variable WVACPRESS VACUUM PRESS WARN Vacuum pressure outside of warning limits specified by VAC PRESS SET variable WCONVTEMP CONV TEMP WARNING Converter temperature outside of warning limits specified by CONV SET variable WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by BOX SET variable WRCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP WARNING Sample chamber temperature outside of warning limits specified by RCELL SET variable WIZSTEMP IZS TEMP WARNING IZS temperature outside of warning limits specified by IZS SET variable WPMTTEMP PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits specified by PMT SET variable WDARKCAL DARK CAL WARNING Dark offset above limit specified by DARK LIMIT variable WHVPS HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits specified by HVPS SET variable WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact
161. INSTRUCTION MANUAL MODEL 6200E UV FLUORESCENCE H S ANALYZER TELEDYNE ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS 16830 Chestnut St City of Industry Ca 91748 USA Phone 626 961 9221 Phone 626 934 1500 Fax 626 961 2538 FAX 626 934 1651 Website http www teledyne ai com M6200E REV A1 2004 Teledyne Analytical Instruments 24 August 2004 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SAFETY MESSAGES Your safety and the safety of others is very important We have provided many important safety messages in this manual Please read these messages carefully A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument The definition of these symbols is described below GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Refer to the instructions for details on the specific hazard CAUTION Hot Surface Warning CAUTION Electrical Shock Hazard TECHNICIAN SYMBOL All operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only CAUTION The analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual If you use the analyzer in a manner other than that for which it was intended unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences NOTE Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the Model 6200E UV
162. IST SRM Working gas standard is Gases semi annually Sec 2 0 7 unstable and or measurement Q A Handbook method is out of control take corrective action such as obtaining new calibration gas Dilution Gas Zero air free of contaminants See Section 2 9 2 Q A Manual Return to supplier or take appropriate action with generation system Multi Point Use calibration Perform at least once every Repeat the calibration Calibration procedure in Subsec quarter or anytime a level span 2 2 Q A Handbook check indicates a discrepancy also Federal Register or after maintenance which may affect the calibration Subsec 2 5 Q A Manual 180 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration 8 1 2 Data Recording Device Either a strip chart recorder data acquisition system digital data acquisition system should be used to record the data from the Mode M6200E RS 232 port or analog outputs If analog readings are being used the response of that system should be checked against a NIST referenced voltage source or meter Data recording device should be capable of bi polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded 8 1 3 Recommended Standards for Establishing Traceability To assure data of desired quality two considerations are essential 1 the measurement process must be in statistical control at the time of the measurement and 2 the systematic errors
163. Instructions 6 12 4 Using the M6200E with a Hessen Protocol Network 6 12 4 1 General Overview of Hessen Protocol The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol in which several remote instruments are connected via a common communications channel to a host computer The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol messages They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command containing their own unique ID number The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things to obtain the status of remote instruments including the concentrations of all the gases measured and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode API s implementation supports both of these principal features The Hessen protocol is not well defined therefore while API s application is completely compatible with the protocol itself it may be different from implementations by other companies The following subsections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol network for more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne Analytical Instruments web site http www teledyne ai com manuals 6 12 4
164. K isi riS onakan eD Esna sar ranae Eaa Precisions Calibration Procedures and Checks 4 1 Precision Calibration 1 1 1 1 1 1 MOoURUNMLZ ust NNNNNN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level 1 Calibrations versus Level 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 3 8 4 8 M6200E Rev A1 5 Model 6200E Instruction Manual 8 4 2 Precision Check erii eie gsi ie rh geri dee eta ede ai vale sickle diee adparet E ale date doxes 8 5 Dynamic Multipoint Span Calibration 8 6 Special Calibration Requirements for Independent Range or Auto Range 8 7 R ferences2 ee eel ora ka ge Gunde nal ay 9 INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE 9 1 Maintenance Schedule bipes nec uper t Neu 9 2 Predictive Diagnostics 9 3 Maintenance Procedures rre Dende th rers rab ae re lind eine dete rnd dese 3 1 Changing the Sample Particulate Hmmm nemen 2 Changing the IZS Permeation Tube 3 Maintaining the SO Scrubber 3 3 1 Predicting When the SO Scrubber Should Be Replaced 3 3 2 Checking the Function of the SO Scrubber 3 3 3 Changing the SO Scrubber Material 4
165. L TIME Seconds 1 0 1 10 Dwell time before taking each sample FILT_SIZE Samples Moving average filter size FILT_ASIZE Samples Moving average filter size in adaptive mode FILT_DELTA PPB Absolute change to trigger adaptive filter FILT_PCT Percent change to trigger adaptive filter FILT_DELAY Seconds Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode FILT_ADAPT ON enables adaptive filter OFF disables it DIL_FACTOR Dilution factor if dilution enabled with FACTORY_OPT variable USER_UNITS Concentration units for user interface Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface LAMP_CAL mV Last calibrated UV lamp reading LAMP GAIN UV lamp compensation attenuation SLOPE CONST DARK ENABLE DARK FREQ pm m 0 1 10 Minutes factor Temperature coefficient attenuation factor for pressure readings Constant to make visible slope close to 1 ON enables PMT UV dark calibration OFF disables it Dark calibration period DARK PRE DWELL Seconds 0 1 1440 1 60 Dwell time after closing dark shutter or turning off lamp or selecting preamp range DARK POST DWELL Seconds Dwell time after opening dark shutter or turning on lamp DARK SAMPLES Samples Number of dark samples to average DARK FSIZE Samples Dark offset moving average filter size DARK LIMIT mV 200 Maximum dark offset allowed SO2 SPAN1 Conc 400 0 1 50000 Target SO concentration during span calibration of ra
166. LESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual output while in the diagnostic signal I O menu This is because manually changing I O outputs can invalidate the instrument reading SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SETUP MENU VARS EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O v PREV ENTR EXIT DIAG 0 EXT ZERO CAL ON v PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT If parameter is an If parameter is an output PREV NEXT JUMP input signal Signal or control DIAG 37 SAMPLE PRESSURE 6000 0 MV DIAG I O 23 ON PREV JUMP PRNT EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT Toggles parameter ON OFF y DIAG I O 23 OFF OFF PRNT EXIT Exit returns to DIAG display amp all values 4 return to software control 11 1 4 Status LEDs Figure 11 2 Example of Signal I O Function Several color coded light emitting diodes LEDs are located inside the instrument to determine if the analyzer s CPU communications bus and relay board are functioning properly 11 1 4 1 Motherboard Status Indicator Watchdog DS5 a red LED on the upper portion of the motherboard just to the right of the CPU board flashes when the CPU is running the main program After power up DS5 should
167. MBER DESCRIPTION NOTES FM0000004 Flow Meter 0 1000 cc HE0000018 Heater 50W IZS HW0000020 Spring Flow Control HW0000036 TFE Thread Tape 48 FT KITO00019 Replacement Cooler Assembly M100A M200A KITO00028 Retrofit 37mm Retaining Ring Sample Filter KITO00029 Retrofit 47mm Retaining Ring Sample Filter OP0000012 UV Detector ORO0000001 O Ring Flow Control ORO0000004 O Ring Optic Cell Cell Trap ORO0000006 O Ring Cell PMT ORO0000007 O Ring PMT Barrel Cell ORO0000015 O Ring PMT Filter ORO0000016 O Ring UV Lens ORO0000025 O Ring Zero Air Scrubber ORO0000042 O Ring Sensor Assembly ORO0000046 O Ring Permeation Oven SW0000006 Overheat SW Cell Oven VA0000033 3 Way Solenoid Valve Teflon 12V IZS 302 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Appendix C Repair Questionnaire M6200E Appendix C Repair Questionnaire M6200E Company Contact Name Phone Number Fax Number Email Site Address Can we connect to the instrument If so provide IP address or modem Model 6200E Serial Number Firmware revision The serial number can be found on the back of the instrument the firmware revision is displayed in the upper left corner of the display when pressing SETUP on the front panel Example C 3 1 List all front panel error warning messages 2 Please complete the following table Depending on options installed not all test parameters shown below may be available
168. NC OUT 1 VOLT S 4500 mV 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT 4 EXIT ignores the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting The concentration display will not change Only the voltage reading of your voltmeter will change DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 CALIBRATED YES lt SET CAL EXIT 90 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 4 4 Analog Output Offset Adjustment Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point This can be achieved in the M6200E by defining a zero offset a small voltage e g 10 of span which can be added to the signal of individual output channels by activating the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then pressing C FROM ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU D DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO v SET SET CAL EXIT Press SET gt to select the gt analog output channel to be configured Then press EDIT to continue DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V CAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT v DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V EXIT y DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 REC OFS 0 mV SET SET EDIT EXIT Pressing ENTR accepts the new sett
169. OTE Throughout this manual words printed in capital bold letters such as SETUP or ENTR represent messages as they appear on the analyzer s front panel display NOTE The flowcharts in this manual contain typical representations of the analyzer s display during the various operations being described These representations are not intended to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument User Notes M6200E Rev A1 15 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Specifications Approvals and Warranty 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS AND WARRANTY 2 1 Specifications Table 2 1 Model 6200E Basic Unit Specifications Min Max Range Physical Analog Output In 1 ppb increments from 50 ppb to 20 000 ppb independent ranges or auto ranging Measurement Units ppb ppm ug m3 mg m3 user selectable Zero Noise 0 2 ppb RMS Span Noise 0 2 ppb RMS Lower Detectable Limit 0 4 ppb RMS Zero Drift 24 hours lt 0 5 ppb Zero Drift 7 days 1 ppb Span Drift 7 Days lt 0 5 FS Linearity 1 of full scale Precision 0 5 of reading Temperature Coefficient lt 0 1 per C Voltage Coefficient lt 0 05 per V Rise Fall Time 95 in 100 sec Sample Flow Rate 650cc min 10 Temperature Range 5 400C Humidity Range 0 95 RH non condensing Dimensions H x W x D 7 x 17 x 23 5 178 mm x 432 mm
170. PAN es CAL Mode SPAN CAL XXX X lt TST TST gt SPAN CONC EXIT XXX X EXIT returns to the SAMPLE mode without changing the calibration values lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT gt Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument If either the ZERO or SPAN button fails to appear see Chapter 11 EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display for troubleshooting tips lt TST TST gt SPAN CONC EXIT 166 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 5 Manual Calibration with IZS Option The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the Model 6200E analyzer in H2S measurement mode using the IZS option The same method may be used to calibrate the M6200E analyzers configured for SO measurement but requires that an SO permeation tube be installed in the instrument instead of the standard H2S tube See Section 7 8 for instructions on calibrating analyzers configured for multigas measurement mode Under the best conditions the accuracy off the H2S effusion rate of the IZS option s permeation tube is about 5 This can be subject to significant amounts of drift as the tube ages and the amount of H2S contained in the tube is depleted Whereas this may be sufficient for calibrating instrument configured for H S measurement and for informal calibration checks of instruments measuring SO it is no
171. PECTED ACTUAL INTERPRETATION lt 1 ppb with e Pneumatic Leaks instrument amp H2S STB N A Zero Gas Car PPOs Increasing sample system zero air 6 Detector deteriorating Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system e Flow path is clogging up Slowly Check critical flow orifice amp PRES SMPPRS sample gas increasing sintered filter atmospheric Replace particulate filter changes Slowly e Developing leak in pneumatic system decreasing to vacuum developing valve failure PMT output Constant when UV within 20 of Significantly e PMT cooler failure DRICPMT DRKEMT Lamp shutter check out increasing e Shutter Failure closed value At span with Constant e Change in instrument response response Decreasing IZS Option over time i D dati f IZS tion tub ECTS conci installed day e Degradation o permeation tube Standard stable for e Drift of instrument response UV d Decreasing configuration constant Lamp output is excessively low over time concentration clean RCEL window e Flow path is clogging up Slowly Check critical flow orifice amp SAMP FL SMPFLW un tia Stable Decreasing sintered filter perauon Replace particulate filter Fluctuating eLeak in gas flow path Fluctuating UV detector wearing out or Slowly increasing UV source Filter developing pin holes Standard Stable and LAMP RATIO LAMPR Operation near 100 UV
172. RO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to active CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased DARK CAL WARNING Dark offset above limit specified indicating that too much stray light is present in the sample chamber DATA INITIALIZED iDAS data storage was erased FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits IZS TEMP WARNING On units with IZS options installed The permeation tube temperature is outside of specified limits PMT DET WARNING PMT detector output outside of operational limits PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits RCELL PRESS WARN Sample chamber pressure is outside of specified limits RCELL TEMP WARNING Sample chamber temperature is outside of specified limits REAR BOARD NOT DET The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of operational parameters SYSTEM RESET The computer was rebooted UV LAMP WARNING The UV lamp intensity measured by the reference detector reading too low or too high To v
173. RTS signal is at logic high The M6200E sets pin 7 RTS to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission e Make sure the baud rate word length and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match see Section 6 12 2 6 and Section 6 10 e Use the RS 232 test function to send w characters to the modem terminal or computer See Section 6 10 10 e Get your terminal modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer holding down the space bar is one way The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as the instrument is receiving data e Make sure that the communications software is functioning properly Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual RS 232 Manual Teledyne Analytical Instruments part number 013500000 available online at http www Teledyne ai com manuals 11 5 11 PMT Sensor The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the UV excited fluorescence of H2S It has a gain of about 500000 to 1000000 It is not possible to test the detector outside of the instrument in the field The best way to determine if the PMT is working properly is by using the optical test OTEST which is described in Section 6 9 5 The basic method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using ETEST OTEST and specific tests for other sub assemblies 258 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR 11 5 12 PMT Preamplifier Board To
174. S TRS offset for range 1 H2OFS2 or TROFS2 H S TRS offset for range 2 S2ZSC1 SO concentration for range 1 during zero span calibration just before computing new slope and offset SO concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration just before computing new slope and offset H2ZSC1 or TRZSC1 H S TRS concentration for range 1 during zero span calibration just before computing new slope and offset H2ZSC2 or TRZSC2 H S TRS concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration just before computing new slope and offset S2CNC1 SO concentration for range 1 S2cNC2 SO concentration for range 2 PPB H2CNC1 or TRCNC1 H S TRS concentration for range 1 PPB H2CNC2 or TRCNC2 H S TRS concentration for range 2 STABIL SO or H2S TRS concentration stability select with STABIL GAS variable STRLGT Stray light reading RCTEMP Reaction cell temperature IZSTMP IZS temperature PMTTMP PMT temperature CNVTMP Converter temperature SMPFLW Sample flow SMPPRS Sample pressure BOXTMP Internal box temperature HVPS High voltage power supply output Volts 8 Diagnostic test input TEST INPUT 8 TEST11 Diagnostic test input TEST INPUT 11 TEMP4 Diagnostic temperature input TEMP_INPUT_4 TEMP5 Diagnostic temperature input TEMP INPUT 5 TEMP6 Diagnostic temperature input TEMP_INPUT_6 REFGND Ground reference REF_GND mV RF40
175. SPONSE MODE GAS LIST STATUS FLAGS TYPE 1 BCC TEXT CMD SAMPLE FLOW WARNING BENCH TEMP WARNING SOURCE WARNING BOX TEMP WARNING WHEEL TEMP WARNING SAMPLE TEMP WARNING SAMPLE PRESSURE WARNING INVALID CONC INSTRUMENT OFF IN MANUAL CALIBRATION MODE IN ZERO CALIBRATION MODE IN SPAN CALIBRATION MODE UGM MGM See Table 6 27 for PPB Select from list of Flag Assignments PPM available gases see Section 6 12 4 6 GAS TYPE Set Hessen ID number for GAS ID selected gas type REPORTED see Section 6 12 4 6 1 Only appears if a valve is installed 2 Only appears when the HESSEN mode is enabled for either COM1 or COM2 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT H S 112 REPORTED SO2 111 REPORTED Figure A 7 Secondary Setup Menu HESSEN Submenu M6200 Rev A 1 281 APPENDI X A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SAMPLE 1 ENTER SETUP PASS 818 PASS DIAG COMM VARS PREV NEXT SIGNAL ANALOG ANALOG I O OPTIC ELECTRICAL LAMP PRESSURE FLOW TEST I O OUTPUT CONFIGURATION TEST TEST CALIBRATION CALIBRATION CALIBRATION CHANNEL 1 L 1 I 1 ENTR ENTR ENTR ENTR ENTR ENTR OUTPUT PREV NEXT i Start step Test Starts Test Starts Test Starts Test Starts Test Starts Test EXT ZERO CAL 1 EXT SPAN CAL
176. Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE Teflon or glass materials They should not come in contact with FEP or stainless steel materials Figures 3 6 and 3 7 show the most common configurations for gas supply and exhaust lines to the Model 6200E Analyzer Figure 3 8 shows the connections for units with valve options installed Please refer to Figure 3 2 for pneumatic connections at the rear panel and Table 3 4 for nomenclature Table 3 4 Inlet Outlet Connector Nomenclature REAR PANEL LABEL FUNCTION Connects the sample gas to the analyzer When operating the analyzer without SAMPLE i zero span option this is also the inlet for any calibration gases EXHAUST Connects the exhaust of the analyzer with the external vacuum pump On units with zero span shutoff valve options installed connect a gas line to SPAN the source of calibrated span gas here ZERO AIR On Units with zero span valve or IZS option installed this port connects the zero air gas or the zero air cartridge to the analyzer M6200E Rev A1 27 Getting Started Model 6200E I nstruction Manual Calibrated At high concen MODEL 700 Gas Source of Dilution SAMPLE Gas Calibrator Removed during with Sm Calibration MODEL 701 Zero Air Sample Generator Exhaust Span Zero Air Figure 3 6 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator RP
177. Status LED s NAME COLOR STATE DEFINITION SAMPLE Green Off Unit is not operating in sample mode iDAS is disabled On Sample Mode active Front Panel Display being updated iDAS data being stored Unit is operating in sample mode front panel display being updated iDAS hold off Blinking mode is ON iDAS disabled CAL Yellow Off Auto Cal disabled On Auto Cal enabled Blinking Unit is in calibration mode FAULT Red Off H2S warnings exist Blinking Warnings exist 10 6 1 2 Keyboard A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display see Figure 10 20 is the main method by which the user interacts with the analyzer As the software is operated labels appear on the bottom row of the display directly above each active key defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being performed Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the analyzer Note that the keys do not auto repeat In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two consecutive operations it must be released and re pressed 10 6 1 3 Display The main display of the analyzer is a vacuum fluorescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each Information is organized in the following manner see Figure 10 20 Mode Field Displays the name of the analyzer s current operating mode Message Field Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages operation data and response messages du
178. T SETUP XX PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUPXX COM BAUD RATE 19200 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUPX X SECONDARY SETUP MENU o y SETUPXX COM1 TEST PORT COMM VARS DIAG EXIT lt SET TEST EXIT SETUP X X TRANSMITTING TO COM1 Test runs EXIT returns to automatically COMM menu ya lt SET TEST x 6 11 Using the Data Acquisition System iDAS The M6200E analyzer contains a flexible and powerful internal data acquisition system iDAS that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters The iDAS of the M6200E can store up to about one million data points which can depending on individual configurations cover days weeks or months of valuable measurements The data are stored in non volatile memory and are retained even when the instrument is powered off Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs such as spreadsheet type programs The iDAS is designed to be flexible users have full control over the type length and reporting time of the data The iDAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument s front panel or its communication ports Using APICOM data can even be retrieved automatically to a remote computer for further processing The principal use of the iDAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics which can assist in identifying possible problems befo
179. T EXIT Toggles the ENTR accepts the new setting auto cal mode and returns to the previous menu ON OFF for EXIT ignores the new setting and CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V this analog returns to the previous menu output channel SET EXIT only LM Now the analog output channels should either be automatically calibrated or they should be set to manual calibration which is described next 6 9 4 3 Manual Analog Output Calibration and Voltage Adjustment For highest accuracy the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated Calibration is done through the instrument software with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals Figure 6 5 Adjustments are made using the front panel keys by setting the zero point first and then the span point Table 6 12 The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100 10 or 1 count increments Table 6 12 Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration Full Scale Zero Tolerance Span Voltage Span Tolerance 0 1 VDC 0 0005V 90 mV 0 001V 1 VDC 0 001V 900 mV 0 001V 5 VDC 0 002V 4500 mV 0 003V 10 VDC 0 004V 4500 mV 0 006 NOTE Outputs configured for 0 1V full scale should always be calibrated manually M6200E Rev A1 89 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual ANALYZER Figure 6 5 See Table 3 1 for pin assignments of Analog Out connector on the
180. TE Printed circuit assemblies PCAs are static sensitive Electro static discharges ESD too small to be felt by the human nervous system are large enough to destroy sensitive circuits Before touching PCAs read Chapter 12 of this manual and follow the procedure described there for avoiding damage to your instrument due to ESD CAUTION Never disconnect electronic circuit boards wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies while the unit is under power 4 Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and properly seated 5 Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they are firmly and properly seated M6200E Rev A1 21 Getting Started Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed These are checked on the paperwork Form 04551 accompanying the analyzer 7 Once you have determined that no shipping damage exists and the unit includes all expected hardware options remove five RED colored shipping screws from the bottom of the chassis shown in Figure 3 1 There are e Three locking down the sample chamber sensor housing assembly e Two locking down the internal pump visible from bottom of instrument Sensor Housing Shipping Screws Remove from inside of instrument Pump Shipping Screws Remove from out
181. UCCESSFUL Correct password given LOGON FAILED Password not given or incorrect 146 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions o LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL Connection terminated successfully To log on to the model 6200E analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled type LOGON 940331 940331 is the default password To change the default password use the variable RS232 PASS issued as follows V RS232 PASSZNNNNNN Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9 6 12 2 8 APICOM Remote Control Program APICOM is an easy to use yet powerful interface program that allows to access and control any of Teledyne Analytical Instruments main line of ambient and stack gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable modem or Ethernet Running APICOM a user can Establish a link from a remote location to the M6200E through direct cable connection via RS 232 modem or Ethernet View the instrument s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when standing in front of the instrument Remotely edit system parameters and set points Download view graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis Retrieve view edit save and upload iDAS configurations Check on system parameters for trouble shooting and quality control APICOM is very helpful for initial setup data analysis maintenance and trouble shooting Figure 6 16 shows an example of APICOM being used t
182. UENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS amp GLOSSARY 4 1 FAQ s The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the Model 6200E H2S Analyzer Q Why is the ZERO or SPAN key not displayed during calibration A The M6200E disables certain keys whenever the chosen value is out of range for that particular gt parameter In this case the expected span or zero value is too different from the actually measured value for the calibration process to be valid Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 or a range to more than 20 000 ppb Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR key will re appear Can I automate the calibration of my analyzer Any analyzer with zero span valve or IZS option can be automatically calibrated using the instrument s AutoCal feature However the accuracy of the IZS option s permeation tube is 5 While this may be acceptable for basic calibration checks the IZS option is not permitted as a calibration source in applications following US EPA protocols To achieve highest accuracy it is recommended to use cylinders of calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air source Teledyne Analytical Instruments offers a zero air generator Model 701 and a
183. V 0 5000 mV 0 40 in Hg A 0 1000 cm3 min 0 70 C 0 70 C 0 70 C 0 50 C 0 70 C 0 5000 V of the test channel Press ENTR to select parameter activating the test channel Press EXIT to return to the DIAG menu Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A4 100 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Once a TEST function is selected the instrument begins to report a signal on the A4 output and adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable on the display just before the TIME display 6 10 SETUP COMM Setting Up the Analyser s Communication Ports The M6200E is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel Figure 3 2 Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with issue commands to and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal By default both ports operate on the RS 232 protocol The COMI port can also be configured to operate in single or RS 232 multidrop mode option 62 See Section 5 6 2 and 6 10 7 The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS 232 operation half duplex RS 485 communication or for access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Analytical Instruments Ethernet interface card option 63 see Section 5 6 3 and 6 10 6 A code activated switch CAS can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16 send receive instruments host
184. VG MIN or MAX calculation Also the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample readings taken since the instrument was restarted M6200E Rev A1 131 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual To define the REPORT PERIOD follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 2 4032 Use the PREV and NEXT Exits to the main keys to scroll to the data PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Data Acquisition channel to be edited menu SETUP SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT m Press SET key until you reach REPORT PERIOD SETUP X X REPORT PERIOD 000 00 05 SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT REPORT PERIODD DAYS 0 0 ENTR EXIT j SETUP X X Set the number of days between reports 0 366 o o pen Press keys to set hours between reports in the format HH MM max 23 59 This is a 24 hour clock PM hours are 13 0 5 SETUP REPORT M 0 0 ENTR EXIT 9 ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new string and thru 23 midnight is 00 00 Example 2 15 PM 14 15 27 llf at any time illegal entry is selected e g days gt 366 the ENTR key will disappear from the display returns to the previous menu
185. X X HIGH RANGE 500 0 Conc dire new SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT 0 0 5 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT M6200E Rev A1 75 Operating Instructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual NOTE On analyzers with the multigas option activated see section 5 5 and Section 6 8 1 the concentration value will switch back and forth between from H2S XXX X to SO2zXXX X depending on which gas is currently being measured ALSO The analyzer will switch between the HIGH and LOW analog reporting ranges whenever the concentration level of the gas being currently measured fulfills the trigger criteria listed at the beginning of this section 6 7 7 Range Units The M6200E can display concentrations in parts per billion 10 mols per mol PPB parts per million 10 mols per mol PPM micrograms per cubic meter ug m UG or milligrams per cubic meter mg m MG Changing units affects all of the display analog outputs COM port and iDAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the analyzer s range mode To change the concentration units SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X TST TST gt CAL m SETUP M SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUPX X PRIMARY SETUP MENU M CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT EXIT returns SETUP X X RANGE Tm eR MENU to the main menu MODE SET UNIT EXIT Select the preferred SETUP X X CONC UNITS PPB concentration unit T E PPB
186. a variety of functions that are used to DIAG configure test or diagnose problems with a variety of 6 9 the analyzer s basic systems System Diagnostic Features NOTE Any changes made to a variable during one of the following procedures is not acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR Key is pressed If the EXIT key is pressed before the ENTR key the analyzer will beep alerting the user that the newly entered value has not been accepted 66 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 4 1 SETUP Mode Password Security Whenever the Model 6200E s SETUP mode is activated the instrument will prompt the user to enter a security password The default password is 818 This allows access to all of the instruments basic functions and operating modes as well as some of its more powerful diagnostic tools and variables The analyzer will automatically insert 818 into the password prompt field Simply press ENTR to proceed Other password levels exist allowing access to special diagnostic tools and variables used only for specific and rarely needed troubleshooting and adjustment procedures They may be made available as needed by Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service department 6 5 SETUP CFG Viewing the Analyzer s Configuration Information Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information This display lists the analyzer model serial nu
187. action cell temperature PID integral coefficient Reaction cell temperature PID derivative coefficient IZS_CYCLE Seconds IZS temperature control cycle period IZS_PROP 1 125 temperature PID proportional coefficient IZS INTEG IZS temperature PID integral coefficient IZS DERIV IZS temperature PID derivative coefficient HVPS SET High voltage power supply warning DETECTOR LIMIT Warnings 400 900 1000 Warnings 600 4995 limits Set point is not used UV lamp and PMT detector warning limits Set point is not used SERIAL NUMBER 00000 Any character in the allowed 000 lt to 100 characters long Unique serial number for instrument Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface DISP INTENSITY I2C RESET ENABLE HIGH MED LOW DIM ON OFF ON Front panel display intensity Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface I C bus automatic reset enable 288 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial 1 Revision A 1 SETUP VARIABLE NUMERIC UNITS DEFAULT VALUE VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION CLOCK FORMAT Any character Time of day clock format flags H M the allowed Enclose value in double quotes 9oS character set Up when setting from the RS 232 to 100 characters
188. ailures occur contact the factory e For complete failures assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact the CPU is faulty if on power on e The watchdog LED on the motherboard is not flashing e There is no activity from the primary RS 232 port COM1 on the rear panel even if ret is pressed Note that the RS 232 port has programmable baud rates from 200 to 115200 baud Since the CPU board remembers the programmed baud rate even when power is off this means that there is no default baud rate for the port when the instrument boots up the rate will be whatever it was last programmed to be In some cases configuration memory might be corrupted and the baud rate could be a random unrelated value For these reasons it is best to test all possible baud rates when performing this test See the RS 2323 Communication section below for more details regarding port configuration In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard specifically U57 the large 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board If this is true removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be invalid e If the analyzer stops during initialization the vacuum fluorescent display shows some text it is likely that the DOC the firmware or the configuration and data files have been corrupted 11 5 10 RS 232 Communication 11 5 10 1 G
189. ain adjustment potentiometer Full scale is 10 turns Connector to TEC control board HVPS Coarse Adjustment HVPS Fine Adjustment Gain Adjustment Configuration Plug Connector to Signals Connector to Power OTEST Adjustment ETEST Adjustment Connector to HVPS and PMT Figure 11 4 Pre Amplifier Board Layout Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer 12 turns clockwise to its maximum setting While feeding 400 ppb H5S or 80 range value to the analyzer and waiting until the STABIL value is below 0 5 ppb look at the front panel and scroll to the NORM PMT value This value should always be two times the span gas concentration in ppb With 400 ppb H2S the NORM PMT should show 800 mV on a properly calibrated analyzer Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting 0 Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch to its maximum setting F Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you more than 800 mV NORM PMT signal The coarse adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT signal in 100 300 mV steps Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is just above 800 mV It may be necessary to go back and forth between coarse and fine adjustments if the proper value is at the threshold of the min max coarse setting M6200E Rev A1 263 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual NOTE Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustmen
190. al M6200EH M6200EU M6200EF M6200E Rev A 1 295 APPENDIX A 5 M6200E iDAS Functions Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 5 M6200E iDAS Functions Revision A 1 Table 5 6200 DAS Trigger Events Revision A 1 NAME DESCRIPTION ATIMER Automatic timer expired EXITZR Exit zero calibration mode EXITHS Exit high span calibration mode EXITMP Exit multi point calibration mode SLPCHG Slope and offset recalculated EXITDG Exit diagnostic mode PMTDTW PMT detector warning UVLMPW UV lamp warning DRKCLW Dark calibration warning RCTMPW Reaction cell temperature warning IZTMPW IZS temperature warning PTEMPW PMT temperature warning CTEMPW 1 Converter temperature warning SFLOWW Sample flow warning SPRESW Sample pressure warning BTEMPW Box temperature warning HVPSW High voltage power supply warning 296 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX 5 M6200E iDAS Functions Revision A 1 Table A 6 M6200E iDAS Functions Revision A 1 NAME DESCRIPTION UNITS PMTDET PMT detector reading UVDET UV lamp intensity reading LAMPR UV lamp ratio of calibrated intensity PMT electrical offset DARKUV UV lamp electrical offset mV S2SLP1 SO slope for range 1 PPB mV S2SLP2 SO slope for range 2 PPB mV H2SLP1 or TRSLP1 H S TRS slope for range 1 PPB mV S20FS1 SO offset for range 1 S20FS2 SO offset for range 2 20 51 or TROFS1 H
191. an via RS 232 port Z S checks can be controlled via the RS 232 port See Section6 12 2 and Appendix A 6 of this manual for more details 8 4 Precisions Calibration Procedures and Checks Calibration must be performed with a calibrator that meets all conditions specified in Subsection 2 9 2 Q A Handbook The user should be sure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25 77 F and 760mm 29 92in Hg Make sure the calibration system can supply the range of the concentration at a sufficient flow over the whole range of concentration that will be encountered during calibration 184 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration All operational adjustments to the M6200E should be completed prior to the calibration The following software features must be set into the desired state before calibration e Single range selection See Section 6 7 4 of this manual If the instrument will be used more than one range it should be calibrated separately on each applicable range e Automatic temperature pressure compensation e Alternate units make sure ppb units are selected for EPA monitoring See Section 6 7 7 The analyzer should be calibrated on the same range for monitoring If the AUTO range mode is selected the highest of the ranges will result in the most accurate calibration and should be used 8 4 1
192. ange versus Analog Output Reporting Reporting Range Modes 4 Single Range mode SNGL Independent Range Mode IND Range Units Auto Range Mode AUTO 7 9 Dil tioniRatiO n i ven datree dae edhe Ene verde oes Sate UEes dura osu ep eee d Sante thea 6 8 SETUP VARS Using the Internal Hmmm ene nemen nene 6 8 1 Setting the Gas Measurement 6 9 SETUP DIAG Using the Diagnostics 6 9 1 Accessing the Diagnostic Features 6 9 27 Signal I O mc D 6 9 3 Analog Output Step Es 6 9 4 Analog I O Config ratiOD i iiiter rite eee dele eda r Re E anes 6 9 4 1 Analog Output Signal Type and Range Span Selection 6 9 4 2 Analog Output Calibration 6 9 4 3 Manual Analog Output Calibration and Voltage Adjustment 6 9 4 4 Analog Output Offset Adjustment 6 9 4 5 Current Loop Output Adjustment 6 9 4 6 AIN 6 9 10 Test Channel Output OPTS ut CE eec m Electrical T
193. are also caused by O rings being left out of the assembly 6 Carefully replace the analyzer cover 7 If tubing or O rings were changed carry out a leak check Section 11 5 1 User Notes 202 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation 10 THEORY OF OPERATION The M6200E UV Fluorescence H5S Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of hydrogen sulfide H5S in a sample gas drawn through the instrument It requires that sample and calibration gases be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the sample chamber where the H2S in the sample gas is converted into SO which is then exposed to ultraviolet light causing the SO to become excited SO2 As these SO2 molecules decay back into SO they fluoresce The instrument measures the amount of fluorescence to determine the amount of SO is present in the sample chamber and by inference therefore the amount of H2S present in the sample gas Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require physical adjustments to the instrument During calibration the microprocessor measures the sensor output signal when gases with known amounts of H2S at various concentrations are supplied and stores these measurements in memory The microprocessor uses these calibration values along with other performance parameters such as the PMT dark offset UV lam
194. as the following data structures 1 0 Table of Contents Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented This is a good overview of the topics covered in the manual There is also a list of tables a list of figures and a list of appendices In the electronic version of the manual clicking on a any of these table entries automatically views that section M6200E Rev A1 13 M6200E Documentation Model 6200E Instruction Manual 2 0 Specifications and Warranty This section contains a list of the analyzer s performance specifications a description of the conditions and configuration under which EPA equivalency was approved and Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated warranty statement 3 0 Getting Started A concise set of instructions for setting up installing and running your analyzer for the first time 4 0 FAQ Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the analyzer 5 0 Optional Hardware amp Software A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your analyzer 6 0 Operation Instructions This section includes step by step instructions for operating the analyzer and using its various features and functions 7 0 Calibration Procedures General information and step by step instructions for calibrating your analyzer 8 0 Instrument Maintenance Description of certain preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on you instrument t
195. ashington D C June 1975 Tel 301 975 6776 for ordering the catalog 4 Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume I Principles EPA 600 9 76 005 March 1976 User Notes M6200E Rev A1 187 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 9 INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE Predictive diagnostic functions including data acquisition failure warnings and alarms built into the analyzer allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing unnecessary preventative maintenance procedures There is however a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime Repair and troubleshooting procedures are covered in Chapter 9 and Chapter 11 of this manual 9 1 Maintenance Schedule Table 9 1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the analyzer Please note that in certain environments i e dusty very high ambient pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown NOTE A span and zero calibration check must be performed following some of the maintenance procedures listed below See Sections 7 3 7 6 and 7 9 for instructions on performing checks CAUTION Risk of electrical shock Disconnect power before performing any operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer NOTE The operat
196. at such regular intervals which can be instantaneous or averaged e EXITZR EXITSP SLPCHG exit zero exit span slope change Sampling at the end of irregularly occurring calibrations or when the response slope changes These triggering events create instantaneous data points e g for the new slope and offset concentration response values at the end of a calibration Zero and slope values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated e WARNINGS Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears This is helpful for trouble shooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred 6 11 2 Default iDAS Channels A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer s software for logging H2S concentration and certain predictive diagnostic data These default channels include but are not limited to CONC Samples H2S concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every hour with a time and date stamp Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data By default the last 800 hourly averages are stored 122 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions PNUMTC Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five minute intervals and stores an average once a day with a time and date stamp This data is useful for monitoring the condition of the pump and critical flow orifi
197. ate the EEPROM chip in the left most socket of the CPU board The chip is square with one corner cut off the socket is shaped accordingly Remove the old chip by using a special tool or gently pry the chip out using a very fine screwdriver Make sure not to bend or destroy any of the contacts of the socket 3 Reinstall the new or additional EEPROM chip making sure the cut off edge matches that of the socket Press the chip symmetrically and straight all the way in 4 Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine 11 6 3 Factory Cal PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration The sensor module hardware calibration adjusts the slope of the PMT output when the Instruments slope and offset values are outside of the acceptable range and all other more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated 1 Setthe instrument reporting range to SNGL Section 6 7 4 2 Perform a full zero calibration using zero air Section 7 2 7 4 7 4 or 7 8 3 Let the instrument run for one hour to stabilize the lamp and run a lamp calibration from the diagnostic menu This is required to ensure proper scaling of the NORM PMT value 262 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR 4 5 10 Locate the Preamp board Figure 3 9 Locate the Following Components On the Preamp board Figure 11 4 e HVPS coarse adjustment switch Range 0 9 then A F e HVPS fine adjustment switch Range 0 9 then A F e G
198. ated warrants each product manufactured by Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of delivery All replacement parts and repairs are warranted for 90 days after the purchase If a product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated shall correct such defect by in Teledyne Analytical Instruments discretion repairing or replacing such defective product or refunding the purchase price of such product M6200E Rev A1 19 Specifications Approvals and Warranty Model 6200E Instruction Manual The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any product i that has been altered or subjected to misuse negligence or accident or ii that has been used in any manner other than in accordance with the instruction provided by Teledyne Analytical Instruments Incorporated or iii not properly maintained THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN TELEDYNE ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS INCORPORATED SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL
199. bleed away 3 Only open any anti ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the work station e Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface e Before opening the container wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the container to be bled away by the work station s grounded protective mat 270 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 4 Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive Device e Only lay tools or ESD sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation Never lay them down on a non ESD preventative surfaces Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti static storage bags or bins and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the work bench 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack To Bench and Back When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Analytical Instruments analyzer to a Anti ESD workbench or back 1 2 Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and work station Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in a anti ESD bag or bin Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipat
200. can be done automatically or manually for each channel see Sections 6 9 4 2 and 6 9 4 3 Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal if required Section 6 9 4 4 In its standard configuration the analyzer s outputs can be set for the following DC voltages Each range is usable from 5 to 5 of the nominal range Table 6 9 Analog Output Voltage Ranges RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 0 1V 5 mV 105 mV 0 1V 0 05 V 1 05 V 0 5 V 0 25 V 5 25 V 0 10 V 0 5 V 10 5 V The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC 84 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions The following DC current output limits apply to the current loop modules Table 6 10 Analog Output Current Loop Range RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 20 mA 0 mA 20 mA These are the physical limits of the current loop modules typical applications use 2 20 or 4 20 mA for the lower and upper limits Please specify desired range when ordering this option The default offset for all ranges is 0 mA Pin assignments for the output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are shown in Table 6 11 ANALOG OUT A1 A2 A3 A4 Table 6 11 Analog Output Pin Assignments PIN ANALOG VOLTAGE CURRENT OUTPUT SIGNAL SIGNAL 1 1 V Out I Out 2 Ground I Out 3 V Out I Out A2 i 4 Ground I Out 5 A3 Not Used Not Used
201. can be stored in non volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs The iDAS has a consistent user interface in all Teledyne Analytical Instruments New data parameters and triggering events can be added to the instrument as needed Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the iDAS can store several months of data which are retained even when the instrument is powered off or a new firmware is installed The iDAS permits users to access the data through the instrument s front panel or the remote interface The latter can automatically download stored data for further processing For information on using the iDAS refer to Sections 6 11 User Notes 238 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR 11 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the analyzer CAUTION The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only CAUTION Risk of electrical shock Some operations need to be carried out with the analyzer open and running Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer Do not drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while
202. ce sample flow and the sample filter clogging indicated by a drop in sample pressure over time to predict when maintenance will be required The last 360 daily averages about 1 year are stored CALDAT Logs new slope and offset every time a zero or span calibration is performed This Data Channel also records the instrument reading just prior to performing a calibration Note this Data Channel collects data based on an event a calibration rather than a timer This Data Channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations This does not represent any specific length of time since it is dependent on how often calibrations are performed As with all Data Channels a time and date stamp is recorded for every data point logged The Channel Properties Triggering Events and Data Parameters Functions for these default channels are M6200E Rev A1 123 Operating Instructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual LIST OF CHANNELS LIST OF PARAMETERS NAME CONC EVENT ATIMER REPORT PERIOD 000 00 05 NO OF RECORDS 4032 RS 232 REPORT OFF CHANNEL ENABLED ON CAL HOLD OFF ON NAME PNUMTC EVENT ATIMER REPORT PERIOD 001 00 00 NO OF RECORDS 360 RS 232 REPORT OFF CHANNEL ENABLED ON CAL HOLD OFF OFF NAME CALDAT EVENT SLPCHG NO OF RECORDS 200 RS 232 REPORT OFF CHANNEL ENABLED ON CAL HOLD OFF OFF PARAMETER S2CONC1 MODE AVG PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER S2CONC1 MODE AVG PRECISION 1
203. ch status bit will be triggered if any of the assigned flags is active 154 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB TST gt CAL XXX X ETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU aoa EXIT SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM2 EXIT Repeat pressing SET until SETUP X HESSEN STATUS FLAGS SET EDIT EXIT y PMT DET WARNING 0002 SETUP X PREV NEXT EDIT Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired message flag is displayed See Table 6 27 For xxample aT ort SETUP X SYSTEM RESET 0000 PREV NEXT EDIT EXIT The CH and SETUP X SYSTEM RESET 0 000 CH keys move the cursor left and right along CH CH gt 0 ENTR EXI the bit string Note Values of A F can also be set but are meaningless M6200E Rev A1 Press the key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 ENTR key accepts the new settings EXIT key ignores the new settings 155 Operating Instructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 12 4 8 Instrument ID Code Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a un
204. change or edit these settings press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X KEY FUNCTION lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP lt PREV Moves to next gas entry in list NEXT gt Moves the cursor previous gas entry in list SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 INS Inserts a new gas entry into the list DEL Deletes the gt gt gt gt gt 8 1 8 ENTR ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU PEG DAS DNOEIPASS GU MORE EAT SETUPX X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 SET EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU v Y COMM EXIT SETUP X X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD Y SET EXIT SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM2 EXIT SETUP HESSEN GAS LIST SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X 502 111 REPORTED Use the PREV amp NEXT keys to cycle NEXT gt INS EDIT existing entries in Hessen gas list L SETUP X X GAS TYPE 502 Use the PREV amp NEXT keys to cycle NEXT EXIT between the SO2 amp H2S LS Y ENTR key SETUP X X GAS ID 111 accepts the new settings 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT key ignores Use the PREV amp NEXT keys to cycle the new settings between the SO2 amp H2S SETUP X X REPORTED ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to switch reporting i Between ON and OFF pd
205. channels Each data channel has several properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user to make operational decisions regarding the channel Table 6 20 120 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 20 iDAS Data Channel Properties PROPERTY DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SETTING RANGE NAME The name of the data channel NONE Up to 6 letters and digits more with APICOM but only the first six are displayed on the front panel TRIGGERING The event that triggers the data channel to ATIMER Any allowed event EVENT measure and store its data parameters See APPENDIX 5 for a list of available triggering events NUMBER AND User configurable list of data types to be 1 Any available LIST OF recorded in any given channel See PMTDET concentration PARAMETERS APPENDIX A 5 for a list of available temperature pneumatic parameters or diagnostic parameter REPORT The amount of time between each channel 000 01 00 000 00 01 to PERIOD data point 366 23 59 Days Hours Minutes NUMBER OF The number of reports that will be stored in 100 1 to 1 million limited by RECORDS the data file Once the specified limit has available storage space been exceeded the oldest data are over written to make space for new data RS 232 Enables the analyzer to automatically report OFF OFF or ON REPORT channel values to the RS 232 ports CHANNEL Enables or disables the channel Pr
206. computer s printers dataloggers analyzers monitors calibrators etc into one communications hub Contact Teledyne Analytical Instruments sales for more information on CAS systems 6 10 1 Analyzer ID Each type of Teledyne Analytical Instruments analyzer is configured with a default ID code The default ID code for all M6200E analyzers is 101 The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to the same communications channel such as when several analyzers are on the same Ethernet LAN see Section 6 10 6 in a RS 232 multidrop chain see Section 6 10 7 oe operating over a RS 485 network see Section 6 10 4 If two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel the ID codes of one or both of the instruments needs to be changed so that they are unique to the instruments To edit the instrument s ID code press M6200E Rev A1 101 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP v SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Toggle these 0 9 keys to cycle through the available character set SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU 2 SETUP X MACHINE ID 100 ID 1 ENTR key accepts the new settings EXIT key ignores the new settings ENTR EXIT The ID can
207. cted M6200E Rev A1 71 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual e Single range SNGL mode This mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output If single range is selected see Section 6 7 4 both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same measurement span e g 0 50 ppm however their electronic signal levels may be configured differently e g 0 10 VDC vs 0 1 VDC See Section 6 9 4 1 In SO2 H2S multigas measurement mode although the two inputs are measuring different gases the two measurements scales are identical Independent range IND mode This mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement spans see Section 6 7 5 as well as separate electronic signal levels see Section 6 9 4 1 and if the instrument is equipped with the SO2 H2S multigas measurement option different gas measurements e Auto range AUTO mode As in single range mode both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same measurement span however this mode gives the analyzer the ability switch to automatically switch between the two user selected ranges High and Low This switching occurs dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates High low range status is output via the External Digital I O Status Bits see Section 6 12 1 1 To select the Analog Output Range Type press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS
208. cted to maintain accurate calibration over long periods of time Therefore it is necessary to dynamically check the calibration relationship on a predetermined schedule Zero and span checks must be used to document that the data remains within control limits These checks are also used in data reduction and validation Table 8 3 summarizes the initial quality assurance activities for calibrating equipment Table 8 2 is a matrix for the actual dynamic calibration procedure Calibrations should be carried out at the field monitoring site The Analyzer should be in operation for at least several hours preferably overnight before calibration so that it is fully warmed up and its operation has stabilized During the calibration the M6200E should be in the CAL mode and therefore sample the test atmosphere through all components used during normal ambient M6200E Rev A1 179 EPA Protocol Calibration Model 6200E Instruction Manual sampling and through as much of the ambient air inlet system as is practicable If the Instrument will be used on more than one range i e IND or AUTO ranges it should be calibrated separately on each applicable range Calibration documentation should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a central backup file Table 8 1 Activity Matrix for Calibration Equipment amp Supplies FREQUENCY AND METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Check upon receipt ACTION IF REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT MET Return equipment to supplier
209. ctor adjusted flow 2 measured flow x slope SAMP PRESS SET 29 92 Warnings 15 35 Sample pressure set point for pressure compensation and warning limits SAMP PRESS SLOPE 1 Sample pressure slope correction factor adjusted pressure measured pressure x slope CONV TYPE MOLY NONE MOLY Converter type CONV SET oc 315 0 350 Converter temperature set point and Warnings warning limits 310 320 BOX SET oc 30 5 60 Box temperature warning limits Set Warnings point is not used 8 50 PMT SET oc 7 0 40 PMT temperature set point and Warnings warning limits 2 12 M6200E Rev A 1 285 APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial 1 O Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SETUP VARIABLE RS232 MODE BAUD RATE MODEM INIT NUMERIC UNITS BitFlag DEFAULT VALUE VALUE RANGE 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Any character in the allowed character set Up to 100 characters long DESCRIPTION RS 232 COM1 mode flags Add values to combine flags 1 quiet mode 2 computer mode 4 enable security 16 enable Hessen protocol 32 enable multi drop 64 enable modem 128 ignore RS 232 line errors 256 disable XON XOFF support 512 disable hardware FIFOs 1024 enable RS 485 mode 2048 even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit 4096 enable command prompt RS 232 COM1 baud rate Enclose value in double
210. current conversion circuitry to the analyzer s analog outputs This option may be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs it can be installed at the factory or added later Call Teledyne Analytical Instruments sales for pricing and availability The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in 6 9 4 5 M6200E Rev A1 45 Optional Hardware and Software Model 6200E Instruction Manual Current Loop Option Installed on Analog Output A2 Figure 5 1 Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard 5 3 Particulate Filter Kit Option 42A This option includes a one year supply of 50 replacement particulate filters 47mm in diameter 1 micrometer pore size 5 4 Calibration Valves Options 5 4 1 Zero Span Valves Option 50 The Model 6200E H2S analyzer can be equipped with a zero span valve option for controlling the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources This option contains two sets of Teflon solenoid valves located inside the analyzer that allow the user to switch either zero span or sample gas to the instrument s sensor Figure 5 2 shows the internal pneumatic connections for a Model 6200E with the zero span valve option installed 46 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software I INSTRUMENT CHASSIS KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP I I MOLYBDENUM CONVERT
211. d 220 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail the analyzer will continue to operate with just the DOC However all configuration information will be lost requiring the unit to be recalibrated 10 4 2 Sensor Module amp Sample chamber Electronically the M6200E sensor module is a group of subassemblies with different tasks to detect the intensity of the light from the fluorescence reaction between H2S and O in the sample chamber to produce a current signal proportional to the intensity of the fluorescence and to control the temperature of the PMT cooler to ensure the accuracy and stability of the measurements UV Source Lamp Shutter Housing UV Source Lens amp Housing Sample Air Outlet PMT W Housing a Attaches Shutter Assy 77 hidden from view PMT Lens Housing Sample Chamber Sample Heater _ Air Inlet Sample Chamber Sample Chamber Temperature Sensor O Ring x Seal Reference Sample Chamber Detector Heater Light Trap Figure 10 12 M6200E Sample Chamber 10 4 3 Sample Chamber Heating Circuit In order to reduce temperature effects the sample chamber is maintained at a constant 50 C just above the high end of the instrument s operation temperature range Two AC heaters one embedded into the top of the sample chamber the other embedded directly below the reference detector s light trap
212. damaging it 12 4 Basic Principles of Static Control It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges It is not however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro static discharge from occurring 12 4 1 General Rules Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station Setting up an ESD safe work station need not be complicated A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti ESD workstation see figure 11 X Protective Mat Wrist Strap Ground Point Figure 12 2 Basic anti ESD Work Station 268 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge For technicians that work in the field special lightweight and portable anti ESD kits are available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear These include everything needed to create a temporary anti ESD work area anywhere Always wear an Anti ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer An anti ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels Anti ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where the
213. dditional set of AC heaters is attached to the IZS oven Some special M6200E models may have other non standard heating zones installed such as a bypass manifold 10 4 8 2 Valve Control The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips each of which can drive up four valves In its basic configuration the Model 6200E requires no special valves to operate However on units with either the zero span valve or the IZS option installed The valves are Manifold valves may also be present in certain special versions of the analyzer 226 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation 10 4 9 Status LEDs amp Watch Dog Circuitry Watchdog LED Sample Chamber IZS Option Dark Shutter 1 C Heater __50 5 valve Sample Cal Valve Permeation Tube Heater Zero Span and IZS Options Zero Span Valve Zero Span and IZS Options H2S gt 50 converter heater Figure 10 17 Relay Board Status LED Locations Thirteen LEDs are located on the analyzer s relay board to indicate the status of the analyzer s heating zones and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator Table 10 2 shows the states of these LEDs and t
214. detector wearing out Slowly Opaque oxides building up on UV decreasing source Filter e UV lamp aging Slowly PMT H2S OFFS OFSET1 During Zero Stable increasing or Failed HVPS Cal d E e Leak in sample gas flow ecreasing sede Contamination in zero gas source UV lamp aging Slowly UV detector wearing out H2S SLOPE SLOPE1 During Span Stable increasing or e Leak in Sample gas or calibration gas Cal decredsi flow path 9 Deterioration contamination of calibration gas source s Shown as they appear when analyzer is in HS mode In SO mode appear as 502 OFFS amp 502 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear 192 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 9 3 Maintenance Procedures The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard maintenance of the Model 6200E 9 3 1 Changing the Sample Particulate Filter The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt It should be replaced according to the service interval in Table 9 1 even without obvious signs of dirt Filters with 1 and 5 pore size can clog up while retaining a clean look We recommend handling the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing with gloves and tweezers Do not touch any part of the housing filter element PTFE retaining ring glass cover and the O ring with bare hands To change the filt
215. dings of sample gases with know concentrations of H5S The readings taken are adjusted linearized and compared to the expected values as input With this information the software computes values for instrument both slope and offset and stores these values in memory for use in calculating the H2S concentration of the sample gas 236 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed by pressing the following keystroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE RCELL TEMP 0 0C XXX X TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE TIME HH MM SS XXX X TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE HVPS 553 VOLTS XXX X TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE PMT TEMP 0 0C XXX X TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE H2S OFFS XX X MV XXX X TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE BOX TEMP 0 0C XXX X TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE H2S SLOPE XXX XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP NOTE Separate slope and offset values are calculated and recorded for H2S and SO2 gas measurements Here they are shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO2 mode appear as SO2 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear 10 7 3 Temperature and Pressure Compensation TPC Feature As explained previously changes in temperature can significantly effect the amount of
216. e e If you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e If you are at a anti ESD work bench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds Place the item in the container Seal the container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape Never use standard plastic adhesive tape as a sealer e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields e Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device Once you have arrived at your destination allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate e Connect your wrist strap to ground e If you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e If you are at a anti ESD work bench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds 7 Open the container M6200E Rev A1 271 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Model 6200E Instruction ManualAPPENDI X A Version Specific Software Documentation 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from and Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrof
217. e Annually Yes 9 3 7 filters Internal IZS Permeation Tube Replace Annually YES 9 3 2 Perform Annually or after pneumatic leak Verify Leak repairs involving Yes 11 5 1 Tight pneumatics At least Every 2 years Pump diaphragm Replace or if PRES is gt 33 00 Yes WT in diaphram 9 kit On PMT preamp PMT sensor Low level changes if naroware 0 7 SLOPE or Yes 11 6 3 calibration calibration SLOPE 1 3 These Items are required to maintain full warranty all other items are strongly recommended A pump rebuild kit is available from Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service including all instructions and required parts see Appendix B for part 190 04740 Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance numbers 04740 Rev A1 191 Instrument Maintenance Model 6200E Instruction Manual 9 2 Predictive Diagnostics The analyzer s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their values The current value of these functions can be viewed via the front panel recorded via the iDAS system see Section 6 11 or even downloaded via the internet from a remote location using Teledyne Analytical Instruments APICOM control software can be used to download and review this data see Section 6 12 2 8 Table 9 2 Predictive Uses for Test Functions TEST iDAS CONDITION BEHAVIOR FUNCTION FUNCTION EX
218. e Any repairs which might affect its calibration e Physical relocation of the analyzer e Any other indication including excessive zero or span drift of possible significant inaccuracy of the analyzer Following any of the activities listed above the zero and span should be checked to determine if a calibration is necessary If the analyzer zero and span drifts exceed locally established calibration M6200E Rev A1 181 EPA Protocol Calibration Model 6200E Instruction Manual units or the calibration limits in Section 2 0 9 Subsection 9 1 3 Q A Handbook a calibration should be performed Formatted Bullets and Numbering 8 1 6 Record Keeping Record keeping is a critical part of all quality assurance programs Standard forms similar to those that appear in this manual should be developed for individual programs Three things to consider in the development of record forms are e Does the form serve a necessary function e Is the documentation complete e Will the forms be filed in such a manner that they can easily be retrieved when needed 8 1 7 Summary of Quality Assurance Checks The following items should be checked on a regularly scheduled basis to assure high quality data from the M6200E See Table 8 3 for a summary of activities Also the QA Handbook should be checked for specific procedures Table 8 3 Activity Matrix FREQUENCY AND ACTION IF CHARACTERISTIC ACCEPTANCE LIMITS METHOD OF REQUIREMENTS ARE
219. e H2S concentration calculation e g pressure and temperature reading used by the temperature pressure compensation feature and as trigger events for certain warning messages and control commands issued by the CPU They are stored in the CPU s memory and in most cases can be viewed through the front panel display The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways e Through the analyzer s keyboard and vacuum fluorescent display over a clocked digital serial I O bus using the I C protocol pronounced I squared C e RS232 amp RS485 serial I O channels e Various analog voltage and current outputs and e Several digital I O channels Finally the CPU issues commands also over the I C bus to a series of relays and switches located on a separate printed circuit assembly the relay board located in the rear of the chassis on its own mounting bracket to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters that keep the sample chamber at a steady temperature and when installed the zero span and internal zero span valve sets and heaters 10 4 1 CPU The CPU is a low power 5 VDC 0 8A max high performance 386 based microcomputer running the DR DOS operating system Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification version 2 3 for embedded PC and PC AT applications It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock rate over an internal 32 bit data and address bu
220. e SIGNAL I O function If the wiring is intact but there is a difference of more than 10 mV between the measured and displayed voltage the motherboard may be faulty M6200E Rev A1 255 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual 11 5 8 2 Analog Output Voltages To verify that the analog outputs are working properly connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog output step test as described in Section 6 9 3 For each of the steps taking into account any offset that may have been programmed into the channel Section 6 9 4 4 the output should be within 1 of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 096 step which should be within 2 3 mV If one or more of the steps is outside of this range a failure of one or both D A converters and their associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely Table 11 7 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE 100MV 1v 5V 10V STEP 9 o NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 0 0 mV 0 0 0 2 20 20 mV 0 2 1 2 3 40 40 mV 0 4 2 4 4 60 60 mV 0 6 3 6 5 80 80 mV 0 8 4 8 6 100 100 mV 1 0 5 10 11 5 8 3 Status Outputs The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs wow 1 Connect a cable jumper between the pin and the V pin on the status output connector 2 Connect a 1000 Q resistor between the 5 V and the pin for the status output that is bei
221. e alarm 1 all pressures OK ST TEMP ALARM 4 0 any temperature alarm 1 all temperatures OK ST HVPS ALARM 5 0 HVPS alarm 1 HVPS OK 6 7 Spare Front panel I C keyboard default I C address 4E hex MAINT MODE 5 input 0 maintenance mode 1 normal mode LANG2_SELECT 6 input 0 select second language 1 select first language English SAMPLE LED 8 output 0 sample LED on 1 off CAL_LED 9 output 0 cal LED on 1 off FAULT_LED 10 output 0 fault LED on 1 off AUDIBLE_BEEPER 14 output 0 beeper on for diagnostic testing only 1 off Relay board digital output PCF8575 default I C address 44 hex RELAY WATCHDOG 0 Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active RCELL HEATER 1 0 sample chamber heater on 1 off M6200E Rev A 1 293 APPENDIX 4 M6200E Signal 1 Definitions Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual 1 let zero gas in LOW SPAN VALVE 0 1 let sample gas in let low span gas in SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL DESCRIPTION NUMBER CONV HEATER 2 0 converter cell heater on 1 off 2 Spare LAMP_POWER 2 3 0 turn lamp power on 1 off IZS_HEATER 4 0 IZS heater on 1 off CAL_VALVE 6 0 let cal gas in 1 let sample gas in SPAN_VALVE 7 0 let span gas in 8 9 ZERO VALVE 0 let zero gas in 1 let sample gas DARK SHUTTER 10 11 15 0 close dark shutter
222. e chamber The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments First the voltage across the electron multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two hexadecimal switches Adjusting this voltage directly affects the HVPS voltage and hence the signal from the PMT Secondly the gain of the amplified signal can further be adjusted through a potentiometer These 224 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation adjustments should only be performed when encountering problems with the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise See Section 11 6 3 for this hardware calibration O Test Control From CPU O Test Generator PMT Coarse PMT Fine Gain Set Gain Set Rotary Rotary Switch Switch D A Motherboard Converter 1 Amp to PMT Output Voltage I Converter 1 Amplifier Low Pass T Noise Filter E Test Control From CPU 1 Signal Offset PMT Temp l PMT Sensor Temperature Feedback TEC Control Circuit PCA PMT Output Signal PMT Temp Analog Signal to Motherboard Figure 10 16 PMT Preamp Block Diagram The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7 C and can be viewed as test function PMT TEMP on the front panel The electrical test ETEST circuit generates a constant electronic signal intended to simulate the output of the PMT after con
223. e orifice The result is that he flow rate of the gas is unaffected by degradations in pump efficiency due to age The critical flow orifice used in the Model 6200E is designed to provide a flow rate of 650 cm min 10 3 4 Sample Particulate Filter To remove particles in the sample gas the analyzer is equipped with a Teflon membrane filter of 47 mm diameter also referred to as the sample filter with a 1 uim pore size The filter is accessible through the front panel which folds down and should be changed according to the suggested maintenance schedule in Table 9 1 10 3 5 Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker It is very important to make sure the air supplied to sample the chamber is clear of hydrocarbons To accomplish this task the M6200E uses a single tube permeation scrubber The scrubber consists of a single tube of a specialized plastic that absorbs hydrocarbons very well This tube is located within the outer flexible plastic tube shell As gas flows through the inner tube hydrocarbons are absorbed into the membrane walls and transported through the membrane wall and into the hydrocarbon free purge gas flowing through the outer tube This process is driven by the hydrocarbon partial pressure gradient between the inner and outer tubes M6200E Rev A1 215 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual CLEAN PURGE AIR VACUUM MANIFOLD OUTER TUBE Clean Air USED PURGE AIR PUMP AND EXHAUST PORT CLEANED
224. e resulting electro static charge builds up quickly reaching significant levels Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of Styrofoam pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges M6200E Rev A1 265 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 12 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities 65 909 o 10 25 RH RH Walking across nylon carpet 1 500V 35 000V Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12 000V Worker at bench 100V 6 000V MEANS OF GENERATION Poly bag picked up from bench 1 200V 20 000V Moving around in a chair padded with urethane foam 1 509V 18 000 12 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause Damage Damage to components occurs when these static charges come in contact with an electronic device Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits melting them or even vaporizing parts of them When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component s circuitry A quick comparison of the values in Table 12 1 with the those shown in the Table 12 2 listing device susceptibility levels shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that app
225. e to use a permeation tube such as that included in the IZS valve option Span gases should be certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the analyzer Typical gas accuracy for calibrated span gases is 1 or 2 9o H2S and SO standard gases should be mixed in nitrogen 7 1 4 Permeation Tubes Teledyne Analytical Instruments offers an IZS option operating with permeation devices The accuracy of these devices is about 5 Whereas this may be sufficient for quick daily calibration checks we recommend the use of certified H2S gases for accurate calibration NOTE Applications requiring US EPA equivalency do not allow permeation devices to be used as sources of span gas for calibration of the analyzer where EPA equivalency is required such as SO2 monitoring 158 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 1 5 Calibration Gas Traceability All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology NIST To ensure NIST traceability we recommend to acquire cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials SRM These are available from a variety of commercial sources Table 7 1 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of H2S and SO Calibration Gases 4 NOMINAL NIST SRM TIPE CONCENTRATION 2730 Hydrogen sulfide 5000 ppb
226. ecify dash for flow rate OR1 O ring 04090 orifice holder OR 39 O ring Figure 9 4 Critical Flow Orifice Assembly 9 3 8 Checking for Light Leaks When re assembled or operated improperly the M6200E can develop small leaks around the PMT which let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT housing To find such light leaks follow the procedures below CAUTION this procedure can only be carried out with the analyzer running and its cover removed This procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel 1 Scroll the TEST functions to PMT 2 Supply zero gas to the analyzer 3 With the instrument still running carefully remove the analyzer cover Take extra care not to touch any of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body Do not drop screws or tools into a running analyzer Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet fitting and at all of the joints of the sample chamber as well as around the PMT housing The PMT value should not respond to the light the PMT signal should remain steady within its usually noise M6200E Rev A1 201 Instrument Maintenance Model 6200E Instruction Manual 5 Ifthere is a PMT response to the external light symmetrically tighten the sample chamber mounting screws or replace the 1 4 vacuum tubing with new black PTFE tubing this tubing will fade with time and become transparent Often light leaks
227. eck the cable for proper wiring The two LEDs located over COM2 are currently deactivated If you have problems getting COM2 to activate it may be necessary to install a null modem cable contact customer service for information 6 10 4 RS 485 Configuration of COM2 As delivered from the factory COM2 is configured for RS 232 communications This port can be re configured for operation as a non isolated half duplex RS 485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet If you require full duplex or isolated operation please contact Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service e To reconfigure COM2 as an RS 285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position see Figure 6 9 104 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions e The RS 485 port can be configured with or without a 150 termination resistor To include the resistor install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board see Figure 6 9 To configure COM2 as an un terminated RS 485 port leave JP3 open CN4 JP3 2 RS 232 CN3 CNS COM1 RS 232 COM2 RS 485 1211211111 M6117C Al 0314 TS07 XBU6092 1000F i E i at att gs Figure 6 9 CPU card Locations of RS 232 486 Switches Connectors and Jumpers M6200E Rev A1 105 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual
228. ed Initial Operation P ug BPRePREE d d d d d 1 3 P 3 3 Warning MeSSaG S EPI edie at hag 4 Functional Check ainssi snina Initial Calibration ea aaa UE 3 3 1 Basic Calibration Procedure 3 3 2 Interferences for 5 Measurements 4 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS amp GLOSSARY 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 61055 etd ag ene nis ening heed 5 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 5 1 Rack Mount Kits Options 20a 20b amp 21 5 2 Current Loop Analog Outputs Option 41 5 3 Particulate Filter Kit Option 42A 5 4 Calibration Valves Options T 5 4 1 Zero Span Valves Option 50 2 ue we rare rer ele nee a 5 4 2 Internal Zero Span Gas Generator Option 51 5 4 3 IZS Permeation Tubes Options 53 55 amp 57 5 4 4 Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit Option 43 5 5 Multigas Measurement Option option 82 5 6 Communication 5 6 1 RS232 Modem Cable Option 60 EM 576 2 RS 232 M ltidrop OptionvO62 ee ERO REN a QUEEN E PEN SOR IT SENTO A ethene 5 6 3 Ethernet Option 63 eee ge eA salar
229. ed to the keyboard display interface see Section 10 6 1 4 and finally onto the relay board 10 4 14 Power up Circuit This circuit monitors the 5V power supply during start up and sets the analog outputs external digital I O ports and I C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control 10 5 Power Supply Circuit Breaker The analyzer operates on 100 VAC 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or 60Hz Individual units are set up at the factory to accept any combination of these five attributes As illustrated in Figure 10 18 below power enters the analyzer through a standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument From there it is routed through the ON OFF switch located in the lower right corner of the front panel AC line power is converted stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies One supplies 12 VDC for various valves and valve options while a second supply provides 5 VDC and x15 VDC for logic and analog circuitry as well as the TEC cooler All AC and DC Voltages are distributed through the Relay Board 230 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation ON OFF SWITCH Chassis PMT TEC AC POWER Display Cooling Co
230. ed with two DB 9 female connectors one of which fits the analyzer s COM1 port Some older computers or code activated switches with a DB 25 serial connector will need a different cable or an appropriate adapter 5 6 2 RS 232 Multidrop Option 62 The multidrop option is used with any of the RS 232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight analyzers with the host computer over a chain of RS 232 cables via the instruments COM1 Port It is subject to the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly which is plugs into to the analyzer s CPU card see Figure 5 4 and is connected to the RS 232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument s back panel via a cable to the motherboard One option 62 is required for each analyzer along with one 6 straight through DB9 male gt DB9 Female cable P N WR0000101 Formatted Bullets and Numbering 52 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software This option can be installed in conjunction with the Ethernet option Option 63 allowing the instrument to communicate on both types of networks simultaneously For more information on using and setting up this option see Section 6 10 7 Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Multidrop Card Figure 5 4 M6200E Multidrop Card 5 6 3 Ethernet Option 63 The Ethernet option allows the analyzer to be connected to an
231. efine how the data are recorded Table 6 21 M6200E Rev A1 121 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 6 21 iDAS Data Parameter Functions FUNCTION EFFECT PARAMETER SAMPLE MODE Instrument specific parameter name INST Records instantaneous reading AVG Records average reading during reporting interval MIN Records minimum instantaneous reading during reporting interval MAX Records maximum instantaneous reading during reporting interval PRECISION Decimal precision of parameter value 0 4 STORE NUM OFF stores only the average default SAMPLES ON stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used Note that the number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for one of the parameters in that channel Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel the M6200E provides about 30 parameters However the number of parameters and channels is ultimately limited by available memory 6 11 1 3 iDAS Triggering Events Triggering events define when and how the iDAS records a measurement of any given data channel Triggering events are firmware specific and are listed in Appendix A 5 The most common triggering events are e ATIMER Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer Most trending information is usually stored
232. ence the concentration that the analyzer measures may fall short of the expected concentration defined in the CONC sub menu If the physical low level calibration has drifted changed PMT response or was accidentally altered by the user a low level calibration may be necessary to get the analyzer back into its proper range of expected values One possible indicator of this scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its allowed range 0 7 1 3 for slope 20 to 150 for offsets See Section 11 6 3 on how to carry out a low level hardware calibration 11 3 5 Inability to Zero No ZERO Key In general the M6200E will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter If the calibration menu does not show a ZERO key when carrying out a zero calibration the actual gas concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero point as per last calibration which can have several reasons Confirm that there is a good source of zero air If the IZS option is installed compare the zero reading from the IZS zero air source to an external zero air source using H2S and SO free air Check the zero air scrubber for performance It may need to be replaced Section 9 3 3 Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into the zero air line Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 5 1 11 3 6 Non Linear Response
233. eneral RS 232 Troubleshooting Teledyne Analytical Instruments analyzers use the RS 232 protocol as the standard serial communications protocol RS 232 is a versatile standard which has been used for many years but at times is difficult to configure Teledyne Analytical Instruments conforms to the standard M6200E Rev A1 257 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual pin assignments in the implementation of RS 232 Problems with RS 232 connections usually center around 4 general areas e Incorrect cabling and connectors This is the most common problem See Figure 6 8 for connector and pin out information and Section 6 10 3 e The communications baud rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly configured See Section 6 10 6 on how to set the baud rate e The COM port communications mode is set incorrectly Section 6 10 8 e If a modem is used additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed See Section 6 12 2 6 e Incorrect setting of the DTE DCE Switch is set correctly See Section 6 10 5 11 5 10 2 Modem or Terminal Operation These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Analytical Instruments analyzer e Check cables for proper connection to the modem terminal or computer e Check the correct position of the DTE DCE as described in Section 6 10 5 e Check the correct setup command Section 6 12 2 6 e Verify that the Ready to Send
234. enu 136 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 11 3 Remote iDAS Configuration Editing channels parameters and triggering events as described in this section is can be performed via the APICOM remote control program using the graphic interface shown in Figure 6 15 Refer to the next Section 6 12 for details on remote access to the M6200E analyzer M200E at T APLenglabi DAS Configuration and Downloaded Data E C CONCEO ATIMER 100 Records Maximum NXCNC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records NOCNC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records N2CNC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records STABIL PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records S E CALDAT ATIMER 100 Records Maximum O NXSLP1 AVG Set 0 0 Records O NOSLP1 AVG Set 0 0 Records O 5 1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records O NOZSC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records r Configuration p Data Bet Config Auto On Off Send Inst Get Data Load Config Graph Data Save Config Save Data E N2CNC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records xi COSTASIL PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records New Config Basic Advanced B E ENGDAT ATIMER 100 Records Maximum r Basic Settings SMPFLw cc m AVG Set 0 0 Records E Naa O O3FLOW cc m AVG Set 0 0 Records RCFRES InHg AVG Set 0 0 Records New Chan Number of Records 100 SMPPRS InHg AVG Set 0 0 Records _NewGhan
235. er ON t see Sane a T 1 C1 YES NO OFF SET SET EDIT PRNT Cycles through Selects max already active no of records t PARAMETER SAMPLE MODE PRECISION fts chanel 4 PREV NEXT INST AVG MIN MAX Cycles through available active parameters J see Section 6 12 2 4 1 Only appears if Z S valve or IZS option is installed Figure A 4 Primary Setup Menu iDAS 278 M6200 Rev A 1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual APPENDIX A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 m ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE COMM VARS DIAG Password required ID INET 1 COM2 GTWY IP SNET START STOP PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRINT MEASURE MODE DAS HOLD OFF TPC ENABLE RCELL SET IZS SET DYN ZERO DYN SPAN CONC PRECISION CLOCK ADJ SET SET EDIT MODE BAUD RATE TEST PORT PREV NEXT PREV NEXT TEST QUIET COMPUTER 300 Go To SECURITY 2400 DIAG MENU TREE HESSEN PROTOCOL Fig A 8 E 7 1 4800 Fig A 8 RS 485 9600 MULTIDROP PROTOCOL 19200 ENABLE MODEM 38400 ERROR CHECKING 57760 XON XOFF HANDSHAKE ON 115200 Only appears if Z S valve or IZS option is installed 2 Only appears on units with 125 option installed COMMAND PROMPT OFF 3 Only appears when the ENABLE INTERNET mode is enabled for either COM1 or COM2 Figure A 5 Seconda
236. er according to the service interval in Table 9 1 1 Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the sample line 2 Open the M6200E s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the filter assembly 01628 Retaining Ring 01629 Window 024310100 O Ring PTFE Notches UP PTFE Membrane Filter Element FL 19 1um FL6 5 um OR 58 Viton O Ring 03588 Bracket 03522 Body FT 8 Connector Fitting FT 8 Connector Fitting Figure 9 1 Sample Particulate Filter Assembly 3 Carefully remove the retaining ring glass window PTFE O ring and filter element 4 Replace the filter element carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder M6200E Rev A1 193 Instrument Maintenance Model 6200E Instruction Manual 5 Re install the PTFE O ring with the notches facing up the glass cover then screw on the hold down ring and hand tighten the assembly Inspect the visible seal between the edge of the glass window and the O ring to assure proper gas tightness 6 Re start the analyzer 9 3 2 Changing the IZS Permeation Tube 1 Turn off the analyzer unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Locate the IZS oven in the rear left of the analyzer 3 Remove the top layer of insulation if necessary 4 Unscrew the black aluminum cover of the IZS oven 3 screws using a medium Phillips head screw driver Leave the fittings and tubing connected to the cover 5 Remove the old permeation
237. er s inside temperature This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes through the front panel display This measurement is stored in the analyzer Memory as the test function BOX TEMP and is viewable as a test function Section 6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel 10 4 11 Analog Outputs The analyzer comes equipped with four Analog Outputs A1 A2 A4 and a fourth that is a spare A1 and A2 Outputs The first two A1 and A2 are normally set up to operate in parallel so that the same data can be sent to two different recording devices While the names imply that one should be used for sending data to a chart recorder and the other for interfacing with a datalogger either can be used for both applications Both of these channels output a signal that is proportional to the concentration of the sample gas The A1 and A2 outputs can be slaved together or set up to operated independently A variety of scaling factors are available See Section 6 7 for information on setting the reporting range type and scaling factors for these output channels Test Output The third analog output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user see Section 6 9 10 to carry the current signal level of any one of the parameters accessible through the TEST menu of the unit s software M6200E Rev A1 229 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual In its standard configuration the analyzer
238. er s interface manually See Section 6 10 6 3 NOTE Once you have completed the above set up procedures please fill out the Quality Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne Analytical Instruments This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service and our products THANK YOU 36 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started Figure 3 11 shows the internal pneumatic flow of the M6200E in its Standard configuration For information on instruments in which one of the various zero span valve options refer to Figures 5 2 and 5 3 Refer to these diagrams whenever trouble shooting or a thorough understanding of the analyzer performance are required SAMPLE GAS INLET 1 EXHAUST GAS OUTLET SPAN GAS INLET 1 ZERO AIR INLET Figure 3 11 INSTRUMENT CHASSIS MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER EXHAUST THROUGH OUTER LAYER OF KICKER E oam i pee CHAMBER SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR PCA REACTION CELL PURGE FLOW SENSOR KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP Gas Flow when multigas version of M6200E analyzer is measuring 50 8 SO Scrubber r i HYDROCARBON SCRUBBER KICKER Pneumatic Diagram of the M6200E Standard
239. erature control duty cycle IZSTEMP IZS TEMP 52 2 C IZS temperature CONVTEMP CONV 315 0 H2S gt SO Converter temperature H2S H2S 261 4 PPB H2S concentration for current range TESTCHAN TEST 3721 1 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output selected with TEST CHAN ID variable CLOCKTIME TIME 10 38 27 Current instrument time of day clock 1 The name is used to request a message via the RS 232 interface as in T BOXTEMP Engineering software Current instrument units Shown as they appear when analyzer is in HS mode In SO mode appear as 502 STB SO2 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear 5 M6200EH M6200E Rev A 1 291 APPENDIX 4 M6200E Signal 1 Definitions Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 4 M6200E Signal I O Definitions Revision A 1 Table A 4 M6200E Signal I O Definitions Revision A 1 SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL DESCRIPTION NUMBER Internal outputs U8 J108 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default I O address 322 hex ELEC TEST 1 electrical test on 0 off OPTIC TEST 1 optic test on 0 off 1 select high preamp range PREAMP RANGE HI 0 select low range Spare 1 reset I C peripherals 0 normal 0 hardware reset 8584 chip 1 normal EXT_ZERO_CAL 0 go into zero calibration 1 exit zero calibration EXT_SPAN_CAL 0 go into span calibration 1 exit span calibration
240. ess ENTR to change the offset amp slope values for the H2S measurements Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu EXIT EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display The Model 6200E analyzer is now ready for operation M6200E Rev A1 39 Getting Started Model 6200E Instruction Manual 3 3 2 Interferences for H2S Measurements It should be noted that the fluorescence method for detecting H2S is subject to interference from a number of sources Since the M6200E converts H2S into SO and measures the UV fluorescence of the SO the most common source of interference is from other gases that fluoresce in a similar fashion to SO when exposed to UV Light such poly nuclear aromatics PNA of which certain hydrocarbons such as meta xylene and naphthalene are the most pervasive The M6200E has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from most of these sources For a more detailed discussion of this topic see Section 10 2 6 NOTE Once you have completed the above set up procedures please fill out the quality questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne Analytical Instruments This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service and our products Thank you User Notes 40 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Frequently Asked Questions amp Glossary 4 FREQ
241. est iu eee deut ie eor reme ed elencate sa ee du bape de e e wl einer datnr cei dte se dr Lamp Calibration Pressure Calibration Flow Calibration 6 10 SETUP COMM Setting Up the Analyser s Communication Ports o ra OY OO OY NOY Hehehehe SOOO SPEEEEDTITO HHH o m m N 2 COM Port Default Settings ran SE eed hea ei Mace can RS 232 COM Port Cable Connections 285 485 Configuration of COM2 ape bae eed era due tne aee oxi hr Ee tes DTE and DCE Communication 2 eiie cec rendre ere eden neta or tex deua rx iran nta naa rara Ethernet Card Configuration esee enne 6 1 Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate 6 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP 6 3 Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses 6 4 Changing the Analyzer s p Multidrop RS 232 Set hand da eet diene cre rana dx morsu dete oua eei 8 COM Port Communication Modes 9 COM Port Baud 10 COM Port
242. eyboard interrupt status bit all communication between the CPU and the keyboard display is handled by way of the instrument s 2 buss The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus are allowed to talk or required to listen Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information is intended Keypad Decoder Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line When a key is depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal latches and holds the state of all eight lines in effect creating an 8 bit data word alerts the key depress detect circuit a flip flop IC translates the 8 bit word into serial data and sends this to the I C interface chip Key Depress Detect Circuit This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the I C interface chip causing it to send interrupt signal to the CPU 234 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation I C Interface Chip e This IC performs several functions e Using a dedicated digital status bit it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the keyboard is ready to send e Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data the 1 C interface chip resets the key depress detect flip flop e In response to commands from the CPU it turns the front panel status LEDs on and off and ac
243. f the voltage between T2 and T3 0 VDC and the voltage measured between T1 to T2 is some voltage other than 0 VDC the TEC is most likely shorted e T4 is tied directly to ground To determine the absolute voltage on any one of the other test points make a measurement between that test point ant T4 M6200E Rev A1 259 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual 11 5 14 High Voltage Power Supply The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT tube Figure 10 13 It requires 2 voltage inputs The first is 15 which powers the supply The second is the programming voltage which is generated on the Preamp Board This power supply is unlike a traditional PMT HVPS It is like having 10 independent power supplies one to each pin of the PMT The test procedure below allows you to test each supply Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration procedure in Section 11 6 3 11 5 15 Pneumatic Sensor Assembly The pressure flow sensor circuit board located behind the sensor assembly can be checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure which assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP2 it should be 10 0 0 25 V If not the board is faulty Measure the voltage across capacitor C2 it should be 5 0 0 25 V If not the board may be faulty 11 5 15 1 Sample Pres
244. f the warning BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the M6200E chassis is outside the specified limits CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased CONV TEMP WARNING The temperature of the H2S gt SO catalytic converter is outside its optimal operating range DARK CAL WARNING Dark offset above limit specified indicating that too much stray light is present in the sample chamber DATA INITIALIZED iDAS data storage was erased FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits IZS TEMP WARNING On units with IZS options installed The permeation tube temperature is outside of specified limits PMT DET WARNING PMT detector output outside of operational limits PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits RCELL PRESS WARN Sample chamber pressure is outside of specified limits RCELL TEMP WARNING Sample chamber temperature is outside of specified limits REAR BOARD NOT DET The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communica
245. flash on and off 244 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR about once per second If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted Contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the analyzer If 30 60 seconds after a restart DS5 is not flashing and no characters have been written to the front panel display the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be defective If DS5 is permanently off or permanently on the CPU board is likely locked up and the analyzer should not respond either with locked up or dark front panel EELS TED mnm m n Ha HO HG Figure 11 3 CPU Status Indicator 11 1 4 2 CPU Status Indicator The CPU board has two red LEDs LED1 is the upper most LED and is a 5V power indicator so it should always be on However both CPU LEDs only indicate if the CPU is powered up properly and generally working The lower LED will sometimes be stable and sometimes will blink It can continue to blink even if the CPU or firmware are locked up and is not an effective indicator for debugging system problems 11 1 4 3 Relay Board Status LEDs The most important status LED on the relay board is the red I C Bus watch dog LED labeled W D which indicates the health of the 12 communications bus This LED is located in the
246. fluoresced UV light generated in the instruments sample chamber To negate this effect the Model 6200E maintains the sample gas at a stable raised temperature Pressure changes can also have a noticeable if more subtle effect on the H2S concentration calculation To account for this the Model 6200E software includes a feature which allows the instrument to include a compensation factor in the H2S calculations that is based on changes in ambient pressure When the TPC feature is enabled the analyzer s H2S concentration is divided by a factor called PRESSCO which is based on the ratio between the ambient pressure of the sample gas and standard atmospheric pressure Equation 10 5 As ambient pressure increases the compensated H5S concentration is decreased SAMPLE PRESSURE HG A x SAMP PRESS SLOPE PRESSCO 29 92 HG A Equation 10 5 SAMPLE PRESSURE The ambient pressure of the sample gas as measured by the instrument s sample pressure sensor see Figure 10 7 in Hg A SAMP PRESS SLOPE Sample pressure slope correction factor The default setting for Section 6 8 describes the method for enabling disabling the TPC feature M6200E Rev A1 237 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual 10 7 4 Internal Data Acquisition System iDAS The iDAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when an instrument will require service Large amounts of data
247. for possible analyzer malfunction or calibration drift Whenever a Level 2 zero or span check indicates a possible calibration problem a Level 1 zero and span or multipoint calibration should be carried out before any corrective action is taken If a Level 2 zero and span check is to be used in the quality control program a reference response for the check should be obtained immediately following a zero and span or multipoint calibration while the analyzer s calibration is accurately known Subsequent Level 2 check responses should then be compared to the most recent reference response to determine if a change in response has occurred For automatic Level 2 zero and span checks the first scheduled check following the calibration should be used for the reference response It should be kept in mind that any Level 2 check that involves only part of the analyzer s system cannot provide information about the portions of the system not checked and therefore cannot be used as a verification of the overall analyzer calibration M6200E Rev A1 183 EPA Protocol Calibration Model 6200E Instruction Manual 8 3 ZERO and SPAN Checks A system of Level 1 and Level 2 zero span checks see Table 8 4 is recommended These checks must be conducted in accordance with the specific guidance given in Subsection 9 1 of Section 2 0 9 Q A Handbook It is recommended Level 1 zero and span checks conducted every two weeks Level 2 checks shou
248. g Instructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual M200E at CAS HyperTerminal lol x File Edit View Cal Transfer Help SETUP PROPERTIES FOR ENGDAT ENGDRT EVENT ATIMER REPORT PERIOD 000 00 02 NUMBER OF RECORDS 2000 RS 232 REPORT ON CHANNEL ENABLED ON CAL HOLD OFF OFF PARAMETERS 14 PARAMETER RCTEMP MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PRRRMETER CNVTMP MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PRRRMETER PMTTMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER BOXTMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER O3FLOW MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER SMPFLW MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF di DE ae Bree ee 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER ON 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER AZERO MODE NG PRECISION 4 E SRMPLES PRRRMETER HVP DE RVG PRECISION SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER PHTDET HODES ANG PRECISION STORE SAMPLES 0FF PRRRMETER RF4096 MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE 0 PRRRMETER REFGND MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF Connected 00 01 32 Auto detect TCP IP SCROLL caps Num Capture Print echo Figure 6 16 iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program Both procedures are best started by downloading the default iDAS configuration getting familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions and then altering a copy of the original file offline before uploading the new configurati
249. g test points on the relay board e Suspect a leak first Customer service data indicate that half of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the pneumatic system of the analyzer including the external pump the M6200E Rev A1 239 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual source of zero air or span gases or the sample gas delivery system Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal external gas lines damaged seals punctured gas lines a damaged pump diaphragm etc e Follow the procedures defined in Section 11 5 for confirming that the analyzer s basic components are working power supplies CPU relay board keyboard PMT cooler etc See Figure 3 8 for general layout of components and sub assemblies in the analyzer See the wiring interconnect drawing and interconnect list see Appendix D 11 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with Warning Messages The most common and or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message displayed on the front panel Table 11 1 contains a list of warning messages along with a list of possible faults that might be responsible for the warning condition It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub system power supply relay board motherboard has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings In this case a
250. gas before it the reaches the sample chamber The exact wavelength of light needed to excite a specific 50 fluorescing gas is removed by the source UV optical filter The light given off by Nitrogen Oxide and many of the other fluorescing gases is outside of the bandwidth passed by the PMT optical filter 10 2 6 2 UV Absorption by Ozone Because ozone absorbs UV Light over a relatively broad spectrum it could cause a measurement offset by absorbing some of the UV given off by the decaying SO5 in the sample chamber The Model 6200E prevents this from occurring by having a very short light path between the area where the SO fluorescence occurs and the PMT detector Because the light path is so short the amount of needed to cause a noticeable effect would be much higher than could be reasonably expected in any application for which this instrument is intended 10 2 6 3 Dilution Certain gases with higher viscosities can lower the flow rate though the critical flow orifice that controls the movement of sample gas though the analyzer reducing the amount of sample gas in the sample chamber and thus the amount of SO available to react with the to the UV light While this can be a significant problem for some analyzers the design of the Model 6200E is very tolerant of variations in sample gas flow rate and therefore does not suffer from this type of interference 10 2 6 4 Third Body Quenching While the decay of SO to SO ha
251. hat the card is not receiving power or is suffering from a massive failure e Under the Setup CFG menu see Section 6 5 the firmware revision of the iChip processor on the Ethernet card should be listed It will appear something like SAMPLE iChip Rev IL702P16 1 3 NEXT PREV EXIT If appears as the revision number something is preventing the iChip from being initialized e initial start up after iChip driver is enabled the analyzer s COMM port driver tests the iChip to determine the baud rate at which it is set to function This test occurs when the instrument is approximately 75 though its boot up procedure and takes about 90 seconds to complete This test should only occur on the initial start up of the analyzer after the Ethernet card is installed and activated usually at the factory A 90 second pause at this point in its boot process every time it is turned on could indicate that a problem exists with the iChip itself the Ethernet card or the analyzer s Disk on Chip memory that is preventing it from holding the proper baud rate setting for the COM2 port in memory 11 5 Subsystem Checkout The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer In most cases this included a list of possible causes and in some cases quick solutions or at least a pointer to the appropriate sections describing them This section
252. he scrubber assembly 00690 Retainer Pad CH 9Purafil Chemical 7 00089 Scrubber Canister FL 3 Particle Filter p Figure 9 2 Zero Air Scrubber Assembly 2 Remove the old scrubber by disconnecting the 1 4 plastic tubing from the particle filter using 9 16 and 1 2 wrenches 3 Remove the particle filter from the cartridge using 9 16 wrenches 4 Unscrew the top of the scrubber canister and discard the Purafil and charcoal contents Make sure to abide to local laws about discarding these chemicals The rebuild kit listed in Appendix B comes with a Material and Safety Data Sheet which contains more information on these chemicals 196 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 5 Refill the scrubber with charcoal at the bottom a white felt divider and the Purafil chemical at the top 6 Put another felt divider on top of that then close the cartridge with the screw top cap 7 Tighten the cap on the scrubber hand tight only 8 Replace the DFU filter with a new unit and discard the old 9 Replace the scrubber assembly into its clips on the rear panel 10 Reconnect the plastic tubing to the fitting of the particle filter 11 Adjust the scrubber cartridge such that it does not protrude above or below the analyzer in case the instrument is mounted in a rack If necessary squeeze the clips for a tighter grip on the cartridge 9 3 5 Maintaining the H2S
253. he temperature of the increases the pressure inside the tube and therefore increases the effusion rate Flow rate of the zero air If the previous two variables are constant the permeation rate of the calibration gas into the zero air stream will be constant Therefore a lower flow rate of zero air produces higher concentrations of H2S The M6200E usually has a constant flow rate and a constant permeation rate hence variations in concentration can be achieved by changing the IZS temperature NOTE The permeation tube is not included in the IZS Option and must be ordered separately See Section 5 4 3 below Permeation Tube Heater In order to keep the permeation rate constant the IZS enclosure is heated to a constant 50 C 10 above the maximum operating temperature of the instrument The IZS heater is controlled by a precise PID Proportional Integral Derivative temperature control loop A thermistor measures the actual temperature and reports it to the CPU for control feedback 50 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software CAUTION Gas flow must be maintained at all time for units with a permeation tube installed Insufficient gas flow allows gas to build up to levels that will contaminate the instrument 5 4 3 IZS Permeation Tubes Options 53 55 amp 57 Several replacement permeation tubes are available for the IZS option They are identical in size and sha
254. head needs to be rebuild Q Do I need a strip chart recorder or external data logger A No the M6200E is equipped with a very powerful internal data acquisition system See Section 6 11 4 2 Glossary ASSY acronym for Assembly DAS acronym for data acquisition system the old acronym of iDAS DIAG acronym for diagnostics the diagnostic settings of the analyzer DHCP acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network DOC Disk On Chip the analyzer s central storage area for analyzer firmware configuration settings and data This is a solid state device without mechanically moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive under DOS with disk label C DOC chips come with 2 mb in the E series analyzer standard configuration but are available in larger sizes DOS Disk Operating System The E series analyzers use DR DOS EEPROM also referred to as a FLASH chip FLASH flash memory is non volatile solid state memory GFC Acronym for Gas Filter Correlation bus a clocked bi directional serial bus for communication between individual analyzer components iDAS acronym for internal data acquisition system IP acronym for internet protocol LAN acronym for local area network LED acronym for light emitting diode PCA acronym for printed
255. heir respective functionality Table 10 2 Relay Board Status LED s LED COLOR FUNCTION STATUS WHEN LIT STATUS WHEN UNLIT D1 RED Watchdog circuit Cycles On Off every 3 seconds under control of the CPU D2 Sample chamber HEATING NOT HEATING heater D3 yeLLow Heo gt SO converter HEATING NOT HEATING heater D4 YELLOW Unused N A N A D5 yeLLow 169 heater Perm HEATING NOT HEATING Tube option D6 YELLOW Unused N A N A D7 GREEN Sample Cal Valve Valve open to zero span Valve open to sample inlet option valve D8 GREEN Valve open to zero gas inlet Valve open to span gas inlet Gas stream bypasses H2S gt Valve open to H2S SO D9 GREEN SO5 H5S valve SO converter Analyzer converter Analyzer measuring SO measuring H2S D10 GREEN Unused N A N A D11 GREEN UV Lamp Shutter Shutter open Shutter closed D12 14 GREEN Unused N A N A M6200E Rev A1 227 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual As a Safety measure special circuitry on the Relay Board watches the status of LED D1 Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds indicating that the CPU or I C bus has stopped functioning the Watchdog Circuit will automatically shut of all valves as well as turn off the UV Source s and all heaters The Sample Pump will still be running 10 4 10 Motherboard This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A D con
256. ich the instrument is set during the calibration procedure 7 1 1 Required Equipment Supplies and Expendables Calibration of the Model 6200E analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and supplies These include but are not limited to the following e Zero air source e Hydrogen sulfide span gas source e Gas lines all gas line materials should be Teflon type or glass e Arecording device such as a strip chart recorder and or data logger optional M6200E Rev A1 157 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual 7 1 2 Zero Air Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the analyzer s readings For H2S measuring devices zero air should be similar in composition to the sample gas but devoid of H2S hydrocarbons and Sulfur dioxide S02 Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by drying and removal of pollutants are available We recommend this type of device for generating zero air 7 1 3 Gas Standards Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the gas being measured at about 90 of the desired full measurement range For example if the measurement range is 500 ppb the span gas should have an H2S concentration of about 450 ppb We strongly recommend that span calibration is carried out with bottled calibrated H2S or SO span gas although it is possibl
257. iew and clear warning messages TEST deactivates warning messages NOTE If the warning message persists after several attempts to clear it the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm up period SAMPLE HVPS WARNING SO 0 00 TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP SAMPLE RANGE 500 000PPB 502 0 00 MSG activates waming messages TSEHSTS CAL MSG cin setup IST TST keys replaced with 4 TEST key SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET 592 0 00 Press CLR to clear the current 2 message TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP P If more than one warning is active the gt next message will take its place Once the last warning has been cleared the analyzer returns to SAMPLE mode Make sure warning messages are not due to real problems M6200E Rev A1 35 Getting Started Model 6200E Instruction Manual 3 2 4 Functional Check 1 After the analyzer s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that were installed 2 Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer s front panel as well as their expected values These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer Section 11 1 2 The enclosed Final Test and Validation
258. in 55 0 nemen enema 85 Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration 89 Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor essen mee 93 Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A4 100 Ethernet Status Indicato s pere RI p e IRR APR RERE Den DET 107 LAN Internet Configuration Properties 108 Internet Configuration Keypad Functions cccceeeee cette rete eee nnne 113 COMM Port Communication modes essen nennen nnn enn 116 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for IDAS 120 iDAS Data Channel lt nmm ne 121 IDAS Data Parameter FUNCtONS eis oreet he ndn th ee a a a r T 122 Status Output Pin mme nennen nnn 140 Control Input Pin 141 Terminal Mode Software Commands eee eee eee nena eee neta nena tenn eae 142 Gs inris 143 Serial Interface tte rnnt rein Rake nene ra 148 RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol 149 M6200E Hessen Protocol Response
259. individually from the front panel without affecting other data channels However when editing a data channel such as during adding deleting or editing parameters all data for that particular channel will be lost because the iDAS can store only data of one format number of parameter columns etc for any given channel In addition an iDAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of channels Hence remote update of the iDAS will always delete all current channels and stored data To modify add or delete a parameter follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press 128 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 R Exits to the main PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition menu NAME CONC SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT Press SET key until SETUP X X PARAMETERS 2 SET SET EDIT PRINT SETUP X X EDIT PARAMS DELETE DATA NO returns to the previous YES will delete all data in that entire channel YES NO menu and retains all data Edit Data Parameter Menu Moves the SETUP 0 PARAM S2SCN1 MODE AVG i display between Exits to the main available PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Data Acquisition Parameters menu p Inserts a new Parameter before the cu
260. inear or near linear output response with concentration they can be adequately calibrated with only two concentration standards two point concentration Furthermore one of the standards may be zero concentration which is relatively easily obtained and need not be certified Hence only one certified concentration standard is needed for the two point Level 1 zero and span calibration Although lacking the advantages of the multipoint calibration the two point zero and span calibration because of its simplicity can be and should be carried out much more frequently Also two point calibrations are easily automated Frequency checks or updating of the calibration relationship with a two point zero and span calibration improves the quality of the monitoring data by helping to keep the calibration relationship more closely matched to any changes drifts in the analyzer response LEVEL 2 ZERO AND SPAN CHECK A Level 2 zero and span check is an unofficial check of an analyzer s response It may include dynamic checks made with uncertified test concentrations artificial stimulation of the analyzer s detector electronic or other types of checks of a portion of the analyzer etc Level 2 zero and span checks are not to be used as a basis for analyzer zero or span adjustments calibration updates or adjustment of ambient data They are intended as quick convenient checks to be used between zero and span calibrations to check
261. ing a test function Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO mode appear as SO2 STB SO2 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear Figure 6 2 Viewing M6200E TEST Functions NOTE A value of XXXX displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out of range reading or the analyzer s inability to calculate it All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure Absolute atmospheric pressure is 29 92 in Hg A at sea level It decreases about 1 in Hg per 300 m gain in altitude A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure 62 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 2 2 Warning Messages The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer s front panel and through the COM ports Section 11 1 1 explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems Section 3 2 3 shows how to view and clear warning messages Table 6 3 lists all warning messages for the current version of software Table 6 3 List of Warning Messages MESSAGE MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The instruments A D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated AZERO WRN XXX X MV The reading taken during the auto zero cycle is outside of specified limits The value XXX X indicates the auto zero reading at the time o
262. ing and returns to the Set the recorder Pressing EXIT ignores the new offset in mV of DIAG AIO RECORD OFFSET 0 MV setting and returns to the the selected previous menu channel 4 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT 6 9 4 5 Current Loop Output Adjustment A current loop option is available and can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs of the analyzer Section 5 2 This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with 0 20 mA output current The outputs can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0 20 mA range However most current loop applications call for either 2 20 mA or 4 20 mA range All current loop outputs have a 5 over range Ranges with the lower limit set to more than 1 mA e g 2 20 or 4 20 mA also have a 5 under range To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop after installing the current output printed circuit assembly follow the instructions in Section 6 9 4 1 and select CURR from the list of options on the Output Range menu Adjusting the signal zero and span values of the current loop output is done by raising or lowering the voltage of the respective analog output This proportionally raises or lowers the current produced by the current loop option Similar to the voltage calibration the software allows this current adjustment to be made in 100 10 or 1 count increments Since the exact current increment per voltage c
263. interface long 95a Abbreviated weekday name 9ob Abbreviated month name 9od Day of month as decimal number 01 31 96H Hour in 24 hour format 00 23 I Hour in 12 hour format 01 12 9j Day of year as decimal number 001 366 Month as decimal number 01 12 96M Minute as decimal number 00 59 A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock 96S Second as decimal number 00 59 95w Weekday as decimal number 0 6 Sunday is 0 Year without century as decimal number 00 99 Year with century as decimal number 959 55 Percent sign FACTORY OPT BitFlag 0 0 655535 Factory option flags Add values to combine flags 1 2 zero span valves installed enable dilution factor 4 IZS installed implies zero span valves installed 16 display units in concentration field 32 enable software controlled maintenance mode 128 enable switch controlled maintenance mode 2048 enable Internet option Must power cycle instrument for these options to fully take effect M6200E Rev A 1 289 APPENDI X A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision A 1 Table A 2 M6200E Warning Messages Revision A 1 NAME MESSAGE TEXT DESCRIPTION WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power cycled or the CPU was reset WDATA
264. ion gas diluted to proper concentration for Midpoint N to enter the sample port SAMPLE SO2STB DX PPB SO2 X XXX Wait until lt TST TST gt CAL CALS SETUP 502 STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes Y Record the SO reading as SPAN CAL M RANGE 500 0 PPB 50 44 displayed on the instrument s front panel TST TST gt CONC EXIT Press EXIT to Return to the Main SAMPLE Display ACTION Allow Calibration Gas diluted to proper concentration for Midpoint N 1 to enter the sample port 8 6 Special Calibration Requirements for Independent Range or Auto Range If Independent Range or Auto Range is selected then it should be calibrated for both Rangel and Range2 separately For zero and span point calibration follow the procedure described in Section 7 2 Repeat the procedure for both the HIGH and LOW Ranges 186 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration 8 7 References 1 Environmental Protection Agency Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 50 Appendix A Section 10 3 2 Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II Ambient Air Specific Methods EPA 600 4 77 027a 1977 3 Catalog of NBS Standard Reference Materials NBS Special Publication 260 1975 76 Edition U S Department of Commerce NBS W
265. ions outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only NOTE The front panel of the analyzer is hinged at the bottom and may be opened to gain access to various components mounted on the panel itself or located near the front of the instrument such as the particulate filter A locking screw locate at the top center of the panel and two fasteners located in the upper right and left corners of the panel lock it shut Figure 3 10 M6200E Rev A1 189 Instrument Maintenance Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 9 1 M6200E Preventive Maintenance Schedule ITEM ACTION FREQUENCY CAL MANUAL DATE PERFORMED CHECK SECTION SO2 scrubber Replace As required Yes 9 3 3 H2S gt SO2 Converter Catalyst Replace As required Yes 9 3 5 Particulate filter Change Weekly No 9 3 1 particle filter Verify test Review and functions evaluate Weekly No Appendix C Evaluate Zero span check offset and Weekly e Ai slope i Zero span Zero and 7 2 7 4 span Every 3 months ez 7 5 7 calibration calibration 8 1 zero air Exchange scrubber ng Every 3 months No 9 3 4 chemical optional 1 Perform flow Check Flow Every 6 Months No 11 5 2 check Sample chamber Clean Annually or as H windows and Yes 9 3 6 optics necessary filters Critical flow orifice amp sintered Replac
266. ique ID code The M6200E is programmed with a default ID code of 101 To change this code see Section 6 10 1 User Notes 156 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES This chapter describes the calibration procedures for the M6200E of the methods described in this section can be initiated and controlled through the COM ports NOTE If you are using the M6200E for US EPA controlled monitoring of SO2 see Chapter 8 for information on the EPA calibration protocol 7 1 Calibration Preparations The calibration procedures in this section assume that the analog output reporting range and units of measure reporting range mode and reporting range span have already been selected for the analyzer If this has not been done please do so before continuing Section 6 7 for instructions Also unless otherwise stated the procedures in this Chapter are written with the assumption that the M6200E is being used in its default configuration as an H2S analyzer The same methods and setups can be followed when the instrument is configured for SO measurement by substituting SO span gas for the H2S span gas listed in the procedure For analyzers configured in H2S SO multigas mode see Section 7 8 NOTE In applications where the instrument may be used to measure SO as well as H2S make sure that the calibration gas being used matches the gas measurement mode in wh
267. is measurement is stored in the analyzer s memory as the test function PMT TEMP and is viewable as a test function Section 6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE SENSOR This sensor measures the gas pressure at the exit of the sample chamber SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR This sensor measure the flow rate of the sample gas as it exits the sample chamber 10 4 10 3 Thermistor Interface This circuit provides excitation termination and signal selection for several negative coefficient thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer They are SAMPLE CHAMBER TEMPERATURE SENSOR The source of this signal is a thermistor embedded in the of the sample chamber block It measures the temperature of the sample gas in the chamber This data are used by the CPU to control sample chamber the heating circuit and as part of the H5S calculations when the instrument s Temperature Pressure Compensation feature is enabled This measurement is stored in the analyzer memory as a parameter RCEL TEMP and is viewable as a test function under the same name Section6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel IZS OPTION PERMEATION TUBE TEMPERATURE SENSOR This thermistor attached to the permeation tube in the IZS option reports the current temperature of that tube to the CPU as part of control loop that keeps the tube at a constant temperature BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR A thermistor is attached to the motherboard It measures the analyz
268. isplay Menu M6200 Rev A 1 275 APPENDI X A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SAMPLE TEST CAL CALZ CALS MSGc CLR SETUP Only appear if pl ra reporting range TST TST is set for LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH AUTO range mode RANGE STABIL PRES ZERO SPAN CONC ZERO SPAN CONC ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SAMP FL PMT NORM PMT UV LAMP LAMP RATIO Primary Setup Menu STR LGT DRK PMT DRK LAMP SLOPE CFG DAS RANG PASS CLK MORE OFFSET HVPS RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP Secondary Setup Menu PMT TEMP IZS TEMP TEST TIME TEST FUNCTIONS t Only appears when warning messages are activated i COMM VARS DIAG Viewable by user while see Section 6 2 2 instrument is in SAMPLE Mode Press this key to cycle through list of active warning see Section 6 2 1 messages Press this key to clear erase the warning message currently displayed Figure A 2 Sample Display Menu Units with Z S Valve or IZS Option installed 276 M6200 Rev A 1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual APPENDIX A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 CFG PREV NEXT SETUP ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Go To iDAS MENU TREE PREV Fig A 8 MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION ACTIVE SPECIAL SOFTWARE OPTIONS
269. k Cal signal is Light leak in reaction cell WARNING higher than 1 000 mV Shutter solenoid is not functioning Failed relay board 2 bus failure Loose connector wiring PMT preamp board bad or out of cal DATA Data Storage in iDAS Failed disk on chip INITIALIZED was erased User cleared data FRONT PANEL The CPU is unable to Warning only appears on serial I O com port s WARN Communicate with the Front panel display will be frozen blank or will not respond Front Panel Display Keyboard Failed keyboard C buss failure Loose connector wiring HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output is 400 V or gt 900 V High voltage power supply is bad High voltage power supply is out of cal A D converter circuitry is bad IZS TEMP On units with IZS Bad IZS heater WARNING options installed The Bad IZS temperature sensor permeation tube Bad relay controlling the IZS heater temperature is Sample Entire relay board is malfunctioning chamber temperature IC buss malfunction is Failure of thermistor interface circuitry on motherboard lt 45 C or gt 55 C PMT DET PMT detector output is Failed PMT WARNING gt 4995 mV Malfunctioning PMR preamp board A D converter circuitry failure PMT TEMP PMT temperature is Bad PMT thermo electric cooler WARNING Sample chamber Failed PMT TEC driver circuit temperature is Bad PMT preamp board 29C or gt 12 C Failed PMT temperature sensor Loose wiring between PMT temperature sensor and
270. k for Air Pollution Measurement Systems abbreviated Q A Handbook be purchased from the NTIS phone 703 605 6000 Special attention should be paid to Section 2 9 which deals with fluorescence based SO analyzers and upon which most of this section is based Specific regulations regarding the use and operation of ambient hydrogen sulfide analyzers can be found in 40 CFR 50 and 40 CFR 58 Both publications are available from the U S Government Printing Office phone 202 512 0327 8 1 1 Calibration of Equipment In general calibration is the process of adjusting the gain and offset of the M6200E against some recognized standard The reliability and usefulness of all data derived from any analyzer depends primarily upon its state of calibration In this section the term dynamic calibration is used to express a multipoint check against known standards and involves introducing gas samples of known concentration into the instrument in order to adjust the instrument to a predetermined sensitivity and to produce a calibration relationship This relationship is derived from the instrumental response to successive samples of different known concentrations As a minimum three reference points and a zero point are recommended to define this relationship The true values of the calibration gas must be traceable to NIST SRM s See Table 7 1 All monitoring instrument systems are subject to some drift and variation in internal parameters and cannot be expe
271. k is made in conjunction with a zero span check it must be made prior to any zero or span adjustments Record this value Information from the check procedure is used to assess the precision of the monitoring data see 40 CFR 58 for procedures for calculating and reporting precision 8 5 Dynamic Multipoint Span Calibration Dynamic calibration involves introducing gas samples of known concentrations to an instrument in order to record the instruments performance at a predetermined sensitivity and to derive a M6200E Rev A1 185 EPA Protocol Calibration Model 6200E Instruction Manual calibration relationship A minimum of three reference points and one zero point uniformly spaced covering to 90 percent of the operating range are recommended to define this relationship The analyzer s recorded response is compared with the known concentration to derive the calibration relationship To perform a precision check the instrument set up sources of zero air and sample gas should conform to those described in Section 7 2 Follow the procedures described in section 7 2 for calibrating the zero points For each mid point SAMPLE RANGE 500 000 PPB SO2 X XXX Set the Display to show the L 502 STB test function lt TST TST gt SETUP This function calculates the stability of the NO NO measurement SAMPLE SO2 STB X XXX PPB SO2 X XXX lt TST TST gt SETUP Y ACTION Allow calibrat
272. lay SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Main Data Acquisition Menu N SETUP X X DATA ACQUISITION VIEW EDIT EXIT Edit Data Channel Menu Moves the SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 R display up amp Exits to the Main down the list of PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition Data Channels Menu Exports the configuration of all data channels to RS 232 interface Inserts a new Data Channel into the list BEFORE the Channel currently being displayed Deletes The Data Channel currently being displayed Moves the display between the PROPERTIES for this data channel SETUP Exits returns to the previous Menu SET SET EDIT PRNT EXIT x Reports the configuration of current Allows to edit the channel name see next key sequence data channels to the RS 232 ports When editing the data channels the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration parameters For example the display line 0 CONC ATIMER 4 800 translates to the following configuration Channel No 0 NAME CONC 126 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions TRIGGER EVENT ATIMER PARAMETERS Four parameters are included in this channel EVENT This channel is set up to record 800 data points To edit the
273. lay The use of an independent external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 11 5 2 is essential 246 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR 11 2 1 Zero or Low Sample Flow If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow do the following three steps e Check for actual sample flow e Check pressures e Carry out a leak check To check the actual sample flow disconnect the sample tube from the sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode Place a finger over the inlet and see if it gets sucked in by the vacuum or more properly use a flow meter to measure the actual flow If there is proper flow of around 450 500 cm3 min contact customer service If there is no flow or low flow continue with the next step Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in Hg A about 1 in below ambient atmospheric pressure 11 2 2 High Flow Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range typically 10 11 of the nominal flow should not occur in the M6200E unless a pressurized sample zero or span gas is supplied to the inlet ports Be sure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the analyzer inlet ports When supplying sample zero or span gas at ambient pressure a high flow would indicate that one or more of the critical flow orifices are physically broken very unlikely case allowing
274. lay Board Status LEDS jcc ie eere ennt EE cae EXER IRE E BRE Dec IRE needs 246 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code ssessse me 253 DC Power Supply Acceptable lt nemen 254 Relay Board Control 5 nemen nnne nnn 255 Analog Output Test Function Nominal 256 Status Outputs Check Pin Out ner E 256 Static Generation Voltages for Typical 266 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD 266 M6200E Setup Variables Revision 1 mmm 283 M6200E Warning Messages Revision A 1 290 M6200E Test Functions Revision A 1 sssssssssssssee m meme 291 M6200E Signal I O Definitions Revision A 1 292 M6200E DAS Trigger Events Revision A Leccare atin ionat ear a aped 296 M6200E iDAS Functions Revision A 1 sss nnn 297 Terminal Command Designators Revision 1 298 Terminal Key Assignments Revision A 1 299 M6200E Spare Parts LSU ii iscio dt pt AEA EE TEENE geome yeaa REN 301 List of Included Electro
275. ld be conducted in between the Level 1 checks at a frequency desired by the user Span concentrations for both levels should be between 70 and 90 of the measurement range Zero and span data are to be used to e Provide data to allow analyzer adjustment for zero and span drift e Provide a decision point on when to calibrate the analyzer e Provide a decision point on invalidation of monitoring data Items 1 and 2 are described in detail in Subsection 9 1 3 of Section 2 0 9 Q A Handbook Item 3 is described in Subsection 9 1 4 of the same section Refer to the Troubleshooting Chapter 11 of this manual if the instrument is not within the allowed variations 8 3 1 Zero Span Check Procedures The Zero and Span calibration can be checked a variety of different ways They include Manual Zero Span Check Zero and Span can be checked from the front panel keyboard Follow the procedures described in Section 7 3 and 7 6 of this manual using calibrated SO span gas see Table 7 1 only Automatic Zero Span Checks After the appropriate setup Z S checks can be performed automatically every night Follow the procedure described in Section 7 9 of this manual using calibrated SO span gas see Table 7 1 Zero Span checks via remote contact closure Zero Span checks can be initiated via remote contact closures on the rear panel Follow the procedures described Section 7 7 1 of this manual using calibrated SO span gas see Table 7 1 Zero Sp
276. le way to regulate stable gas flow rates They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice a pressure differential is created This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer s external pump draws the gas through the orifice As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice the pump side continues to drop the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2 1 the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound As long as that ratio stays at least 2 1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations surges or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice 214 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual Theory Of Operation CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE AREA OF AREA OF HIGH LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE co bw Sonic Shockwave SPRING O RINGS FILTER Figure 10 8 Typical Flow Control Assembly with Critical Flow Orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice volume of gas per unit of time depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice The larger the hole the more gas molecules moving at the speed of sound pass through th
277. logged flow PRESSURE orifices sample inlet overpressure 1 Calibration error span gas concentration incorrect leaks low lamp H2S SLOPE output 1 Incorrect span gas concentration contaminated zero air leak low 25 OFFS level calibration off Internal clock drifting move across time zones daylight savings TIME OF DAY time 1 Shown as they appear when analyzer is in HS mode In SO mode appear as SO2 STB SO2 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear 11 1 3 Using the Diagnostic Signal I O Function The signal I O parameters found under the diagnostics DIAG menu combined with a thorough understanding of the instrument s theory of operation Section 10 are useful for troubleshooting in three ways e The technician can view the raw unprocessed signal level of the analyzer s critical inputs and outputs e All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can be manually changed e Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled This allows the user to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the operation of the analyzer Figure 11 2 shows an example of how to use the signal I O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation Please note that the analyzer will freeze it s concentration M6200E Rev A1 243 TROUB
278. mber FROM lt start date gt TO lt end date gt VERBOSE COMPACT HEX Print DAS Print iDAS records records date format MM DD YYYY or YY HH MM SS CANCEL Halt printing iDAS records LIST Print setup variables name value warn low warn high Modify variable V ID name value Modify enumerated variable CONFIG Print instrument configuration MAINT ON OFF Enter exit maintenance mode MODE Print current instrument mode DASBEGIN lt data channel definitions gt DASEND Upload iDAS configuration CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single iDAS channel CHANNELDELETE name Delete iDAS channels The command syntax follows the command type separated by a space character Strings in brackets are optional designators The following key assignments also apply 298 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX 6 Terminal Command Designators Revision A 1 Table A 8 Terminal Key Assignments Revision A 1 TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS ESC Abort line CR ENTER Execute command Ctrl C Switch to computer mode COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS LF line feed Execute command Ctrl T Switch to terminal mode M6200E Rev A 1 299 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDI X B M6200E Spare Parts List APPENDIX B M6200E Spare Parts List Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by API may result in NOTE non compliance with European standard EN 6101
279. mber firmware revision software library revision CPU type and other information Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 X XXX TST TST CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SEP PASS 818 Press NEXT of PREV to move back 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT and forth through the following list of Configuration information MODEL NAME NUMEER SAMPLE PRIMARY SETUP MENU mut SOFTWARE REVISION e LIBRARY REVISION CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT J return to the iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION SAMPLE display HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION 2 SOFTWARE SAMPLE M101E SO2 H2S ANALYZER Press EXIT at CPU TYPE any time to DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION NEXT PREV EXIT return to SAVED SETUP menu Only appears if relevant option of Feature is active M6200E Rev A1 67 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 6 SETUP CLK Setting the Internal Time of Day Clock The M6200E has a built in clock for the AutoCal timer Time TEST function and time stamps on COM port messages and iDAS data entries To set the time of day press TST TST gt CAL SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X SETUP v SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR
280. modes This switch exchanges the receive and transmit lines on COM1 emulating a cross over or null modem cable The switch has no effect on COM2 6 10 6 Ethernet Card Configuration When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT Ethernet network via low cost network hubs switches or routers The interface operates as a standard TCP IP device on port 3000 This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the analyzer using APIcom terminal emulators or other programs The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate 115 200 kBaud for the COM2 port Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated the COM2 submenu is replaced by a new submenu INET This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN or Internet Server s The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the analyzer indicating its current operating status Table 6 15 Ethernet Status Indicators LED FUNCTION LNK green ON when connection to the LAN is valid ACT yellow Flickers on any activity on the LAN TxD green Flickers when the RS 232 port is transmitting data RxD yellow Flickers when the RS 232 port is receiving data 6 10 6 1 Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for
281. n be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program Control C CR carriage return Switches the analyzer to computer mode no echo no edit A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal computer The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done On personal computers this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key BS backspace ESC escape Erases one character to the left of the cursor location Erases the entire command line ID CR Control C This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used The ID number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line such as the multi drop setup Pauses the listing of commands Control P Restarts the listing of commands 142 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 12 2 3 Command Syntax Commands are not case sensitive and all arguments within one command i e ID numbers keywords data values etc must be separated with a space character All Commands follow the syntax X ID COMMAND CR Where X is the command type one letter that defines the type of command Allowed designators are listed in Table 6 25 and Appendix A 6 ID is the analyzer identificati
282. n two filters of different lengths based on the conditions at hand During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software computes an average of the last 240 samples This provides the calculation portion of the software with smooth stable readings If a rapid change in concentration is detected the adaptive filter switches modes and only averages the last 48 samples This allows the analyzer to respond to the rapidly changing concentration more quickly Once triggered the short filter remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent chattering Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter First the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed amount Second the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a portion or percentage of the average in the long filter If necessary the filter lengths of these two modes may be changed to any value between 1 and 1000 samples Long sample lengths provide better signal to noise rejection but poor response times Conversely shorter filter lengths result in poor signal to noise rejection but quicker response times 10 7 2 Calibration Slope and Offset Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software During instrument calibration Chapters 7 and 8 the user enters expected values for zero and span through the front panel keypad and commands the instrument to make rea
283. ndicated in Table 6 7 These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble shooting sections Table 6 7 M6200E Diagnostic DIAG Functions FRONT PANEL DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING MODE SECTION INDICATOR SIGNAL I O Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the DIAG I O instrument Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be 6 9 2 toggled ON and OFF ANALOG OUTPUT When entered the analyzer performs an analog DIAG AOUT output step test This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test 6 9 3 the analog output accuracy ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION Analog input output parameters are DIAG AIO 6 9 4 available for viewing and configuration UU OPTIC TEST When activated the analyzer performs an optic test which DIAG OPTIC turns on an LED located inside the sensor module near the PMT Fig 10 6 9 5 15 This diagnostic tests the response of the PMT without having to Ed supply span gas ELECTRICAL TEST When activated the analyzer performs an electric DIAG ELEC test which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT output to 6 9 6 verify the signal handling and conditioning of the PMT preamp board LAMP CALIBRATION The analyzer records the current voltage output DIAG LAMP of the UV source reference detector This value is used by the CPU to 6 9 7 calculate the lam
284. nes automatically chosen by DHCP Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two step process STEP 1 Turn DHCP OFF While DHCP is turned ON the ability to manually set INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK is disabled SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP ID INET EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DHCP ON 8 1 8 ENTR EDIT SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DHCP ON v CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT ON at SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU DHCP ON COMM EXIT Y Continue with editing of Ethernet interface ENTR accept properties see Step 2 below new settings EXIT ignores new settings 110 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions STEP 2 Configure the INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing Internet Configuration Keypad Functions From Step 1 above FUNCTION Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and available characters 0 9 amp f Moves the cursor one character left or right DHCP OFF Deletes a character at the cursor location SET Accepts the new settngandretums to the previous EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu INST IP 000 000 000 000 Some keys only appear as needed SET SET EDIT Cursor location is
285. nfiguration 7 T1 5 4 gt DC Power Supply ici ae aE a AAE TAE EEA anaes Pee CREAN E EE PRIME AREE 1155 IE CIBUS s ciim cos aa Ay Pea a ende a A res Ch a dx e S 11 5 6 Keyboard Display Interface is BIS A mM 11 5 8 Motherboard eee Hd dh od cb 11 5 8 1 A D functions Wr 11 5 8 2 Analog Output Voltages 0 cc nemen ne memes eee emen emere 11 5 8 3 Status Outputs ico eire rere rente we edu eat ei x re ird nnt cena acp Eeidge Miete ude soak ead chau M6200E Rev A1 7 Model 6200E Instruction Manual 11 5 9 CPU iiis c ren foe aye 257 11 5 10 RS 232 Communication 2 257 11 5 10 1 General RS 232 Troubleshooting wn 207 11 5 10 2 Modem or Terminal Operation 258 11 5 11 PMT SENSO 25 aere eterne rrr nne rere rinm ER eden 258 11 5 12 PMT Preamplifier Board 259 11 5 13 PMT Temperature Control 234 259 11 5 14 High Voltage Power Supply 260 11 5 15 Pneumatic Sensor 260 11 5 15 1 Sample 22505000260 11 5 16 IZS Option seen vac nin ineunte te
286. ng tested Table 11 8 Status Outputs Check Pin Out PIN left to right STATUS System Ok Conc Valid High Range Zero Cal Span Cal Diag Mode Spare Spare INIA 3 Connect a voltmeter between the pin and the pin of the output being tested Table 11 8 4 Under the DIAG SIGNAL I O menu Section 6 9 2 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter it should vary between volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF 256 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR 11 5 8 4 Control Inputs The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure 1 Connect a jumper from the 5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the 5 V on the CONTROL IN connector 2 Connect a second jumper from the pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on the CONTROL IN connector The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to ZERO CAL R mode 3 Connect a second jumper from the pin on the STATUS connector to the B pin on the CONTROL IN connector The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to SPAN CAL R mode In each case the M6200E should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed 11 5 9 CPU There are two major types of CPU board failures a complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk On Chip DOC If either of these f
287. nge 1 SO2 SPAN2 Conc 400 0 1 50000 Target SO concentration during span calibration of range 2 SO2 SLOPE1 PPB mV 1 0 25 4 SO slope for range 1 SO2 SLOPE2 PPB mV 1 0 25 4 SO slope for range 2 SO2 OFFSET1 SO offset for range 1 SO2 OFFSET2 mV 0 mV 0 SO offset for range 2 284 M6200E Rev A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial 1 Revision 1 SETUP VARIABLE NUMERIC DEFAULT VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION UNITS VALUE H2S SPAN1 Conc 400 0 1 50000 Target H2S concentration during span calibration of range 1 H2S SPAN2 Conc 0 1 50000 Target H5S concentration during span calibration of range 2 H2S SLOPE1 PPB mV 1 0 25 4 H5S slope for range 1 H2S SLOPE2 PPB mV 1 0 25 4 H5S slope for range 2 H2S OFFSET1 mV 0 1500 1500 H5S offset for range 1 H2S OFFSET2 mV 0 1500 1500 H5S offset for range 2 RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL Range control mode Enclose value in IND AUTO double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface PHYS RANGE1 PHYS RANGE2 0 1 2500 Low pre amp range High pre amp range CONC RANGE1 CONC RANGE2 PPM 2 PPM 20 Conc 500 500 0 1 2500 0 1 50000 D A concentration range 1 D A concentration range 2 SAMP FLOW SET SAMP FLOW SLOPE 700 Warnings 350 1200 0 1 50000 0 1200 Sample flow set point for flow calculation and warning limits Sample flow slope correction fa
288. ngs H2S Gas stream directed 0 3 Wait period Ensures sample chamber has through scrubber and minutes been flushed of previous gas converter 3 10m Analyzer measures florescence in sample chamber SO Gas stream bypasses 0 3 Wait period dwell time Ensures sample through scrubber and minutes chamber has been flushed of previous gas converter 3 10m Analyzer measures florescence in sample chamber Cycle repeats every 20Minuites The timing of the above cycle is set by two variables see Appendix A 2 MEASURE PERIOD which sets the total dwell time for each gas mode and MEASURE DELAY which sets the wait period before the instrument begins making measurements after the gas mode has been switch 10 3 3 Flow Rate Control The Model 6200E uses a special flow control assembly located in the exhaust vacuum manifold Figure 10 7 to maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the instrument This assembly consists of A critical flow orifice Two o rings Located just before and after the critical flow orifice the o rings seal the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice A spring Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o rings the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing 10 3 3 1 Critical Flow Orifice The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simp
289. ngth 19 nm 230 nm The SO retains some excess energy that causes one of the electrons of the SO molecule to move to a higher energy orbital state In the case of the Model 6200E a band pass filter between the source of the UV light and the affected gas limits the wavelength of the UV light to approximately 214 nm SO 2 gt SO2 Equation 10 1 The second stage of this reaction occurs after the SO reaches its excited state SO Because the system will seek the lowest available stable energy state the SO2 molecule quickly returns to its ground state Equation 10 3 by giving off the excess energy in the form of a photon hv The wavelength of this fluoresced light is also in the ultraviolet band but at a longer lower energy wavelength centered at 330nm SO 550 Equation 10 2 Obviously the more SO that is present in the sample gas the more fluorescence will be detected in the sample chamber Unfortunately there are several other factors that also can affect the amount of fluorescence detected by the analyzer For instance the amount of SO2 is dependent on the average intensity of the UV light and not its peak intensity because some of the photons are absorbed by the SO as the light travels through the sample gas 204 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation Figure 10 1 UV Absorption The equation for defining the average intensity of the UV light La
290. nic SCheMatiCs cccceeeee eset eect eee eee eee nena nennen 305 M6200E Rev A1 11 Model 6200E Instruction Manual M6200E Documentation 1 M6200E DOCUMENTATION Thank you for purchasing the Model 6200E UV Fluorescence H5S Analyzer The documentation for this instrument is available in several different formats e Printed format part number M6200E e Electronic format on a CD ROM part number M6200E CD The electronic manual is in Adobe Systems Inc Portable Document Format The Adobe Acrobat Reader software which is necessary to view these files can be downloaded for free from the internet at http www adobe com The electronic version of the manual has many advantages e Keyword and phrase search feature e Figures tables and internet addresses are linked so that clicking on the item will display the associated feature or open the website e A list of chapters and sections as well as thumbnails of each page are displayed to the left of the text e Entries in the table of contents are linked to the corresponding locations in the manual e Ability to print sections or all of the manual Additional documentation for the Model 6200E UV Fluorescence H S Analyzer is available from Teledyne Analytical Instruments website at http www teledyne api com manuals e APICOM software manual part number 03945 e Multi drop manual part number 01842 e DAS Manual part number 02837 1 1 Using This Manual This manual h
291. nitiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes are provided through a 10 pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer s rear panel These are opto isolated digital inputs that are activated when a 5 VDC signal from the U pin is connected to the respective input pin 140 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 23 Control Input Pin Assignments INPUT STATUS CONDITION WHEN ENABLED A External Zero Cal Zero calibration mode is activated The mode field of the display will read ZERO CAL R B External Span Cal Span calibration mode is activated The mode field of the p display will read SPAN CAL R C External Low Low span mid point calibration mode is activated The mode Span Cal field of the display will read LO CAL R D Unused E Unused F Unused V Digital Ground Provided to ground an external device e g recorder U DC Power For Input for 5 VDC required to activate inputs A F This voltage Input Pull Ups can be taken from an external source or from the pin Internal 5v Internal source of 5V which can be used to activate inputs Supply when connected to pin U There are two methods to activate control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin is the most convenient method Figure 6 18 However to ensure that these inputs are truly isolated a separate external 5 VDC power supply should be used Figure 6 19 Figure 6 18 ZERO
292. nly be used to calibrate or check the instrument for one gas H2S or SO but not both 48 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software INSTRUMENT CHASSIS KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER SAMPLE GAS INLET SO Scrubber Gas Flow when multigas version of Tj duuuuuuuuuuuuuHEUEEEHEEN EXHAUST GAS M6200E analyzer is measuring 50 8 OUTLET Rae 1 1 EXHAUST TO OUTER H S SO L 1 LAYER OF KICKER SPAN GAS INLET LE LJ SAMPLE I LM CHAMBER ZERO AIR INLET PMT ds HYDROCARBON SCRUBBER KICKER SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR FLOW FLOW PRESSURE EAER SENSOR PCA REACTION CELL PURGE IZS PERMEATION TUBE EXIT ZERO AIR SCRUBBER ZS Permeation Tube H2S Source Figure 5 3 Pneumatic Diagram of the M6200E with IZS Options Installed The following table describes the state of each valve during the analyzer s various operational modes Table 5 2 125 Valve Operating States MODE VALVE CONDITION VALVE PORT CONNECTIONS Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet 322 SAMPLE Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span valve 122 ZERO CAL Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span valve 122 SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to SPAN GAS inlet 122
293. ns Range Any range from 50 parts per billion ppb to 10 parts per million ppm Ambient temperature range of 5 C to 40 C Line voltage range of 105 125 VAC or 220 240 VAC at 50 or 60 Hz Sample filter Equipped with PTFE filter element in the internal filter assembly Sample flow of 650 65 cc min Vacuum pump internal or external capable of 14 Hg absolute pressure 1 slpm or better Software settings Dynamic span OFF Dynamic zero OFF Dilution factor OFF AutoCal ON or OFF IND range ON or OFF Auto range ON or OFF Temp Pressure compensation ON Under the designation the analyzer may be operated with or without the following optional equipment Rack mount with or without chassis slides Zero span valve options Internal zero span IZS option with e H2S permeation tube 0 4ppm at 0 7 liter per minute certified uncertified e H2S permeation tube 0 8 ppm at 0 7 liter per minute certified uncertified Under the designation the IZS option cannot be used as the source of calibration 4 20mA isolated analog outputs Status outputs Control inputs RS 232 output Ethernet output Zero air scrubber 4 20mA isolated output 18 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Specifications Approvals and Warranty 2 3 CE Mark Compliance 2 3 1 Emissions Compliance The Teledyne Analytical Instruments UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer M6200E was tested and found to be fully compliant with EN6
294. ntration SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous display M P CAL H2S SPAN CONC 450 0 Conc ENTR EXIT M6200E Rev A1 161 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual STEP THREE Perform the zero span calibration SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X Set the Display to show the H2S a STB test function lt TST TST gt SETUP This function calculates the stability of the H2S os a measurement SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt SETUP v ACTION Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt ck SETUP M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT Press ENTR to changes the H2S STB X XXX PPB t OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the lt TST TST CONC EXIT SO measurements lt Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu y ACTION Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument The value of H2S STB may jump significantly
295. nutes 0 5 20 Duration of DAS hold off period TPC ENABLE ON enables temperature and pressure compensation OFF disables it RCELL SET 50 Reaction cell temperature set point and warning limits Warnings 45 55 IZS SET 50 IZS temperature set point and Warnings warning limits 45 55 DYN ZERO OFF ON enables contact closure dynamic zero OFF disables it DYN SPAN OFF ON enables contact closure dynamic span OFF disables it CONC PRECISION Number of digits to display to the right of the decimal point for concentrations on the display Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface CLOCK ADJ Sec Day Time of day clock speed adjustment LANGUAGE SELECT Selects the language to use for the user interface Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface MAINT TIMEOUT Time until automatically switching out of software controlled maintenance mode MEASURE PERIOD Minutes Length of time to measure each gas MEASURE DELAY Minutes How long to defer sampling after switching streams Conversion time for PMT and UV detector channels Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface CONV TIME M6200E Rev A 1 283 APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial 1 Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SETUP VARIABLE NUMERIC VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION UNITS DWEL
296. o keep it in good operating condition This section also includes information on using the iDAS to record diagnostic functions useful in predicting possible component failures before they happen 9 0 Theory of Operation An in depth look at the various principals by which your analyzer operates as well as a description of how the various electronic mechanical and pneumatic components of the instrument work and interact with each other A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the instrument s operation 10 0 Troubleshooting Section This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the instrument such as excessive noise or drift as well as instructions on performing repairs of the instrument s major subsystems 11 0 Electro static Discharge Primer This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is a significant concern and how to avoid it and avoid allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your analyzer 14 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual M6200E Documentation Appendices For easier access and better updating some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a series of appendices at the end of this manual These include software menu trees warning messages definitions of iDAS amp serial I O variables spare parts list repair questionnaire interconnect listing and drawings and electronic schematics N
297. o remotely configuration the instruments iDAS feature Figure 6 20 shows examples of APICOM s main interface which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front panel M6200E Rev A1 147 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 1 APIcom N XProjectsXAPI comNXScripts and dataXEngineering lab cfg File View Settings Help SiteName Connection n Instrument Status COM1 Direct Cable M700 700 COM2 Connected Direct Cable M2004 200 Modem Windows Modem M300 300 Ethernet TCP IP m M200E 2053 Connected b For Help press F1 INUM 2 1 200 at Eng lab 200 rack e x TEE ee peo Joe m prac n See 3 a mH MPscor nm Download graph save data Figure 6 20 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at http www teledyne api com software apicom 6 12 3 Additional Communications Documentation Table 6 26 Serial Interface Documents Interface Tool Document Title Part Number Available Online APICOM APICOM User Manual 039450000 YES Multi drop RS 232 Multi drop Documentation 021790000 YES DAS Manual Detailed description of the iDAS 028370000 YES These documents can be downloaded at http www teledyne api com manuals 148 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating
298. oam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric charges To prevent damage from ESD Teledyne Analytical Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed ant ESD containers Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti ESD container during shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure that you e Always unpack shipments from Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service by e Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti ESD work area e Carry the still sealed ant ESD bag tube or bin to the anti ESD work area e Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12 4 2 3 above when opening the anti ESD container at the work station e Reserve the anti ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne Analytical Instruments e Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service in anti ESD bins tubes or bags e Do not use pink poly bags e If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti ESD bags or containers available Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service department will supply them see Section 11 7 for contact information e Always follow steps 1 through 5 of Section 12 4 1 3 User Notes 272 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instr
299. ol Calibration 8 2 Level 1 Calibrations versus Level 2 Checks Essential to quality assurance are scheduled checks for verifying the operational status of the monitoring system The operator should visit the site at least once each week It is recommended Level 1 zero and span check conducted on the analyzer every two weeks Level 2 zero and span checks should be conducted at a frequency desired by the user Definitions of these terms are given in Table 8 4 In addition an independent precision check between 0 08 and 0 10 ppm must be carried out at least once every two weeks Table 8 3 summarizes the quality assurance activities for routine operations A discussion of each activity appears in the following sections To provide for documentation and accountability of activities a checklist should be compiled and then filled out by the field operator as each activity is completed Table 8 4 Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span Checks from Section 2 0 9 of Q A Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems LEVEL 1 ZERO AND SPAN CALIBRATION A Level 1 zero and span calibration is a simplified two point analyzer calibration used when analyzer linearity does not need to be checked or verified Sometimes when no adjustments are made to the analyzer the Level 1 calibration may be called a zero span check in which case it must not be confused with a Level 2 zero span check Since most analyzers have a reliably l
300. oling uu P ens e ENTRANCE Fan F r an e e Keypad RELAY PS 1 5 15 VDC AC POWER d Mother BOARD Board DC POWER 4 Temperature Sensors 4 PS 2 12 VDC PMT High Voltage Supply Pressure Sensor Gas Flow Sensor H2S gt SO Converter Heaters 1 B Sample Cal UV Source UV Source UV S TZS Option 1 Sample for 2 5 and Lamp Lamp gt ane 1 Permeation Chamber 1 125 Valve Shutter Power Tube Heaters 1 i Shutter i Options 1 Supply 1 Heater 1 Figure 10 18 Power Distribution Block Diagram A 6 75 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON OFF switch In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the analyzer CAUTION Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situation before turning the analyzer back on 10 6 Communications Interface The analyzer has several ways to communicate the with outside world see Figure 10 19 Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel keypad and display Direct two way communication with the CPU is also available by way of the analyzer s RS232 amp RS485 I O ports see Section 6 10 and 6 12 Alternatively an Ethernet communication option can be substituted for one of the Comm ports The analyzer can also send status information and data via the eight digital statu
301. ommunicates with the motherboard over the I C bus and is the main board for trouble shooting power problems of any kind 10 4 8 1 Heater Control The M6200E uses a variety of heaters for its individual components All heaters are AC powered and can be configured for 100 120 VAC or 220 230VAC at 50 60 Hz The two sample chamber heaters are electronically connected in parallel for analyzers at 100 120 VAC line power and in series for units configured for 220 230 VAC One configuration plug on the relay board determines the power configuration for the entire analyzer On units with IZS options installed an additional set of AC heaters is attached to the IZS permeation tube Some special M6200E models may have other non standard heating zones installed such as a dilution manifold In order to operate efficiently the HS gt SO converter must be heated to 315 C An AC band heater wrapped around the converter cartridge contains two heater coils that are also configured in parallel or in series depending on the Type of AC power being supplied A thermocouple imbedded in the heater measures the temperature and feeds a small voltage to the relay board s thermocouple amplifier which in turn transmits the linearized analog voltage to the motherboard This information is sent to the CPU via the instruments IC buss The CPU returns activate deactivate signals to the appropriate relay also via the 12 buss On units with IZS options installed an a
302. on CAUTION Whereas the editing adding and deleting of iDAS channels and parameters of one channel through the front panel keyboard can be done without affecting the other channels uploading an iDAS configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data parameters and channels by replacing them with the new iDAS configuration Backup of data and the original iDAS configuration is advised before attempting any iDAS changes 138 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 12 Remote Operation of the Analyzer 6 12 1 Remote Operation Using the External Digital I O 6 12 1 1 Status Outputs The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors which sink up to 50 mA of DC current These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLC s Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D NOTE Most PLC s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external device When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA At 50 mA the transistor will drop approximately 1 2V from its collec
303. on how to clean replace the critical flow orifice 7 Do not remove the sample and ozone nozzles They are Teflon threaded and require a special tool for reassembly If necessary the manifold with nozzles attached can be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath 8 Reassemble in proper order and re attach onto sensor housing Reconnect pneumatics and heater connections then re attach the pneumatic sensor assembly and the cleaning procedure is complete 9 3 7 Cleaning or Changing Critical Flow Orifices A critical flow orifice located on the exhaust manifold maintains the proper flow rate of gas through the M6200E analyzer Refer to section 10 3 3 for a detailed description of its functionality and location Despite the fact this these device is protected by sintered stainless steel filters it can on occasion clog particularly if the instrument is operated without a sample filter or in an environment with very fine sub micron particle size dust The M6200E introduces an orifice holder that makes changing the orifice very easy In fact it is recommended to keep spare orifice holder assemblies at hand to minimize downtime and swap orifices in a matter of a few minutes Appendix B lists several complete spare part kits for this purpose To clean or replace a critical flow orifice do the following e Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump Remove the analyzer cover and locate the reaction cell Section 3 1 and Figure 3 9 e Unscrew the 1
304. on rate of the IZS source Section 5 4 3 309 709 C Default 509 C 309 C 709 C Default 509 C DYN ZERO DYN SPAN 7 CONC PRECISION CLOCK ADJ Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the H5S response when performing a zero point calibration during an AutoCal Chapter 7 Dynamic span automatically adjusts slope and slope of the H5S response when performing a zero point calibration during an AutoCal Chapter 7 Note that the DYN ZERO and DYN SPAN features are not allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the right of the decimal point display of concentration and stability values Adjusts the speed of the analyzer s clock Choose the sign if the clock is too slow choose the sign if the clock is too fast ON OFF ON OFF AUTO 1 2 3 4 DefaultZAUTO 60 to 60 s day M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To access and navigate the VARS menu use the following key sequence COMM VARS DIAG SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting
305. on 50 Source of SAMPLE Gas VENT if input is pressurized Exhaust MODEL qo or H2S 6200E g At high condentration MODEL 701 Air Scrubber Zero Air Generator Figure 3 8 External Zero Zero Air Internal Zero Span Option IZS Option 51 Source of 5 SAMPLE Gas VENT if input is pressurized Ambient Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units with Valve Options 30 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual Getting Started NOTE Gas flow must be maintained at all times for units with IZS Options installed The IZS option includes a permeation tube which emits H2S Insufficient gas flow can build up H2S to levels that will damage the instrument Remove the permeation device when taking the analyzer out of operation UV Source Lap Particulate Filter ON OFF SWITCH Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker Hidden from view SO Scrubber PMT Housing Pump Assy PMT Preamp PCA Reaction Cell PMT Cooling System Relay Board elay Boar SO gt H2S Converter Molybdenum Converter PS2 12 VDC SO 5 H S Switching Valve IZS and ZS CS Valves Power Receptacle PC 104 Card Rear Panel S T Vacuum C a Manifold Mother Board Figure 3 9 M6200E Layout with 125 M6200E Rev A1 31 Getting Started Model 6200E I nstruction Manual 3 2 Initial Operation CAUTION Do not look at the UV lamp
306. on number Section 6 10 1 Example the Command 200 followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200 COMMAND is the command designator This string is the name of the command being issued LIST ABORT NAME EXIT etc Some commands may have additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed Press CR or refer to Appendix A 6 for a list of available command designators CR is a carriage return All commands must be terminated by a carriage return usually achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer Table 6 25 Command Types COMMAND COMMAND TYPE C Calibration D Diagnostic L Logon T Test measurement V Variable Warning 6 12 2 4 Data Types Data types consist of integers hexadecimal integers floating point numbers Boolean expressions and text strings e Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records a filter length etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by one or more digits For example 1 12 123 are all valid integers e Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers They consist of the two characters Ox followed by one or more hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f which is the C programming language convention No plus or minus sign is permitted For e
307. on when and how to replace the SO scrubber material 10 3 7 Pneumatic Sensors The M6200E uses two pneumatic sensors to verify gas streams These sensors are located on a printed circuit assembly called the pneumatic pressure flow sensor board 10 3 7 1 Sample Pressure Sensor An absolute pressure transducer plumbed to the input of the analyzer s sample chamber is used to measure the pressure of the sample gas before it enters the chamber This upstream used to validate the critical flow condition 2 1 pressure ratio through the instrument s critical flow orifice Section 10 3 3 Also if the temperature pressure compensation TPC feature is turned on 216 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation Section 10 7 3 the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that calculation The actual pressure measurement is viewable through the analyzer s front panel display as the test function PRESS 10 3 7 2 Sample Flow Sensor A thermal mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer This sensor is also mounted on the pneumatic pressure flow sensor board upstream of the sample chamber The flow rate is monitored by the CRT which issues a warning message FLOW WARN if the flow rate is too high or too low The flow rate of the sample gas is viewable via the front panel as the SAMP FL test function M6200E Rev A1 217 Theory Of Operation Model 6
308. onfigure the analyzer s Ethernet properties See your network administrator To view the above properties press Y SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DHCP ON gt lt TST gt CAL SETUP SET gt EXIT SAMPLE ENTER x PASS 818 INST IP 0 0 0 0 8 1 8 ENTR SET SET EXIT SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU GATEWAY IP 0 0 0 0 EDIT Key Disabled CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SET SET EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 gt COMM EXIT SET SET EXIT SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET EXIT SET SET EXIT P From this point on EXIT returns to HOSTNAME M101E COMMUNICATIONS MENU SET EXIT Don not alter unless directed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel M6200E Rev A1 109 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 10 6 3 Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses There are several circumstances when you may need to manually configure the interface settings of the analyzer s Ethernet card The INET sub menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card s configuration properties e Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package e The DHCP software is unable to initialize the analyzer s interface e You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the o
309. or SO measurement by substituting SO span gas for the H2S span gas listed See Section 7 8 for instructions for performing calibration checks on analyzers configured for multigas measurement mode To carry out a calibration check rather than a full calibration follow these steps STEP ONE Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7 1 STEP TWO Perform the zero span calibration check procedure ACTION Supply the instrument with zero gas Y SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X Scroll the display to the H2S STB test function lt TST TST gt SETUP SAMPLE H2S STB XXX X PPB XXX X Wait until H2S TST TST gt STB is below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes ACTION Record the H2S concentration reading SAMPLE 25 zXXX X lt TST TST gt SETUP The value of H2S STB may jump significantly Wait until it falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes ACTION Supply span gas to the instrument ACTION SAMPLE H2S XXX X Record theH S concentration TST TST gt SETUP reading The SPAN key appears during the transition from zero to span You may see both keys M6200E Rev A1 163 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual 7 4 Manual Calibration with Zero Span Valves Zero and Span calibrations using the Zero Span Valve option are similar to that described in Section 7 2 exce
310. or affected by the circuitry of the keyboard display interface 10 7 Software Operation The M6200E H5S analyzer is at its heart a high performance 386 based microcomputer running MS DOS Inside the DOS shell special software developed by Teledyne Analytical Instruments interprets user commands via the various interfaces performs procedures and tasks stores data in the CPU s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the sample gas M6200E Rev A1 235 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual DOS Shell API FIRMWARE Memory Handlin Analyzer Operations Calibration Procedures IDAS Records Configuration Procedures PC 104 BUS Calibration Data Autonomic Systems System Status Data Diagnostic Routines ANALYZER HARDWARE Interface Handlin M Sensor input Data easurement Display Messages Algorithm Keypad H2S amp SO Analog Output Data PC 104 BUS RS232 amp RS485 External Digital 1 0 Figure 10 22 Basic Software Operation 10 7 1 Adaptive Filter The M6200E analyzer software processes sample gas measurement and reference data through a built in adaptive filter built into the software Unlike other analyzers that average the sensor output signal over a fixed time period the M6200E calculates averages over a set number of samples During operation the software automatically switches betwee
311. or stuck valve driver chip status ON or OFF broken D8 green Valve 1 sample cal valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck valve driver chip status ON or OFF broken D9 green Valve 2 auto zero valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck valve driver chip status ON or OFF broken D10 green Valve 3 SO SOx valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck valve driver chip status ON or OFF broken Dii green Valve 4 Spare N A N A 12 green Valve 5 Spare N A N A D13 green Valve 6 Spare N A N A 14 green Valve 7 Spare N A N A D15 green Mosfet1 Unused N A N A D16 Green Mosfet2 Unused N A N A 1 Special configurations only Only active for instruments with Z S valve or IZS options installed 11 2 Gas Flow Problems The standard M6200E has one main flow path With the IZS option installed there is a second flow path flow path through the IZS oven that runs whenever the IZS is on standby to purge H2S from the oven chamber The IZS flow is not measured and is not available from the front panel The full flow diagrams of the standard configuration Figure 3 10 and with options installed Figure 5 2 and 5 3 help in trouble shooting flow problems In general flow problems can be divided into three categories e Flow is too high e Flow is greater than zero but is too low and or unstable e Flow is zero no flow When troubleshooting flow problems it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the analyzer s flow disp
312. ount varies from output M6200E Rev A1 91 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual to output and from instrument to instrument you will need to measure the change in the current with a current meter placed in series with the output circuit Figure 6 6 See Table 3 2 for pin assignments of the Analog Out connector on the rear panel Recording Analyzer H Device Figure 6 6 Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs NOTE Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press 92 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions v the channel then beep a FROM ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU D instrument attempt to automatically m v EXIT DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIN CALIBRATED NO v SET EDIT EXIT y y DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CURR Z 0 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 Press SET gt to select the analog output channel to be configured DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 ZERO 27 mV lt SET se EDIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CURR NO CAL U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT Increase or decrease the current output by 100
313. ovides a ON OFF or ON ENABLED convenient means to temporarily disable a data channel CAL HOLD OFF Disables sampling of data parameters while OFF OFF or ON instrument is in calibration mode Note that when enabled here there is also a length of the DAS HOLD OFF after calibration mode which is set in the VARS menu Section 6 11 2 11 6 11 1 2 iDAS Parameters Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the iDAS For each Teledyne Analytical Instruments analyzer model the list of available data parameters is different fully defined and not customizable Appendix A 5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the M6200E The most common parameters are concentrations of measured gases H2S H2S and NO temperatures of heated zones converter sample chamber box temperature pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as well as calibration data slope and offset for each gas Most data parameters have associated measurement units such as mV ppb cm3 min etc although some parameters have no units The only units that can be changed are those of the concentration readings according to the SETUP RANGE settings Note that the iDAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and iDAS data files may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data acquisition Each data parameter has user configurable functions that d
314. owing key sequence From the DATA ACQUISITION menu see Section 6 12 2 2 Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP 0 CONC ATIMER 2 900 Exits to the main PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT 4 Data Acquisition menu SETUP SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT 4 Press SET key until NUMBER OF RECORDS 000 SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT SETUP X X EDIT RECOPRDS DELET DATA YES will delete all data in this channel 4 NO returns to the gt previous menu ENTR accepts the new Toggle keys to set number of records 1 99999 4 0 0 SETUP X X REPORT PERIODD DAYS 0 ENTR EXIT setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu M6200E Rev A1 133 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 11 2 7 RS 232 Report Function The M6200E iDAS can automatically report data to the communications ports where they can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user To enable automatic COM port reporting follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press G the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP 0 ATIMER 2 4032 Exits to the main PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Rata Acquisition
315. p information will need to be re entered unless the firmware revision has not changed and the analyzer is equipped and properly configured with an EEPROM chip Whenever changing the version of installed software the memory must be reset Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the analyzer to malfunction and invalidate measurements Note especially that the A D converter must be re calibrated and all information collected in step 1 above must be re entered before the instrument will function correctly 11 6 2 Flash Chip Replacement or Upgrade The M6200E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips The standard configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity which is used to store a backup of the analyzer configuration as created during final checkout at the factory Replacing this chip will erase that backup configuration which will be replaced with a new copy when restarting the analyzer However if the firmware and or the DOC is changed at the same time all analyzer configuration settings and iDAS data will be lost In this case refer to the previous section on how to back up your settings Adding a second EEPROM chip to the existing chip will double memory but this procedure will require a BIOS configuration Contact the factory for details 1 Turn off power to the instrument fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws 2 When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer loc
316. p ratio and the amount of stray light present and measurements of the temperature and pressure of the sample gas to compute the final H2S concentration This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in the unit s internal data acquisition system and reported to the user through a vacuum fluorescent display or as electronic data via several communication ports This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in the unit s internal data acquisition system iDAS Section 6 11 and reported to the user through a vacuum fluorescent display or several communication ports 10 1 Measurement Principle 10 1 1 H2S Conversion The M6200E H5S analyzer is basically a SO analyzer with a H2S gt SO conversion stage inserted into the gas stream before the sample gas enters the sample chamber The H2S to SO2 converter receives sample gas from which the SO2 has been removed by a scrubber Once the naturally occurring SO is removed from the sample gas the special converter changes the H5S in the sample stream to SO using a high temperature catalytic oxidation The chemical process is 2H S 30 2H 0 250 The converter is a heated stainless steel core containing a catalyst across which the sample gas passes just before induction into the reaction cell The temperature of the converter is maintained by a heater controlled by the CPU via the
317. p ration used in determining the H2S SO concentration s see 10 2 2 PRESSURE CALIBRATION The analyzer records the current output of DIAG PCAL the sample gas pressure sensor This value is used by the CPU to 6 9 8 compensate the H2S concentration when the TPC feature is enabled FLOW CALIBRATION This function is used to calibrate the gas flow DIAG FCAL output signals of sample gas and ozone supply These settings are 6 9 9 retained when exiting DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT Configures the A4 analog output channel DIAG TCHN 6 9 10 M6200E Rev A1 81 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 9 1 Accessing the Diagnostic Features To access the DIAG functions press the following keys SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DIAG ANALOG I CONFIGURATION lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DIAG OPTIC TEST EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE 8 1 8 ENTR PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT display EXIT returns SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST to the PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Lo From this point SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG LAMP CALIBRATION forward EXIT returns to the M SECONDARY COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP MENU IF y DIAG SIGNAL 1 0 DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION NEXT ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT DI
318. pe but are designed to have different effusion rates Since the M6200E can be configured as either a H2S or SO analyzer both types of permeation tubes are included here OPTION GAS EFFUSION RATE APPROXIMATE SPECIFIED FLOW TYPE x 25 CONCENTRATION RATE OPT 52 H2S 106 ng min 800 1200 ppb 0 76 Ipm OPT 53 SO 421 ng min 300 500 ppb 0 76 Opt 54 H2S 53 ng min 400 600 ppb 0 76 Ipm OPT 55 SO 842 ng min 600 1000 ppb 0 76 OPT 57 SO 222 ng min 800 1200 ppb 0 56 Each tube comes with a calibration certificate traceable to a NIST standard specifying its actual effusion rate of that tube to within 5 when immersed in a gas stream moving at the specified flow rate This calibration is performed at a tube temperature of 50 C NOTE The instrument can only be fitted with one type of permeation tube at a time Therefore the IZS option can only be used to calibrate or check the instrument for one gas H S or SO but not both 5 4 4 Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit Option 43 This kit includes the following items needed to refurbish the zero air scrubber included with the IZS valve options TELEDYNE ANALYTICAL DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENTS PART NO 005960000 Activated charcoal FLO000001 Sintered filter for span gas inlet fitting FL0000003 Replacement particulate filter ORO0000001 O Ring qty 2 Formatted Bullets and Numbering M6
319. ppens quickly it is not instantaneous Because it is not instantaneous it is possible for the extra energy possessed by the excited electron of the SO molecule to be given off as kinetic energy during a collision with another molecule This in effect heats the other molecule slightly and allows the excited electron to move into a lower energy orbit without emitting a photon M6200E Rev A1 211 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual The most significant interferents in this regard are nitrogen oxide NO carbon dioxide CO water vapor H20 and molecular oxygen O In ambient applications the quenching effect of these gasses is negligible For stack applications where the concentrations of some or all of these may be very high specific steps MUST be taken to remove them from the sample gas before it enters the analyzer 10 2 6 5 Light Pollution Because M6200E measures light as a means of calculating the amount of SO present obviously stray light can be a significant interfering factor The Model 6200E removes this interference source in several ways The sample chamber is designed to be completely light tight to light from sources other than the excitation UV source lamp All pneumatic tubing leading into the sample chamber is completely opaque in order to prevent light from being piped into the chamber by the tubing walls The optical filters discussed in section 10 2 4 remove UV with wavelengths extraneous to
320. produce good results If the instrument is installed in an environment with variable or high humidity variations in the permeation tube output will be significant In this case a dryer for the supply air is recommended dew point should be 20 C or less The IZS option is heated with a proportional heater circuit and the temperature is maintained at 50 C 1 Check the IZS TEMP function via front panel display Section 6 2 1 and the 260 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR IZS TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I O function under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 At 50 C the temperature signal from the IZS thermistor should be around 2500 mV 11 5 17 Box Temperature The box temperature sensor thermistor is mounted on the motherboard at the bottom right corner of the CPU board when looking at it from the front It cannot be disconnected to check its resistance Box temperature will vary with but will always read about 5 C higher than ambient room temperature because of the internal heating zones from the H2S converter sample chamber and other devices To check the box temperature functionality we recommend to check the BOX TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I O function under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 At about 30 C 5 above typical room temperature the signal should be around 1500 mV We recommend to use a certified or calibrated external thermometer temperature sensor to
321. provide the heat source These heaters operate off of the instrument s main AC power and are controlled by the CPU through a power relay on the relay board A thermistor also embedded in the bottom of the sample chamber reports the cell s temperature to the CPU through the thermistor interface circuitry of the motherboard M6200E Rev A1 221 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual 10 4 4 Photo Multiplier Tube PMT The M6200E uses a photo multiplier tube PMT to detect the amount of fluorescence created by the H2S and O3 reaction in the sample chamber PMT Input Signal Connector PMT Temperature Sensor Heat Sink Insulator Cold Block PMT Output Signal Connector High Voltage Power Supply Optical Test LED Light from Reaction Chamber shines through hole in side of Cold Block TEC located between Cold Block and Heat Sink Figure 10 13 PMT Assembly A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes Photons from the reaction are filtered by an optical high pass filter enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons A high voltage potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an array of high voltage dynodes The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each stage multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple new electrons The greatly
322. pt that Zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets rather than through the sample inlet The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys CALZ amp CALS STEP ONE Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the rear panel Figure 3 2 as shown below Source of SAMPLE Gas MODEL 700 Gas Dilution Calibrator with generator option VENT if input is pressurized Sample Exhaust M D E L 6200E External Zero MODEL 701 Air Scrubber Zero Air Calibrated H4S amp Air At high concentrati enerator Filter Figure 7 2 Setup for Manual Calibration with Z S Valve Option Installed 164 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures Step Two Set the expected H2S Span gas value The H2S span concentration values automatically default to 450 0 Conc To change this value to the actual concentration of the span gas enter the number by pressing the key under each digit until the expected value appears The span gas concentration should always be 90 of the selected reporting range EXAMPLE Reporting range 800 ppb Span gas conc 720 ppb SAMPLE M P CAL TST TST gt lt TST TST gt CAL RANGE 500 0 PPB RANGE 500 00 PPB ZERO XXX X M P CAL H2S SPAN CONC 45
323. r 3 Locates the SO2 scrubber cartridge in the front of the analyzer looks like a big white cylinder See Figure 3 9 4 Undo the two 1 8 inch fittings on the top of the scrubber 5 Remove the two screws holding the scrubber to the instrument chassis and remove the scrubber 6 Take the two Teflon fitting off the instrument 7 Empty the SO scrubbing material in to a hazmat bin 8 Fill each side of the scrubber with new 502 scrubber material until it is V an inch from the bottom of the thread lines so about inches from the top of the scrubber do not fill it to high or the fitting will crush the material 9 Remove the Teflon tape from both of the removed fittings and re tape them with new Teflon tape M6200E Rev A1 195 Instrument Maintenance Model 6200E Instruction Manual 10 Install both fittings back onto the scrubber 11 Put the scrubber back into the analyzer and replace the two screws on the bottom 12 Screw the two 1 8 fittings back onto the top of the scrubber they can be hooked up either way 13 Return analyzer to normal operation 9 3 4 Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber The chemicals in the external scrubber need to be replaced periodically according to Table 9 1 or as needed This procedure can be carried out while the instrument is running Make sure that the analyzer is not in ZERO calibration mode 1 Locate the scrubber on the outside rear panel Figure 9 2 shows an exploded view of t
324. r 7 6 2 Sample Mode This is the analyzer s standard operating mode In this mode the instrument is analyzing H2S and calculating concentrations 6 2 1 Test Functions A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in SAMPLE mode These parameters provide information about the present operating status of the instrument and are useful during troubleshooting Section 11 1 2 They can also be recorded in one of the iDAS channels Section 6 11 for data analysis To view the test functions press one of the TST TST keys repeatedly in either direction 60 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 2 Test Functions Defined DISPLAY PARAMETER UNITS DESCRIPTION RANGE Range PPB PPM The full scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer s 2 UGM amp ANALOG OUTPUTS are currently set THIS IS NOT the physical range MGM of the instrument Rangei If IND or AUTO Range modes have been selected two RANGE Range2 functions will appear one for each range H2S STB Stability mV Standard deviation of Concentration readings Data points are recorded every ten seconds The calculation uses the last 25 data points PRES Sample in Ho A The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the sample Pressure 9 chamber measured between the H2S and Auto Zero valves 3 mi T i SAMP
325. r check Each mode has seven parameters that control operational details of the sequence Table 7 3 Table 7 3 AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters Attribute Name ACTION Timer Enabled Turns on the Sequence timer Starting Date Sequence will operate on Starting Date Starting Time Sequence will operate at Starting Time Delta Days Number of days to skip between each sequence Delta Time Incremental delay on each Delta Day that the sequence starts Duration Duration of the sequence in minutes Calibrate Enable to do dynamic zero span calibration disable to do a cal check only This must be set to OFF for units used in US EPA applications and with IZS option installed NOTE The programmed STARTING TIME must be a minimum of 5 minutes later than the real time clock See Section 6 6 for setting real time clock M6200E Rev A1 173 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual NOTE Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day Any new sequence which is initiated whether from a timer the COM ports or the contact closure inputs will override any sequence which is in progress NOTE If at any time an illegal entry is selected Example Delta Days gt 367 the ENTR key will disappear from the display The following example sets Sequence2 to carry out a zero span calibration every other day starting at 01 00 on September 4 2002 lasting 15 minutes
326. r that screens out photons with wavelengths outside the spectrum required to excite SO into SO Figure 10 4 10 2 4 2 PMT Optical Filter The PMT used in the Model 6200E reacts to a wide spectrum of light which includes much of the visible spectrum and most of the UV spectrum Even though the 214 nm light used to excite the SO is focused away from the PMT some of it scatters in the direction of the PMT as it interacts with the sample gas A second optical bandpass filter placed between the sample chamber see Figure 10 2 and the PMT strips away light outside of the fluorescence spectrum of decaying SO2 see Figure 10 5 including reflected UV form the source lamp and other stray light PMT OPTICAL FILTER BANDWIDTH 100 1 2 ee 105 _ 5 za Bs LES Og az se ae al 10 __ _4 _ _ eee 10 1 1 ae 10 1 ae SO FLUORESCENT SPECTRUM 100 200 300 400 500 WAVELENGTH nm Figure 10 5 PMT Optical Filter Bandwidth M6200E Rev A1 209 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual 10 2 5 Optical Lenses Two optical lenses are used to focus and optimize the path of light through the sample chamber If source UV is unfocused PMT When source UV is focused PMT receives fluorescence from area and Reference Detector view outside Reference Detector s view similar volume of 0 Reference Detector
327. r the two outputs press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X E SETUP X X RANGE MODE DUAL lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP RANGE CONTROL MENU 8 1 8 ENTR MODE SET UNIT EXIT Oo SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X LOW RANGE 500 0 Conc CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 0 1 ENTR EXT Toggle the Numeral Keys Y to set the upper limit of each SETUP XX RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP X X HIGH RANGE 500 0 Conc range MODE SET UNIT EXIT 0 0 5 0 ENTR EXT SETUP X X RANGE MODE SNGL SETUPXX RANGE CONTROL MENU EXIT Returns to the Main SNGEUIND AUTO EDUC MODE SET UNIT EXIT SAMPLE Display NOTE In INDEPENDENT range mode the two reporting ranges have separate slopes and offsets for computing concentration and MUST be independently calibrated 74 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions NOTE On analyzers with the multigas option activated see section 5 5 and Section 6 8 1 the titles displayed on the instruments front panel during the previous operation appear as LOW range appears as SO2 RANGE high range appears as H2S RANGE As the instrument switches from H S mode to SO mode and back only the reporting range and analog output associated with the gas currently being measured will be active The reporting range and analog output
328. range is 0 to 20 000 ppb The proper physical range is determined by the software to include the maximum measurement concentration selected by the user Once properly calibrated the analyzer s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its 0 and 20 000 ppb physical range Because most applications use only a small part of the analyzer s two physical ranges the width of the Model 6200E s physical range can create data resolution problems for most analog recording devices For example in an application where the expected concentration of SO is typically less than 500 ppb the full scale of expected values is only 0 25 of the instrument s 20 000 ppb physical range Unmodified the corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 0 25 of the range of the recording device The M6200E solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application Only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered 6 7 3 Reporting Range Modes The M6200E provides three analog output range modes to choose from The actual signals output on the two analog signal channels depends on whether or not the analyzer includes a SO2 H2S multigas measurement option and if so which measurement mode is sele
329. re is no available grounded plug Also anti ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor usually around one meg ohm that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument s power supply Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient While this may temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re build In some conditions a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few seconds Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti ESD storage bags or bins Even when you are not working on them store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti Static bag or bin This will prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through the it Use metallic anti ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies rather than pink poly bags The famous pink poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid similar to liquid laundry detergent which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag it does not prevent the build up of static charges If laying on a conductive grounded surface these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very cha
330. re they affect the functionality of the analyzer The secondary use is for data analysis documentation and archival in electronic format To support the iDAS functionality Teledyne Analytical Instruments offers APICOM a program that provides a visual interface for remote or local setup configuration and data retrieval of the iDAS M6200E Rev A1 119 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual Section 6 11 The APICOM manual which is included with the program contains a more detailed description of the iDAS structure and configuration which is briefly described in this section The M6200E is configured with a basic iDAS configuration which is enabled by default New data channels are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or occasional use Note that iDAS operation is suspended while its configuration is edited through the front panel To prevent such data loss it is recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for iDAS changes The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel which indicates the analyzer status also indicates certain aspects of the iDAS status Table 6 19 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS LED STATE IDAS STATUS Off System is in calibration mode Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods concentration data are typically not sampled diagnostic data should be
331. return line feed pair which terminates the message The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy structure Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was issued hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble shooting and reference purposes Terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review 6 12 2 6 Remote Access by Modem The M6200E can be connected to a modem for remote access This requires a cable between the analyzer s COM port and the modem typically a DB 9F to DB 25M cable available from Teledyne Analytical Instruments with part number WR0000024 Once the cable has been connected check to make sure the DTE DCE is in the correct position Also make sure the M6200E COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem which needs to operate with an 8 bit word length with one stop bit The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode Mode 64 Section 6 10 8 Once this is completed the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer The default setting for this feature is AT YO amp DO amp HO amp IO SO 2 amp BO amp N6 amp MO EO Q1 amp WO This string can be altered to match your modem s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long To change this setting press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0
332. returns HIMM PREV NEXT SET N ON P e This is 24 hr SET SET EDIT EXIT Menu clock PM hours are Sequence Delta Time 13 24 MODE Delta Days SETUP STARTING TIME 00 00 Example PAS EM ot 15 1 04 11 5 ENTR EXIT With dynamic calibration turned on the state of the internal setup variables DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and offset values for the H2S response each time the AutoCal program runs This continuous re adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask subtle fault conditions in the analyzer It is recommended that if dynamic calibration is enabled the analyzer s test functions slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data from the instrument M6200E Rev A1 175 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual 7 9 1 Autocal of instruments in INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reporting Range Modes If the analyzer is being operated in IND or AUTO Range mode then the High and Low ranges must be specified as part of the Auto Cal set up This parameter appears at the end of the programming sequences after the CALIBRATE ON OFF parameter is set For example Follow standard AutoCal programming process to this point then SETUP X X CALIBRATE ON SET SET EDIT y SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL LOW lt SET EDIT y SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL LOW HIGH ENT
333. rform the zero span check SAMPLE CALZ RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S XXX X SETUP Scroll to the H2S STB test function 4 ISI St SAMPLE Wait until 25 STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ H2S STB XXX X PPB CALS SETUP ACTION Record the minutes ZERO CAL M y lt TST TST gt ZERO H2S readings presented in the upper right corner of the display The value of H2S STB may jump CONC EXIT SAMPLE ACTION lt TST TST gt CAL CALS SETUP Record the H2S readings significantly Wait presented in the until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes SPAN CAL M lt TST TST gt upper right corner of the display H2S XXX X EXIT returns to the main GONG EXIT LN SAMPLE display 170 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 7 Manual Calibration in INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reporting Range Modes If the analyzer is being operated in IND or AUTO Range mode then the High and Low ranges must be independently checked When the analyzer is in either Independent or Auto Range modes the user must run a separate calibration procedure for each range After pressing the CAL CALZ or CALS keys the user is prompted for the range that is to be calibrated as seen in the CALZ example
334. rges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device Also the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag Anti Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal usually silvery in color provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink poly bags but also when properly sealed create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon usually black in color are also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti ESD bag The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape such as Scotch tape from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away M6200E Rev A1 269 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Model 6200E Instruction Manual 12 4 2 Basic anti ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument Rack When working on the analyzer while it is in the instr
335. ring interactive tasks Concentration Field Displays the actual concentration of H2S in the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer Switches to indicate SO concentration if when the instrument is configured for SO measurement or between H S and SO when the instrument is in multigas measurement mode Keypad Definition Field Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display These definitions dynamic context sensitive and software driven M6200E Rev A1 233 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual 10 6 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface Electronics to Relay Board I C to from CPU Key Press Detect Display Controller Keyboard Interrupt Status Bit Display Data Decoder Display Power Watchdog Parallel Data Display Write From 5 VDC Power Supply Optional Maintenance LED L Y 2x40 CHAR VACUUM FLUORESCENT DISPLAY Beeper Sample LED Green Cal LED Yellow Fault LED Red KEYBOARD FRONT PANEL Figure 10 21 Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram The keyboard display interface electronics of the M6200E Analyzer watches the status of the eight front panel keys alerts the CPU when keys are depressed translates data from parallel to serial and back and manages communications between the keyboard the CPU and the front panel display Except for the K
336. rly Reconnect the grounding clamp around the heater leads for safe Re attach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the insulation and cover Replace the instrument cover and power up the analyzer 9 3 6 Cleaning the Sample chamber The sample chamber should be cleaned whenever troubleshooting suggests A dirty sample chamber will cause excessive noise drifting zero or span values or low response To clean the sample chamber it is necessary to remove it from the sensor housing Use the following guide 1 Turn off the instrument power and vacuum pump 2 Disconnect the black 1 4 exhaust tube and the 1 8 sample and ozone air tubes from the sample chamber Disconnect the heater thermistor cable Remove four screws holding the sample chamber to the PMT housing and lift the cell and manifold out M6200E Rev A1 199 Instrument Maintenance Model 6200E Instruction Manual 4 The sample chamber will separate into two halves the stainless steel manifold assembly and the black plastic sample chamber with window stainless steel cylinder and O rings 5 The sample chamber both plastic part and stainless steel cylinder and glass window should be cleaned with de ionized water and a clean lint free cloth and dried thereafter 6 Usually it is not necessary to clean the sample and ozone flow orifices since they are protected by sintered filters If tests show that cleaning is necessary refer to section 9 3 7 below
337. rminal 3 Command Syntax 4 Data TVBES uices ee iren de te ten e xx ten Eh En ka te KE Ven RR 5 6 7 DANA Bee Bee 6 6 12 6 m Hm Noes NNNNNNAYNNNNNNNNNND 33324 o RR ooooooguyoooooooogoo e Status 9 Remote Access by Modem COM Port Password Security 8 APICOM Remote Control Additional Communications Documentation Using the M6200E with a Hessen Protocol Network 4 1 General Overview of Hessen Protocol 4 2 Hessen COMM Port Configuration 3 Activating Hessen Protocol 4 Selecting a Hessen Protocol 5 6 2 2 2 s 2 v2 2 2 wa PRP RRR RE Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode Hessen Protocol Gas 0 6 12 4 7 Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags 6 12 4 8 Instrument ID Code gt B me 2 eo m gt c m alibration Preparations we Required Equipment Supplies and Expendables 7 C 7 1 2 3 Gas Standards 4 Permeation
338. ronic Block Diagram 218 M6200E Rev Al Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer that controls various internal processes interprets data makes calculations and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Analytical Instruments It communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices through a separate printed circuit assembly to which the CPU is mounted the motherboard The motherboard is directly mounted to the rear panel and collects data performs signal conditioning duties and routs incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the analyzer s other major components Concentration data of the M6200E are generated by the photo multiplier tube PMT which produces an analog current signal corresponding to the brightness of the fluorescence reaction in the sample chamber This current signal is amplified to a DC voltage signal front panel test parameter PMT by a PMT preamplifier printed circuit assembly located on top of the sensor housing PMT is converted to digital data by a bi polar analog to digital converter located on the motherboard In addition to the PMT signal a variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer s major components again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard These status reports are used as data for th
339. rotection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty 11 6 1 Disk on Chip Replacement Replacing the Disk on Chip DOC will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost unless the replacement chip carries the exact same firmware version If the analyzer is equipped with at least one EEPROM flash chip the configuration settings are stored in a backup file on the EEPROM It is recommended to document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed such as calibration range auto cal analog output serial port and other settings before replacing the chip 1 Turn off power to the instrument fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws 2 When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer locate the Disk on Chip in the right most socket of the CPU board The chip should carry a label with firmware M6200E Rev A1 261 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual revision date and initials of the programmer Remove the IC with a dedicated IC removal tool or by gently prying it up from the socket Do not bend the connector pins 3 Install the new Disk on Chip making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the socket It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket Press the chip all the way in 4 Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine Generally all of the setu
340. roximately 60 of device failures are the result of damage due to electro static discharge Table 12 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY DEVICE VOLTAGE RANGE DAMAGE BEGINS CATASTROPHIC OCCURRING AT DAMAGE AT MOSFET 10 100 VMOS 30 1800 NMOS 60 100 GaAsFET 60 2000 EPROM 100 100 JFET 140 7000 SAW 150 500 Op AMP 190 2500 CMOS 200 3000 Schottky Diodes 300 2500 Film Resistors 300 3000 ee 300 7000 ECL 500 500 SCR 500 1000 Schottky TTL 500 2500 266 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Potentially damaging electro static discharges can occur Any time a charged surface including the human body discharges to a device Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of an sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage A similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object such as a metallic tool or fixture When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface such as packaging materials work surfaces machine surfaces or other device In some cases charged device discharges can be the most destructive A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function If the assembly is car
341. rrently displayed Parameter Use to configure the functions for this Parameter Deletes the Parameter currently displayed M6200E Rev A1 129 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter press FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU see previous section SETUP 0 PARAM S2SCN1 MODE AVG PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT SETUP PARAMETERS S2SCN1 SET gt EDIT EXIT p PREV NEXT SETUP PARAMETERS S2SCN1 ENTR EXIT J Y Cycle through list of available Parameters SET SET gt EDIT SETUP SAMPLE MODE AVG EXIT SETUP SAMPLE MODE INST INST AVG MIN MAX 2 Es Press the key for the desired mode SET SET gt EDIT SETUP PRECISION 1 EXIT SETUP PRECISION 1 Lp 1 EXIT p Set for 0 4 lt SET EDIT SETUP X X STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF EXIT SETUP X X STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF OFF ENTR EXIT p gt Turn ON or OFF 6 11 2 5 Sample Period and Report Period 3 ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous SET Returns to previous Functions The iDAS defines two
342. rrx tht hein 260 11 5 17 mH eene 261 11 5 18 PMT Temperature 261 11 6 Repair Procedures cssessssssee menn 261 11 6 1 Disk on Chip 261 11 6 2 Flash Chip Replacement or Upgrade 262 11 6 3 Factory Cal PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration 262 11 7 Technical Assistance n 264 12 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE 265 12 1 How Static Charges are S 265 12 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause Damage mene 266 12 3 Common Myths About ESD Damage 267 12 4 Basic Principles of Static Control essen 268 12 41 General E uere Id Beceem d 268 12 4 2 Basic anti ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance 270 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument 270 12 4 2 2 Working at a Anti ESD Work 270 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack To Bench and 271 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from and Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Analytical Instruments Cu
343. rs to enhance performance The first stage conditions the UV light used to excite the SO by removing frequencies of light that are not needed to produce SO The second stage protects the PMT detector from reacting to light not produced by the SO returning to its ground state 10 2 4 1 UV Source Optical Filter Zinc vapor lamps output light at other wavelengths beside the 214nm required for the SO gt SO transformation including a relatively bright light of the same wavelength at which SO2 fluoresces as it returns to its SO ground state 330 nm In fact the intensity of the light emitted by the UV lamp at 330nm is so bright nearly five orders of magnitude brighter than that resulting from the SO decay it would drown out the SO fluorescence 208 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation BEFORE LAMP OUTPUT Arbitrary Untis WAVELENGTH nm AFTER UV SOURCE OPTICAL FILTER BANDWIDTH m zo E 105 LN PAM on DL TER RE n m i0 M __ bl sr n Ee t 10 1 1 25 2 s 2 a E 10 1 z a 10 j E A 1 Ld SO FLUORESCENT SPECTRUM i OMS I Yep eu 100 200 300 400 500 WAVELENGTH nm Figure 10 4 Excitation Lamp UV Spectrum Before After Filtration To solve this problem the light emitted by the excitation UV lamp passes through a bandpass filte
344. ry SYSTEM RESET The computer has rebooted This message occurs at power on If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted Failed 5 VDC power Fatal error caused software to restart Loose connector wiring UV LAMP WARNING The UV lamp intensity is lt 600mV or gt 4995 mV UV lamp is bad Reference detector is bad Mother board analog sensor input circuitry has failed Fogged or damaged lenses filters in UV light path A D converter circuitry failure 1 Normally 29 92 in Hg at sea level decreasing at 1 in Hg per 1000 ft of altitude with no flow pump disconnected 11 1 2 Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools the TEST functions viewable from the front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer s theory of operation Section 10 We recommend use of the APICOM remote control program to download graph and archive TEST data for analysis and long term monitoring of diagnostic data The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Table A 3 in Appendix A 3 The actual values for these test functions on checkout at the factory were also listed in the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet which was shipped with the instrument Values outside the acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer s subsystems Functions with value
345. ry Setup Menu COMM amp VARS M6200 Rev A 1 279 APPENDI X A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual SETUP ENTER SETUP PASS 818 PASS MORE CLK CFG RNGE COMM VARS DIAG ID PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRINT MEASURE MODE DAS HOLD OFF TPC ENABLE RCELL SET IZS SET DYN ZERO DYN SPAN CONC PRECISION CLOCK ADJ COMM VARS MENU TREE Fig A 5 SET SET DHCP INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP SUBNET MASK TCP PORT HOSTNAME Go To DIAG MENU TREE Fig A 8 ON INSTRUMENT 1 5 GATEWAY 5 EDIT SUBNET MASKS TCP PORT 1 Only appears if a valve option is installed Only appears when the Ethernet card option 63 is installed Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the DHCP state do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON 5 INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP amp SUBNET MASK are only editable when DHCP is OFF Figure A 6 Secondary Setup Menu COMM Menu with Ethernet Card 280 M6200 Rev A 1 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual APPENDIX A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 SETUP ENTER SETUP PASS 818 CFG RNGE PASS CLK MORE COMM VARS DIAG ID HESN 1 COM2 SET SET EDIT _ oon SN VARIATION RE
346. rying a static charge as it is connected to ground a discharge will occur Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro static field a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to ground 12 3 Common Myths About ESD Damage e I didn t feel a shock so there was no electro static discharge The human nervous system isn t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that I didn t touch it so there was no electro static discharge Electro Static charges are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge It still works so there was no damage Sometimes the damaged caused by electro static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately More likely the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse weakening the trace This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time but even the very low voltage and current levels of the device s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over
347. s Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4 channel direct memory access DMA devices over data busses of either 8 bit or 16 bit bandwidth The CPU supports both RS 232 and RS 485 serial protocols Figure 10 11 shows the CPU M6200E Rev A1 219 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual RS 485 COM1 amp COM2 Disk on chip RS 232 485 Configuration jumper Flash EEPROM RS 485 enable jumper 2 i lt Figure 10 11 M6200E CPU Board The CPU includes two types of non volatile data storage one disk on chip and one or two flash chips 10 4 1 1 Disk On Chip While technically an EEPROM the disk on chip DOC appears to the CPU as behaves as and performs the same function in the system as an 8 mb disk drive It is used to store the computer s operating system the Teledyne Analytical Instruments firmware and most of the operational data generated by the analyzer s internal data acquisition system iDAS Sections 10 7 4 and 6 11 10 4 1 2 Flash Chip This non volatile memory includes 64 kb of space The M6200E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips The M6200E standard configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity which is used to store a backup of the analyzer configuration as created during final checkout at the factory Separating this data onto a less frequently accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of this key data getting corrupte
348. s a change in zero air source ambient air leaking into zero air line or a worn out zero air scrubber or a change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line e Once the instrument passes a leak check do a flow check Section 11 5 2 to make sure that the instrument is supplied with adequate sample gas e Confirm the UV lamp sample pressure and sample temperature readings are correct and steady e Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced 11 3 4 Inability to Span No SPAN Key In general the M6200E will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter If the calibration menu does not show a SPAN key when carrying out a span calibration the actual concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas concentration which can have several reasons e Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas concentration in the CONC sub menu 248 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Confirm that the H2S span gas source is accurate This can be done by comparing the source with another calibrated analyzer or by having the H2S source verified by an independent traceable photometer Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 5 1 Leaks can dilute the span gas and h
349. s long as the contacts remain closed If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer s AutoCal Section 7 9 feature and the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is enabled the M6200E will not re calibrate the analyzer until M6200E Rev A1 171 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual the contact is opened At this point the new calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode If the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is disabled the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode leaving the instrument s internal calibration variables unchanged 7 8 Manual Calibration in Multigas Measurement Mode If the analyzer is being operated in multigas measurement mode the methods and setups for performing calibrations are identical to those defined in Sections 7 2 and 7 4 with the two exceptions e Some provision must be made for supplying both types of calibrated span gas to the analyzer A typical setup for this might be Calibrated s At high concer Calibrated s At high concer MODEL 701 Zero Air Generator No Valve Options Installed Source of SAMPLE Gas Removed MODEL 700 Gas Dilution Calibrator with Ozone Bench Option during Calibration Sample Exhaust Span Zero Air Typical Setup for Manual Calibration of M6200E in Multigas Measurement Mode Figure 7 4 e The analyzer will ask to have the GAS TYPE specified at the beginning
350. s or about 5 V months 9 3 3 1 Predicting When the SO Scrubber Should Be Replaced To determine how long the SO scrubber will operate efficiently 194 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 9 Measure the amount of SO in the sample gas e If your M6200E has the multigas measurement options activated this can be done by following instructions found in Section 6 8 1 and selecting MEASURE MODE SO e Let the analyzer operate for 30 minutes then note the SO concentration 10 Divide 1 000 by the SO concentration EXAMPLE If the SO concentration is 125 ppb Operational hours 1000 ppm hr 0 125 ppm 100 000 ppb hr 125 ppb 8000 hrs Operational hours Operational hours 9 3 3 2 Checking the Function of the SO Scrubber To check to see if your SO scrubber is operating properly 11 With the analyzer set of HS measurement mode introduce gas mixture into the sample gas stream that includes SO at a concentration of at least 20 of the reporting range currently selected see Section 6 7 3 For example if the analyzer is set for a Single Range amp 500 ppb a concentration of 1000 ppb would be appropriate 12 An increase of more than 2 in the H2S reading is an indication that the efficiency of the scrubber is decreasing to the point that the absorbing material should be replaced 9 3 3 3 Changing the SO Scrubber Material 1 Input zero air for 5minutes 2 Turn off analyze
351. s output lines see Section 6 12 1 and the three analog outputs see Section 6 7 located on the rear panel as well as receive commands by way of the six digital control inputs also located on the rear pane see Section 6 12 2 M6200E Rev A1 231 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual COMM A Mae MEA COMM B gt Female EA Control Inputs ETHERNET hor OPTION Status Outputs T RS 232 ONLY RS 232 or RS 485 CPU Board PC 104 BUS V nux ICBUS DISPLAY RELAY BOARD Figure 10 19 Interface Block Diagram 10 6 1 Front Panel Interface MODE FIELD MESSAGE FIELD FASTENER ff SAMPLE lt TST TST gt CAL LOCKING SCREW CONCENTRATION FIELD STATUS LED s FASTENER RANGE 500 0 PPB 502 400 0 SETUP FLUORESCENCE SO2 ANALYZER MODEL 6200E KEY DEFINITIONS KEYBOARD ON OFF SWITCH Figure 10 20 M6200E Front Panel Layout 232 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation The most commonly used method for communicating with the M6200E UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer is via the instrument s front panel which includes a set of three status LEDs a vacuum florescent display and a keyboard with 8 context sensitive keys 10 6 1 1 Analyzer Status LED s Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instruments basic operating status Table 10 3 Front Panel
352. s that are within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure or a maintenance item A problem report worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these test functions The following table Table 11 2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range 242 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 11 2 Test Functions Possible Causes for Out Of Range Values TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR TEST FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE S H2S STB Unstable concentrations leaks SAMPLE FL Leaks clogged critical flow orifice PMT Calibration error HVPS problem PMT problem No flow leaks NORM PMT Calibration error HVPS problem PMT problem AZERO Leaks malfunctioning AutoZero valve HVPS HVPS broken preamp board circuit problems Malfunctioning heater relay board communication IC bus relay RCELL TEMP burnt out Environment out of temperature operating range broken BOX TEMP thermistor runaway heater TEC cooling circuit broken High chassis temperature 12V power PMT TEMP supply IZS TEMP Malfunctioning heater relay board communication IC bus relay OPTION burnt out Malfunctioning heater or temperature sensor relay board CONV TEMP communication IC bus relay burnt out PRESS RX CELL Leak malfunctioning valve malfunctioning pump c
353. ses SETUP X 0 MEASURE MODE H2S SETUP X X 8 CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day v NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT v EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display Aa M6200E Rev A1 69 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 7 SETUP RNGE Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration 6 7 1 Available Analog Output Signals The analyzer has three active analog output signals accessible through a connector on the rear panel ANALOG OUT SO concentration outputs Not Used Test Channel A1 A2 A3 A4 LOW range when HIGH range when DUAL mode is selected DUAL mode is selected Figure 6 4 Analog Output Connector Key All three outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale outputs of 0 1 VDC 1VDC 5VDC or 10VDC Additionally A1 and A2 may be equipped with optional 0 20 mADC current loop drivers and configured for any current output within that range e g 0 20 2 20 4 20 etc The user may also adjust the signal level and scaling of the actual output voltage or current to match the input requirements of the recorder or datalogger See Section 6 9 4 3 amp 6 9 4 5 In its basic configuration the A1 and A2 channels of the M6200E output a signal that is proportional to the H2S concentration of the sample gas Several operating modes are available which allow them to be slaved together SNGL Mode see Section 6
354. side bottom of instrument Figure 3 1 Location of Shipping Screws NOTE Save these shipping screws and re install them whenever the unit is shipped 22 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started 8 VENTILATION CLEARANCE Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE Back of the instrument 10 cm 4 inches Sides of the instrument 2 5 cm 1 inch Above and below the instrument 2 5 cm 1 inch e Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information 3 1 1 Electrical Connections CAUTION Check the voltage and frequency label on the rear panel of the instrument See Figure 3 2 for compatibility with the local power before plugging the M6200E into line power Do not plug in the power cord if the voltage or frequency is incorrect CAUTION Power connection must have functioning ground connection Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug Turn off analyzer power before disconnecting or connecting electrical subassemblies Do not operate with cover off SAMPLE EXHAUST Oe Y i Ta 9 o SPAN je eor L s EEE EE RT LA FD
355. slope not the same offset and slope recorded during zero span calibration and uses these factors for subsequent conversions See Section 6 9 4 6 for instructions on performing this calibration 10 4 10 2 Sensor Inputs The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A D through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard 100K terminating resistors on each of the inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT This signal output by the PMT preamp PCA is used in the computation of the H2S H2S and H2S concentrations displayed at the top right hand corner of the front panel display and output through the instruments analog outputs and COMM ports PMT HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL This input is based on the drive voltage output by the PMT pram board to the PMT s high voltage power supply HVPS It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the voltage setting of the HVPS and stored in the instruments memory as the test function HVPS HVPS is viewable as a test function Section 6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel 228 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation PMT TEMPERATURE This signal is the output of the thermistor attached to the PMT cold block amplified by the PMT temperature feedback circuit on the PMT preamp board It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the current temperature of the PMT Th
356. so contains the thermal energy created by the lamps operation thereby helping the lamp heat up to and maintain proper vaporization temperature Light is emitted through a 20 mm x 5 mm portal M6200E Rev A1 207 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual Vacuum Jacket Light Output Portal Zinc Vapor Plasma Arc Figure 10 3 Source UV Lamp Construction 10 2 2 The Reference Detector A vacuum diode UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current is used to measure the intensity of the excitation UV source lamp It s location directly across from the source lamp at the back of a narrow tube shaped light trap places it directly in the path of the excitation UV light A window transparent to UV light provides an air proof seal that prevents ambient gas from contaminating the sample chamber The shape of the light trap and the fact that the detector is blind to wavelengths other than UV means no extra optical filtering is needed 10 2 3 The PMT The amount of fluoresced UV produced in the sample chamber is much less than the intensity of excitation UV source lamp see Figure 10 4 Therefore a much more sensitive device is needed to detect this light with enough resolution to be meaningful The Model 6200E uses a Photo Multiplier Tube or PMT for this purpose see 10 4 4 for more details regarding the electronic operation of the PMT 10 2 4 Optical Filters The Model 6200E analyzer uses two stages of optical filte
357. stomer Services 2 ol te ai uous te eap emo doloe lees rele prends 272 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION APPENDIX A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision A 1 APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision A 1 APPENDIX A 4 M6200E Signal I O Definitions Revision A 1 APPENDIX A 5 M6200E iDAS Functions Revision A 1 APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators Revision A 1 APPENDIX B M6200E SPARE PARTS LIST APPENDIX C REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE M6200E APPENDIX D ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS 8 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Location of Shipping Screws c cece nmn 22 Rear u nzE le 23 Analog Outp
358. sure Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP4 With the sample pump disconnected or turned off this voltage should be 4500 250 mV With the pump running it should be about 0 2 V less as the sample pressure drops by about 1 in Hg A from ambient pressure If this voltage is significantly different the pressure transducer S2 or the board may be faulty A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause this voltage to be between about 0 6 and 4 5 Make sure that the front panel reading of the sample pressure is at about 1 in Hg A less than ambient pressure 11 5 16 IZS Option The zero span valves and IZS options need to be enabled in the software contact the factory on how to do this See Figure 5 2 and 5 3 for a flow diagram with zero span valve or IZS option e Check for the physical presence of the valves or the IZS option e Check that a working perm tube is installed in the IZS oven assembly e Check front panel for correct software configuration When the instrument is in SAMPLE mode the front panel display should show CALS and CALZ buttons in the second line of the display The presence of the buttons indicates that the option has been enabled in software In addition the IZS option is enabled if the TEST functions show a parameter named IZS TEMP The semi permeable PTFE membrane of the permeation tube is affected by humidity If the instrument is installed in an air conditioned shelter the air is usually dry enough to
359. t adequate for formal SO calibrations and is not approved for use by the US EPA as a calibration source for calibrating SO monitoring equipment For applications where more stringent calibration requirements are specified for an instrument with an IZS option installed the following provisions must be followed 1 Zero air and span gas must be supplied to the analyzer through the sample gas inlet as depicted in Figure 7 1 of Section 7 2 2 The calibration procedure must be initiated using the CAL key not the CALZ and CALS keys using the procedure defined in Section 7 2 3 Using the CAL key does not activate the zero span or sample cal valves of the IZS option thus allowing the introduction of zero air and sample gas through the sample port from more accurate external sources such as a calibrated bottle of H2S and SO or a Model 700 Dilution Calibrator RANGE 500 0 PPB SAMPLE lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS Use for formal calibration operations Use only for informal calibration checks M6200E Rev A1 167 Calibration Procedures Model 6200E Instruction Manual 7 6 Manual Calibration Checks with IZS or Zero Span Valves Zero and span checks using the zero span valve or IZS option are similar to that described in Section 7 3 except On units with an IZS option installed zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas inlet and from ambient air
360. t switches to their maximum setting This can cause permanent damage to the PMT 11 Adjust the NORM PMT value with the gain potentiometer down to 800 10 mV This is the final very fine adjustment 12 Perform software span and zero calibrations 7 5Section 7 2 7 4 or 7 8 to normalize the sensor response to its new PMT sensitivity 13 Review the slope and offset values the slopes should be 1 000 0 300 and the offset values should be 0x20 mV 20 to 150 mV is allowed 11 7 Technical Assistance If this manual and its trouble shooting repair sections do not solve your problems technical assistance may be obtained from Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service 16830 Chestnut St City of Industry Ca 91748 or Phone 626 951 9221 Before you contact customer service fill out the problem report form in Appendix C which is also available online for electronic submission at http www teledyne ai com User Notes 264 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 12 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE Teledyne Analytical Instruments considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to prevent
361. taminate it Do not exceed 15 psi pressure 4 If the instrument has the zero and span valve option the normally closed ports on each valve should also be separately checked Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution 5 If the analyzer is equipped with an IZS Option connect the leak checker to the Dry Air inlet and check with soap bubble solution 6 Once the leak has been located and repaired the leak down rate of the indicated pressure should be less than 1 in Hg A 0 4 psi in 5 minutes after the pressure is turned off 7 Clean soap solution from all surfaces re connect the sample and exhaust lines and replace the instrument cover Restart the analyzer 11 5 2 Performing a Sample Flow Check CAUTION Use a separate calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between and 1000 cm3 min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer Do not use the built in flow measurement viewable from the front panel of the instrument Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument to monitor drift of the internal flow measurement A decreasing actual sample flow may point to slowly clogging 252 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR pneumatic paths most likely critical flow orifices or sintered filters To perform a sample flow check 1 Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel
362. tched to the characteristics of the recording device Outputs configured for automatic calibration can be calibrated as a group or individually Calibration of the analog outputs needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer performed in the factory as part of the configuration process or whenever re calibration is required 86 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To calibrate the outputs as a group activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press STARTING FROM DIAGNOSTIC MENU see Section 6 9 1 DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION Exit at any time to return to the PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT main DIAG menu DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO If AutoCal has been turned off for any channel the message for that channel will be DIA AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 1 similar to AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 pe NOT AUTO CAL AUTO CALIBRATING TEST OUTPUT SET SET CAL CONC OUT 1 If any of the channels have 1 not been calibrated this message will read NO i Exit to return to DIAG AOUTS CALIBRATED YES the configuration menu SET SET gt CAL EXIT To automatically calibrate an single analog channel activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press M6200E Rev A1 87 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual
363. te with the relay board SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of operational parameters SYSTEM RESET The computer was rebooted UV LAMP WARNING The UV lamp intensity measured by the reference detector reading too low or too high M6200E Rev A1 63 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual To view and clear warning messages after several attempts to clear it the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm up period SAMPLE HVPS WARNING CO2 0 00 TEST deactivates warning messages TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP n SAMPLE RANGE 500 000 PPM 2 0 00 MSG ee lt TST TST gt CAL MSG f sIST en e with v SAMPLE HVPS WARNING CO2 0 00 Press CLR to clear the current TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP PUN NOTE If more than one warning is active the If the warning message persists next message will take its place Once the last warning has been cleared the analyzer returns to SAMPLE mode Make sure warning messages are not due to real problems Figure 6 3 Viewing and Clearing M6200E WARNING Messages 6 3 Calibration Mode Pressing the CAL key switches the M6200E into multi point calibration mode In this mode the user can calibrate the instrument or check
364. the entire process to TST gt CAL setup NEXT ENTR EXIT set up the COM2 port y SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Y Continue pressing next until 8 1 8 ENTR v Yy SETUP 1 HESSEN PROTOCOL OFF PRIMARY SETUP MENU OFF DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Toggle OFF ON keys EE SETUPX X COMI HESSEN PROTOCOL ON d n SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU Li to change p activate deactivate selected mode coun Eur PREV NEXT Select which COMM SETUP X X nU MENU SETUPXX COMI E 7 1 MODE OFF port to configure ID COMI cow EXIT OFF The sum of the mode SEES 1050 pend 3 2 SETUPX X COMI E 7 1 MODE ON ENTR key accepts the modes is displaye new settings here SET gt EDIT EXIT ENTR EXIT p EXIT key ignores the e new settings 6 12 4 4 Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type Currently there are two version of Hessen Protocol in use The original implementation referred to as TYPE 1 and a more recently released version TYPE 2 that more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1and TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne Analytical Instruments web site http www teledyne ai com manuals index asp To select a Hessen Protocol Type press 150 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X
365. the COM2 port The baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud 6 10 6 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP The Ethernet option for you M6200E uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to automatically configure its interface with your LAN This requires your network servers also be running DHCP The analyzer will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network Once the instrument is connected and turned on it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra set up steps or lengthy procedures Should you need to the following Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the analyzer s front panel M6200E Rev A1 107 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 6 16 LAN Internet Configuration Properties PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION This displays whether the DHCP is ENS On Editable turned ON or OFF EDIT key This string of four packets of 1 to INSTRUMENT Configured disabled 3 numbers each e g IP ADDRESS by DHCP when DHCP 192 168 76 55 is the address of is ON the analyzer itself A string of numbers very similar EDIT key GATEWAY IP Configured disabled Sudden Nake ADDRESS by DHCP when DHCP NN is ON of the computer used by your LAN to access the Internet Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g 255 255 252 0 that defines that identifies
366. the instruments calibration with the use of calibrated zero or span gases If the instrument includes either the zero span valve option or IZS option the display will also include CALZ and CALS keys Pressing either of these keys also puts the instrument into multipoint calibration mode e The CALZ key is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point e The CALS key is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer It is recommended that this span calibration is performed at 90 of full scale of the analyzer s currently selected reporting range Because of their critical importance and complexity calibration operations are described in detail in Chapter 7 of this manual Information related to performing For more information concerning the zero span zero span shutoff and IZS valve options see Section 5 4 6 3 1 SETUP PASS Calibration Password Security The M6200E calibration functions may be password protected for to prevent inadvertent adjustments When the calibration password has been enabled using the PASS menu item found under the Setup Menu see below the system will prompt the user for a password anytime CAL CALZ CALS activated 64 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions The default status of the calibration password is OFF To enable the calibration password press SAMPLE SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB ENTER SETUP PASS 818 H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt CAL
367. tivates the beeper e Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or closed see Chapter 5 for information on these options Display Data Decoder This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU in TTY format into a bitmapped image which is sent over a parallel data bus to the display Display Controller This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself It generates a clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized It can also in response to commands from the CPU turn off and or reset the display Additionally for analyzers with the optional maintenance switch is installed See Chapter 5 the display controller turns on an LED located on the back of the keyboard interface PCA whenever the instrument is placed in maintenance mode Display Power Watchdog The Model 6200E s display can begin to show garbled information or lock up if the DC voltage supplied to it falls too low even momentarily To alleviate this a brown out watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off then back on Link To The Relay While the CPU s IC communication with the relay board is also routed through the keyboard display interface information passed to and from the relay board via this channel is not recognized by acted upon
368. to main v y the DIAG LAMP CALIBRATION SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU palio CFG DAS RNGE PASS CL MQRE EXIT DIAG FCAL LAMP CAL E mV SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU 52 6 o ENTR EXIT COMM VARS DIAG EXIT y The value displayed is the ENTR accepts the current output of the UV new value source reference detector EXIT ignores the new gt value 97 M6200E Rev A1 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual 6 9 8 Pressure Calibration A sensor at the exit of the sample chamber continuously measures the pressure of the sample gas This data is used to compensate the final H2S concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure when the instrument s TPC feature see Section 10 7 3 is turned on and is stored in the CPU s memory as the test function PRES also viewable via the front panel To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DIAG SIGNAL I O lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP NEXT ENTR EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Repeat Pressing NEXT until 8 1 8 ENTR Exit at any time to return to main the DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP menu ENTR CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MQRE EXIT DIAG FCAL LAMP CAL VALUE 27 20 IN HG A 2 7 2 0 ENTR EXIT J F ENTR accepts the new value EXIT ignores the new value SETUP
369. tocol allows a multi instrument configuration on a single PROTOCOL communications channel Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs ENABLE 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power up Asserts certain MODEM lines in the RS 232 port to enable the modem to communicate ERROR 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations CHECKING XON XOFF 256 Disables XON XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking HANDSHAKE HARDWARE Enables CTS RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking This style of HANDSHAKE 8 data transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument s APICOM software HARDWARE Improves data transfer rate when on of the COMM ports FIFO 512 COMMAND 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode PROMPT Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt COM 1 OR 2 gt MODE menu The default sting for this feature is ON Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Analytical Instruments Customer Service personnel 116 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Press the following keys to select a communication mode for a one of the COMM Ports such as the following example where HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is enabled Select which COM port to configure The sum of the mode IDs of the selected
370. tor to emitter The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer s rear panel labeled STATUS see Figure 6 17 The function of each pin is defined in Table 6 22 STATUS SYSTEM OK CONC VALID HIGH RANGE ZERO CAL SPAN CAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE LOW SPAN Connect to Internal Ground of Monitoring Figure 6 17 Status Output Connector M6200E Rev A1 139 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual Table 6 22 Status Output Pin Assignments CONNECTOR PIN STATUS CONDITION ON CONDUCTING System Ok ON if no faults are present Conc Valid ON if concentration measurement is valid OFF when invalid High Range ON if unit is in high range of any AUTO range mode Zero Cal ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO calibration mode Span Cal ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN calibration mode Diag Mode ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode Low Range ON if unit is in low range of any AUTO range mode Unused The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 8 are bussed Emitter Bus together For most applications this pin should be connected to the circuit ground of the receiving device 5 source 30 mA maximum combined rating with Control Inputs The ground from the analyzer s internal 5 15 VDC power supply Digital Ground 6 12 1 2 Control Inputs Control inputs allow the user to remotely i
371. uction Manual A Primer on Electro Static DischargeAPPENDI X A Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX A 1 Model 6200E Software Menu Trees APPENDIX A 2 Model 6200E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I O APPENDIX A 3 Model 6200E Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I O APPENDIX A 4 Model 6200E Signal I O Definitions APPENDIX A 5 Model 6200E iDAS Functions M6200E Rev A1 273 Model 6200E I nstruction Manual APPENDIX A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 APPENDIX A 1 M6200E Software Menu Trees Revision A 1 TEST Only appear if reporting range is set for AUTO range mode TST TST gt RANGE STABIL PRES SAMP FL PMT NORM PMT UV LAMP LAMP RATIO STR LGT DARK PMT DARK LAMP SLOPE OFFSET HVPS RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP PMT TEMP IZS TEMP CONV TEMP TEST TIME SAMPLE CAL LOW HIGH ZERO SPAN CONC MSG TEST FUNCTIONS Viewable by user while instrument is in SAMPLE Mode see Section 6 2 1 Figure A 1 CLR SETUP ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Primary Setup Menu CFG DAS RANG PASS CLK MORE Secondary Setup Menu COMM VARS DIAG t Only appears when warning messages are activated see Section 6 2 2 Press this key to cycle through list of active warning messages Press this key to clear erase the warning message currently displayed Basic Sample D
372. uit breaker 11 5 4 DC Power Supply If you have determined that the analyzer s AC main power is working but the unit is still not operating properly there may be a problem with one of the instrument s switching power supplies which convert AC power to 5 and 15 V PS1 as well as 12 V DC power PS2 The supplies can either have DC output at all or a noisy output fluctuating To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies and DC powered components and the associated test points on the relay board follow a standard color coding scheme as defined in Table 11 4 Table 11 4 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code NAME TEST POINTZ COLOR DEFINITION DGND 1 Black Digital ground T5V 2 Red AGND 3 Green Analog ground 15V 4 Blue 15V 5 Yellow 12V 6 Purple 12R 7 Orange 12 V return ground line M6200E Rev A1 253 TROUBLESHOOTI NG amp REPAIR Model 6200E Instruction Manual A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct as listed in Table 11 5 An oscilloscope in AC mode and with band limiting turned on can be used to evaluate if the supplies are excessively noisy gt 100 mV peak to peak Table 11 5 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS VOLTAGE From Test Point To Test Point MIN V MAX V Name PS1
373. ultidrop RS 232 Set Up The RS 232 multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3 CN4 and CN5 connectors of the CPU card see Figure 6 9 and the cabling to connect it to the analyzer s motherboard This PCA includes all circuitry required to enable your analyzer for multidrop operation It converts the instrument s COM1 port to multidrop configuration allowing up to eight analyzers to be connected the same I O port of the host computer Because both of the DB9 connectors on the analyzer s back panel are needed to construct the multidrop chain COM2 is no longer available for separate RS 232 or RS 485 operation however with the addition of an Ethernet Option option 63 see Sections 5 6 3 and 10 6 6 the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT LAN JP2 Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Cable to Ethernet Card Multidrop PCA Cable to Motherboard Figure 6 12 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multidrop PCA option 62 M6200E Rev A1 113 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual Each analyzer in the multidrop chain must have e One Teledyne Analytical Instruments option 62 installed e One 6 straight through DB9 male gt DB9 Female cable Teledyne Analytical Instruments P N WR0000101 is required for each analyzer To set up the network for each analyzer 1 Turn the analyzer on and change its ID code see Section 6 10 1 to a unique
374. ument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power supply 1 Attach you anti ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else e Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument chassis This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its components are connected 2 Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away 3 Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work Up to this point the closed metal casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induces static charges 4 If you must remove a component from the instrument do not lay it down on a non ESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait 5 Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer 12 4 2 2 Working at a Anti ESD Work Bench When working an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a anti ESD work bench 1 Plug you anti ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the work station and prevent discharges due to field effects and induction from occurring 2 Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to
375. und level from the analyzer s internal DC power Digital Ground supplies same as chassis ground ie Input pin for 5 VDC required to activate pins A F Internally generated 5V DC power To activate inputs A F place a jumper between this pin and the U pin The maximum amperage through this port is 300 mA combined with the analog output supply if used 5 VDC output 26 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 1 1 4 Connecting the Serial Ports If you wish to utilize either of the analyzer s two serial interfaces refer to Section 6 10 and 6 12 of this manual for instructions on configuration and usage 3 1 1 5 Connecting to a LAN or the Internet If your unit has a Teledyne Analytical Instruments Ethernet card Option 63 plug one end of the 7 CAT5 cable supplied with the option into the appropriate place on the back of the analyzer see Figure 5 6 in Section 5 6 3 and the other end into any nearby Ethernet access port 3 1 1 6 Connecting to a LAN or the Internet If your unit has a Teledyne Analytical Instruments RS 232 multidrop card Option 62 see section 10 6 7 fo instructions on setting it up 3 1 2 Pneumatic Connections CAUTION To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer it was shipped with small plugs inserted into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel Make sure that all dust plugs are removed before attaching exhaust and supply gas lines
376. units of measure DUAL or AUTO ranges PPB PPM UGM MGM SETUP X X RANGE 500 0 CONC 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and To change the value of the returns to the RANGE CONTROL reporting range span enter the x ENTR decipit We Hou setting and number by pressing the key under SETUP X X RANGE 500 0 Ci each digit until the expected value A returns to the appears RANGE CONTROL MENU 0 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT 9 STEP TWO Set the expected H2S span gas concentration SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP This sequence causes the analyzer to prompt for the expected H2S span concentration M P CAL RANGE 500 00 PPB 25 X XXX v TST TST ZERO CONC EXIT The H2S span concentration values automatically default to 450 0 Ci Y EXIT ignores the new setting To change this value to M P CAL H2S SPAN CONC 450 0 Conc and returns to the previous the actual concentration of ENTR i the span gas enter the 0 5 0 ENTREXT accepte the new setting number by pressing the and 0 the key under each digit until Previous display the expected value appears M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started STEP THREE Perform the zero span calibration procedure SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST gt SETUP mmm SAMPLE H2S STB
377. version digital input output PC 104 to I C translation temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS 232 and RS 485 signals 10 4 10 1 A to D Conversion Analog signals such as the voltages received from the analyzer s various sensors are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter A D Under the control of the CPU this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word The A D consists of a voltage to frequency V F converter a programmable logic device PLD three multiplexers several amplifiers and some other associated devices The V F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage The PLD counts the output of the V F during a specified time period and sends the result of that count in the form of a binary number to the CPU The A D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the is used in uni polar mode with a 5 full scale The converter includes a 1 over and under range This allows signals from 0 05V to 5 05 to be fully converted For A to D calibration purposes two reference voltages are supplied to the A D converter Reference ground and 4 096 VDC During calibration the device measures these two voltages and outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU The CPU uses these values to compute the A to D converter s offset and
378. version from current to voltage By bypassing the detector s actual signal it is possible to test most of the signal handling and conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board See section 6 9 6 for instructions on performing this test The optical test OTEST feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to create a light signal that can be measured with the PMT If zero air is supplied to the analyzer the entire measurement capability of the sensor module can be tested including the PMT and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier board See section 6 9 5 for instructions on performing this test M6200E Rev A1 225 Theory Of Operation Model 6200E Instruction Manual 10 4 7 Pneumatic Sensor Board The flow and pressure sensors of the M6200E are located on a printed circuit assembly just behind the PMT sensor Refer to Section 11 5 15 on how to test this assembly The signals of this board are supplied to the motherboard for further signal processing All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be span calibrated from the front panel See section 6 9 8 for instructions on performing this test 10 4 8 Relay Board The relay board is the central switching unit of the analyzer It contains power relays status LEDs for all heated zones and valves as well as valve drivers thermocouple amplifiers power distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the analyzer The relay board c
379. when combined with the random variation in the measurement process must result in a suitably small uncertainty Evidence of good quality data includes documentation of the quality control checks and the independent audits of the measurement process by recording data on specific forms or on a quality control chart and by using materials instruments and measurement procedures that can be traced to appropriate standards of reference To establish traceability data must be obtained routinely by repeat measurements of standard reference samples primary secondary and or working standards More specifically working calibration standards must be traceable to standards of higher accuracy such as those listed in Table 7 1 Cylinders of working gas traceable to NIST SRM s called EPA Protocol Calibration Gas are also commercially available from sources such as Scott Specialty Gases etc 8 1 4 EPA Calibration Using Permeation Tubes Teledyne Analytical Instruments does not recommend the use of permeation tubes as a source of span gas for EPA protocol calibration operations 8 1 5 Calibration Frequency To ensure accurate measurements of the SO concentrations calibrate the analyzer at the time of installation and re calibrate it e later than three months after the most recent calibration or performance audit which indicated analyzer calibration to be acceptable e An interruption of more than a few days in analyzer operation
380. while the unit is operating UV light can case eye damage Always use safety glasses plastic glasses will not do If you are unfamiliar with the M6200E theory of operation we recommend that you read Chapter 10 before proceeding For information on navigating the analyzer s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A 1 3 2 1 Startup After electrical and pneumatic connections are made turn on the instrument and pump power The exhaust and PMT cooler fans should start The display should immediately display a single horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system Once the CPU has completed this activity it will begin loading the analyzer firmware and configuration data During this process string of messages will appear on the analyzer s front panel display 32 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Getting Started System waits 3 seconds 7 then automatically begins SELECT START OR REMOTE 3 XM its initialization routine START No action required CHECKING FLASH STATUS P 01 System is checking the format of the instrument s flash memory chip STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE 1 If at this point FLASH FORMAT INVALID appears contact T API customer service STARTING INSTRUMENT W FLASH 1 The instrument is loading configuration and calibration
381. works simultaneously For more information on using and setting up this option see Section 6 10 6 54 M6200E Rev A1 Model 6200E Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 7 Additional Manuals 5 7 1 Printed Manuals Option 70 Additional printed copies of this manual are available from Teledyne Analytical Instruments 5 7 2 Manual on CD Part number M6200 CD This operators manual is also available on CD The electronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc Portable Document Format PDF and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader software downloadable for free at http www adobe com The CD version of the manual has many advantages Fully searchable text Hypertext links for figures tables table of contents and embedded references for quick access of individual manual portions A list of thumbnails chapters and sections displayed at the left of the text Internet links embedded in the manual will take you to the corresponding web site requires an internet connection M6200E Rev A1 55 Optional Hardware and Software Model 6200E Instruction Manual 5 8 Extended Warranty Options 92 amp 93 Two options are available for extending Teledyne Analytical Instruments standard warranty Section 2 3 Both options have to be specified upon ordering the analyzer Option Number Description OPT 92 Extends warranty to cover a two 2 year period from the date of purchase OPT 9
382. xample 0x1 0x12 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers M6200E Rev A1 143 Operating I nstructions Model 6200E Instruction Manual e Floating point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points time intervals warning limits voltages etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by zero or more digits an optional decimal point and zero or more digits At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal point Scientific notation is not permitted For example 1 0 1234 5678 0 1 1 are all valid floating point numbers e Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I O signals that may assume only two values They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF e Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types such as data channel names which may contain letters and numbers They consist of a quotation mark followed by one or more printable characters including spaces letters numbers and symbols and a final quotation mark For example a 1 123abc and 1 are all valid text strings It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string e Some commands allow you to access variables messages and other items such as iDAS data channels by name When using these commands you must type the entire name of the item you cannot abbreviate any names 6 1
383. y Ethernet local area network LAN running TCP IP The local area network must have routers capable of operating at 10BaseT If Internet access is available through the LAN this option also allows communication with the instrument over the public Internet When installed this option is electronically connected to the instrument s COM2 serial port making that port no longer available for RS 232 RS 485 communications through the COM2 connector on the rear panel The option consists of a Teledyne Analytical Instruments designed Ethernet card Figure 5 5 which is mechanically attached to the instrument s rear panel Figure 5 6 A 7 foot long CAT 5 network cable terminated at both ends with standard RJ 45 connectors is included as well Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS 232 port to 115 2 kBaud M6200E Rev A1 53 Optional Hardware and Software Model 6200E Instruction Manual DC Power Connector ACT LED TxD LED RxD LED RS 232 d nnecter to the Motherboard Figure 5 5 6200 Ethernet Card ETHERNET OPTION RJ 45 Connector Link LED n 7 e CONTROL IN Activity d LED Transmit LED Receive LED 4 _ SS Ss Exterior View Figure 5 6 6200 Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed This option can be installed in conjunction with the RS 2323 multidrop option 62 allowing the instrument to communicate on both types of net

6200E - Teledyne Analytical Instruments

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents